Toshiba 19DV555DB/DG, 19DV556DB/DG Schematic

Page 1
FILE NO. 810-200897GR
SERVICE MANUAL
19 - inch Diagonal LCD TV/DVD COMBINATION
19DV555DB
19DV555DG
19DV556DB
19DV556DG
The above models are classified as green products (*1), as indicated by the underlined serial numbers.
This Service Manual describes replacement parts for the green products. When repairing these green
product(s), use the part(s) described in this manual and lead-free solder (*2).
©2008 Toshiba Corporation
DOCUMENT CREATED IN JAPAN, December, 2008 GREEN
Page 2
(*1) GREEN PRODUCT PROCUREMENT
The EC is actively promoting the WEEE & RoHS Directives that define standards for recycling and reuse of Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment and for the Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous Substances. From July 1, 2006, the RoHS Directive will prohibit any marketing of new products containing the restricted substances.
Increasing attention is given to issues related to the global environmental. Toshiba Corporation recognizes environmental protection as a key management tasks, and is doing its utmost to enhance and improve the quality and scope of its environmental activities. In line with this, Toshiba proactively promotes Green Procurement, and seeks to purchase and use products, parts and materials that have low environmental impacts.
Green procurement of parts is not only confined to manufacture. The same green parts used in manufacture must also be used as replacement parts.
(*2) LEAD-FREE SOLDER
This product is manufactured using lead-free solder as a part of a movement within the consumer products industry at large to be environmentally responsible. Lead-free solder must be used in the servicing and repair of this product.
WARNING
This product is manufactured using lead free solder.
DO NOT USE LEAD BASED SOLDER TO REPAIR THIS PRODUCT !
The melting temperature of lead-free solder is higher than that of leaded solder by 86°F to 104°F (30°C to 40°C). Use of a soldering iron designed for lead-based solders to repair product made with lead-free solder may result in damage to the component and or PCB being soldered. Great care should be made to ensure high-quality soldering when servicing this product especially when soldering large components, through-hole pins, and on PCBs as the level of heat required to melt lead-free solder is high.
19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG
Page 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
• GREEN PRODUCT PROCUREMENT
• LEAD-FREE SOLDER
• TABLE OF CONTENTS
• OWNER'S MANUAL
SERVICING NOTICES ON CHECKING .....................................................................
HOW TO ORDER PARTS ...........................................................................................
IMPORTANT.................................................................................................................
WHEN REPLACING DVD DECK ................................................................................
DISC REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY .............................................
PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL ..............................................................
TRAY LOCK .................................................................................................................
REMOTE CONTROL KEY CODE ..............................................................................
HOTEL MODE FUNCTION .......................................................................................
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................................
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
1.REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL PARTS AND P.C. BOARDS ...............................
2.REMOVAL OF DVD DECK PARTS ......................................................................
3.REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FLAT PACKAGE IC .................................
SERVICE MODE LIST ..................................................................................................
SERVICING FIXTURES AND TOOLS ........................................................................
RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE .............................................................................
WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC ..........................................................
ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS ..................................................................................
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ...................................................................................
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
DVD ...........................................................................................................................
POWER .....................................................................................................................
21PIN/TUNER ...........................................................................................................
REGULATOR ............................................................................................................
SOUND AMP/AV SWITCH/JACK/INTERFACE_HDMI IC .......................................
SCALER/SUB MICON ...............................................................................................
DIGITAL .....................................................................................................................
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
DIGITAL.....................................................................................................................
DVD MT .....................................................................................................................
MAIN/TUNER ............................................................................................................
POWER/OPERATION/REMOCON/SW ..................................................................
POWER/OPERATION/REMOCON .........................................................................
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP ..................................................................................
MEMORY ..................................................................................................................
MOTOR DRIVE .........................................................................................................
AUDIO/VIDEO ...........................................................................................................
21PIN .........................................................................................................................
REGULATOR ............................................................................................................
REGULATOR2 ..........................................................................................................
AV SWITCH ...............................................................................................................
SOUND AMP MUTE .................................................................................................
TUNER ......................................................................................................................
SCALER .....................................................................................................................
SUB MICON ..............................................................................................................
JACK ..........................................................................................................................
INTERFACE_HDMI IC ..............................................................................................
DVD_INTERFACE/AV_SWITCH .............................................................................
PANEL_INTERFACE ................................................................................................
ASIC ...........................................................................................................................
FLASH/SDRAM .........................................................................................................
COMMON INTERFACE ...........................................................................................
POWER IN/OUT .......................................................................................................
OFDM_DEMODULATOR.........................................................................................
POWER .....................................................................................................................
BACKLIGHT INVERTER .........................................................................................
SOUND AMP ............................................................................................................
JACK OUT ................................................................................................................
SW .............................................................................................................................
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM ...............................................................................
WAVEFORMS ..............................................................................................................
MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEWS ............................................................................
DVD DECK EXPLODED VIEW ....................................................................................
MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ..........................................................
DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ...............................................................
ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ...........................................................
A1-1 A1-1 A1-1 A1-2 A1-3 A1-3 A1-3 A1-4 A1-5 A2-1~A2-20
B1-1 ~B1-3 B2-1, B2-2 B3-1, B3-2 C-1 C-2 C-2 C-3,C-4 D-1~D-7 E-1~E-9
F-1, F-2 F-3, F-4 F-5, F-6 F-7, F-8 F-9, F-10 F-11, F-12 F-13, F-14
G-1, G-2 G-3, G-4 G-5~G-8 G-9, G-10 G-11, G-12
H-1, H-2 H-3, H-4 H-5, H-6 H-7, H-8 H-9, H-10 H-11, H-12 H-13, H-14 H-15~ H-22 H-23, H-24 H-25, H-26 H-27, H-28 H-29, H-30 H-31, H-32 H-33, H-34 H-35, H-36 H-37, H-38 H-39, H-40 H-41, H-42 H-43, H-44 H-45, H-46 H-47, H-48 H-49, H-50 H-51, H-52 H-53, H-54 H-55, H-56 H-57, H-58 H-59, H-60 I-1~ I-3 J1-1~J1-9 J2-1 K1-1~K1-4 K2-1~K2-4 K3-1~K3-28
19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19556DB/19DV556DG
Page 4
EU Conformity Statement
“This product is marked with “CE” and complies therefore with the applicable harmonized European standards listed under the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC and the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC.”
Responsible for CE-marking is TOSHIBA INFORMATION SYSTEMS (U.K.) LTD, Toshiba Court, Weybridge Business Park, Addlestone Road, Weybridge, Surrey, KT15 2UL, United Kingdom
Following information is only for EU-member states:
The use of the symbol indicates that this product may not be treated as household waste. By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product. For more detailed information about recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product.
Following information is only valid for EU-member States: Disposal of batteries and/or accumulators
The crossed out wheeled dust bin symbol indicates that batteries and/or accumulators must be collected and disposed of separately from household waste.
If the battery or accumulator contains more than the specifi ed values of lead (Pb), mercury (Hg), and/or cadmium (Cd) defi ned in the Battery Directive (2006/66/EC), then the chemical symbols for lead (Pb), mercury (Hg) and/or cadmium (Cd) will appear below the crossed out wheeled dust bin symbol.
By participating in separate collection of batteries, you will help to assure the proper disposal of products and batteries and thus help to prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health.
For more detailed information about the collection and recycling programmes available in your country, please contact your local city office or the shop where you purchased the product.
J51Z0101A SH 08/10
P
19/22-inch* Diagonal LCD TV/DVD COMBINATION
19DV555DB 19DV556DB 22DV555DB 22DV556DB
OWNER’S MANUAL
Owner’s Record
Illustration of 19DV555DB
©2008 Toshiba Corporation Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly. *Screen size is approximate.
The model number and serial number are on the back of your TV/DVD. Record these numbers in the spaces below. Refer to these numbers whenever you communicate with your Toshiba dealer about this TV/DVD.
Model number: Serial number:
Precautions
CAUTION:
THIS UNIT IS A CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT. HOWEVER THIS UNIT USES A VISIBLE LASER BEAM WHICH COULD CAUSE HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE IF DIRECTED. BE SURE TO OPER­ATE THE PLAYER CORRECTLY AS INSTRUCTED.
THE FOLLOWING CAUTION LABEL IS LOCATED ON THE REAR PANEL OF THE UNIT.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
WHEN THIS UNIT IS PLUGGED INTO THE WALL OUTLET, DO NOT PLACE YOUR EYES CLOSE TO THE OPENINGS TO LOOK INTO THE INSIDE OF THIS UNIT.
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
Headphone Warning
Loud music can damage your hearing irreversibly, therefore do not set the volume to a high level when listening through headphones, particularly for extended listening periods.
Information for the DVB-T function
Any function relative to the digital television (with the DVB logo) is available only within the country or area where such signals are transmitted. Verify with the salesman if it is possible to receive a DVB-T signal in the zone where you live. Even if the television conforms to the DVB-T specifications, the compatibility to future digital DVB-T
• transmissions is not guaranteed. Some digital television functions may not be available in some countries.
• The DVB-T system present in this device is FTA (Free to air).
* The “HD ready” Logo is a trademark of EICTA. * DVB is a registered trademark of the DVB Project. This logo indicates that the product is compliant with
European Digital Broadcasting.
Possible Adverse Effects on LCD Screen: If a fixed (non-moving) pattern remains on the LCD screen for long periods of time, the image can become permanently engrained in the LCD TV panel and cause subtle but permanent ghost images. This type of damage is NOT COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY. Never leave your TV on for long periods of time while it is displaying the following formats or images:
• Fixed Images, such as stock tickers, video game patterns, TV station logos, and websites.
• Special Formats that do not use the entire screen. For example, viewing letterbox style (16:9) media on a normal (4:3) display (Black bars at top and bottom of screen); or viewing normal style (4:3) media on a widescreen (16:9) display (Black bars on left and right sides of screen).
Precautions ........................................................... 2
Contents ............................................................... 3
Important safety information.................................. 4
Location of controls ............................................... 6
Remote Control ..................................................... 7
Aerial connection ..................................................9
Auto setup........................................................... 10
Quick guide for ANALOG MENU operation ........ 11
Selecting the video input source .........................11
On-screen Language Selection .......................... 11
Automatic station presetting with the built-in Tuner
Changing the order of stored channels ...............12
Manual TV station presetting .............................. 13
Basic Operation ..................................................14
Teletext ............................................................... 15
Stereo reception with the built-in analogue tuner .. 16
Picture format...................................................... 17
Other convenience functions .............................. 18
Guide to using the Digital Menu system .............. 19
Language Setup ................................................. 20
Auto Scan ...........................................................20
Manual Scan ....................................................... 21
Carrier Setup ...................................................... 21
Channel Organizer .............................................. 22
Display Setup ...................................................... 24
Time Setup ......................................................... 24
Password Setup (Parental lock) .......................... 25
Version ................................................................ 26
Software Upgrade ............................................... 26
Common Interface .............................................. 26
Channel list .........................................................27
Channel banner .................................................. 27
Multi audio .......................................................... 28
DVB-Subtitle ....................................................... 28
EPG (Electronic Program Guide) ........................29
EPG Timer .......................................................... 30
Disc..................................................................... 31
Playing a disc ...................................................... 32
Zooming .............................................................. 35
Locating desired scene ....................................... 35
Marking desired scenes ...................................... 36
Repeat playback ................................................. 37
A-B Repeat playback ..........................................37
Changing angles ................................................. 38
Title selection ...................................................... 38
DVD menu .......................................................... 38
Changing soundtrack language ..........................39
Subtitles .............................................................. 39
Disc status ..........................................................39
MP3/JPEG/DivX
Program playback ............................................... 46
Random playback ............................................... 46
Customizing The Function Settings ..................... 47
®
and Audio CD operation ......... 40
.. 12
Contents
Temporary cancel the rating level by DVD disc ... 51
Language Code List ............................................ 52
PC connection .................................................... 53
Connecting an HDMI or a DVI device to the HDMI input
Connection to other equipment ........................... 55
AV colour adjustment .......................................... 58
Status message ..................................................59
Troubleshooting table .......................................... 60
Specifications ..................................................... 61
.. 54
2
3
Page 5
Important safety information
This unit has been produced according to all current safety regulations. The following safety tips should safeguard users against careless use and the dangers connected with such use.
Although this appliance has been carefully manufactured and rigorously checked prior to leaving the
• factory, as with all electrical appliances it is possible for problems to develop. If you notice smoke, an excessive build-up of heat or any other unexpected phenomena, you should disconnect the plug from the mains power socket immediately. Ensure that the unit is sufficiently ventilated! Never place next to or underneath curtains!
• This set should be only be connected to an AC 220~240V / 50Hz mains power supply - do not attempt to
• connect it to any other type of supply. The apparatus must be connected to a main socket outlet with a protective earthing connection.
• The socket-outlet must be installed near the equipment and easily accessible.
• Any repairs must be carried out by qualified service personnel only.
• Do not open this unit. A non-expert attempting to repair the unit could be dangerous and potentially cause
• a fire hazard. Keep away from rodents. Rodents (and also cockatiels) enjoy biting into electric flexes.
• The animal can cause a short cut (fire hazard!) and receive a fatal electric shock.
• Always hold plug when pulling out plug from power mains supply system. Do not pull on flex. The flex can
• become overloaded and cause a short cut. Never wet clean. Only use a damp cloth, the same as when cleaning furniture.
• Set up unit so that no one is able to trip over the flex.
• Only use the unit on a stable, shock-free base in order to avoid any danger from falling.
• Take note that toddlers can pull the unit down from the table or cupboard by means of its flex. Children
• can hurt themselves when doing this. Do not use the unit near heat sources. The casing and flex could be damaged by the impact of heat.
• The screen is made of glass and can break if damage is done to it. Be careful when collecting sharp-
• edged glass splitters. You could be hurt or the unit could be damaged.
• If the unit is mounted on the wall, contact the shop where you purchased the unit for advice, and leave the
• installation work to experts. Incomplete installation work can cause you injuries. When installing the set on a wall, allow at least 10 cm clearance between the rear of the set and the wall.
• Clearance of less than 10 cm will obstruct the vents and cause the interior of the set to overheat, resulting in faults or damage to the set. Taking fall-prevention measures
- If these measures are not taken, the unit can fall and you could be injured.
- Contact the shop where you purchased the unit to obtain full details of the measures. When a TV stand is used,
- Ensure the unit is fully on the stand and placed in the centre.
- Do not leave the stand doors open.
- You could be hurt as a result of the unit falling or breaking, or your fingers being caught or jammed. Take
extra precautions if you have children.
Avoid placing the unit on any surfaces that may be subject to vibrations or shocks.
• To protect the unit during a thunder storm unplug the AC power cord and disconnect the aerial. Caution:
• Do not touch the aerial connector. When you leave your home for a long period of time, unplug the AC power cord for safety reasons.
• The unit becomes warm when in operation. Do not place any covers or blankets on the unit in order to
• prevent overheating. The ventilation holes are not to be blocked. Do not set up near radiators. Do not place in direct sunshine. When placing on a shelf leave 10 cm free space around the whole unit. Make some space around TV (Correct shelf assembly).
• The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such
• as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus. Liquids spilled into the unit can cause serious damage. Switch the set OFF and disconnect the mains power supply, then consult a qualified service person before attempting to use the unit again. Moisture condensation occurs, for example, when you pour a cold drink into a glass on a warm day. Drops
• of water form on the outside of the glass. In the same way, moisture may condense on the optical pick-up lens inside this unit, one of the most crucial internal parts of the unit. Moisture condensation occurs during the following cases.
- When you bring the unit directly from a cold place to a warm place.
- When you use the unit in a room where you just turned on the heater, or a place where the cold wind
from the air conditioner directly hits the unit.
- In summer, when you use the unit in a hot and humid place just after you move the unit from an air
conditioned room.
- When you use the unit in a humid place. Do not use the unit when moisture condensation may occur.
• If you use the unit in such a situation, it may damage discs and internal parts. Remove the disc, connect
• the mains lead of the unit to the mains power outlet, turn on the unit, and leave it for two or three hours.
4
After two or three hours, the unit will have warmed up and evaporated any moisture. Keep the unit connected to the mains power outlet and moisture condensation will seldom occur.
Important safety information
Where to install
Locate the television away from direct sunlight and strong lights, soft, indirect lighting is recommended for comfortable viewing. Use curtains or blinds to prevent direct sunlight falling on the screen.
Place on a sturdy platform, the mounting surface should be flat and steady. It should then be secured to the wall with a sturdy tie using the clip on the back of the stand, or secured to the platform using the fixing strap located underneath the table top stand, this will prevent it from falling over.
The LCD display panels are manufactured using an extremely high level of precision technology, however sometimes some parts of the screen may be missing picture elements or have luminous spots. This is not a sign of a malfunction.
Make sure the television is located in a position where it cannot be pushed or hit by objects, as pressure will break or damage the screen, and that small items cannot be inserted into slots or openings in the case.
Retractable pedestal stand and locating the LCD TV
Observe the following safety precautions:
1) Ensure that unpacking and transfer of the unit is carried out by two or more people.
2) Put the LCD TV on a large level area in a recumbent posture.
3) Grab the pedestal stand and lift the display up. Confirm the pivot is locked.
4) Place the TV on a sturdy, level surface that can support the weight of the TV.
5) Be sure to secure the TV to a wall stud, pillar, surface, or other immovable structure. To secure the TV in this manner: (1) attach a clip to an immovable structure, then (2) pass a sturdy strap through the clip and attach each end to the hooks located at the back of the TV. Be sure to leave at least 10 cm between the TV and the wall or similar structure
.
for ventilation
To fold the pedestal stand
1) Slide the lever on the back side of the pedestal stand to the left.
2) Lay the display down.
NOTE: Do not operate the LCD TV when the pedestal stand is folded. The pedestal stand should not be folded at any time except for packing purposes.
Please take note
EXCLUSION CLAUSE
Toshiba shall under no circumstances be liable for loss and/or damage to the product caused by: i) fire; ii) earthquake; iii) accidental damage; iv) intentional misuse of the product; v) use of the product in improper conditions; vi) loss and/or damage caused to the product whilst in the possession of a third party; vii) any damage or loss caused as a result of the owner’s failure and/or neglect to follow the instructions
set out in the owner’s manual;
viii) any loss or damage caused directly as a result of misuse or malfunction of the product when used
simultaneously with associated equipment;
Furthermore, under no circumstances shall Toshiba be liable for any consequential loss and/or damage including but not limited to the following, loss of profit, interruption of business, the loss of recorded data whether caused during normal operation or misuse of the product.
If stationary images generated by text services, channel identification logos, computer displays, video games, on screen menus, etc. are left on the television screen for any length of time they could become conspicuous, it is always advisable to reduce both the brightness and contrast settings.
Sturdy tie (as short as possible)
Hooks
Screw hole
Band
Slide the lever to the left
Back side of the pedestal stand
Clip
Screw
Top ViewSide View
5
Location of controls
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Adjusting the angle of the base
You can adjust the angle of the TV-screen for 3° forward or for 10° backward from vertical angle. Hold the base of the TV while adjusting the angle.
Description of Indicators and Controls
1. Remote sensor
2.
(Power) indicator: The LED indicator lights up red in standby mode, orange in standby mode
when the timer is activated, and green in the power ON mode.
3. Loudspeakers
4.
(EJECT): Eject a disc.
(Volume) +/– buttons / In Menu: Setting.
5.
(Channel) /PLAY (϶) button: Press to change to a higher numbered channel set into
6.
memory. DVD mode : Playback. In Menu: Setting. In Standby: Turning on the unit.
(Channel) /STOP (Ϯ) button: Press to change to a lower numbered channel set into
7.
memory. DVD mode : Stop. In Menu: Setting. In Standby: Turning on the unit.
8. MENU button: To display the analogue menu screen.
9.
(INPUT SELECT) button: Select input mode for ATV/DTV/AV1/AV2/COMPONENT/HDMI/PC/
DVD. In Menu : Using as ENTER button.
(Power)-button: Preparation: Connect power-cable to 230V/50Hz.
10.
a) If standby-LED is red, you may power-off. To power-off, press power-button 1x and release. For confirmation, standby-LED will turn off. b) If standby-LED is off, you may power-on. To power-on, press power-button 1x and release. For confirmation, standby-LED will change to red and about 1 second later to green. c) If the TV is currently working, press power-button 1x and release to power-off. For confirmation, standby-LED will turn off. In power-off-condition, the unit cannot be power-on by pressing
In power-off-condition, the TV’s power-consumption is approx. 1 Watt.
If total disconnection from the mains is required, please unplug.
6
Disc slot
Illustration of 19DV555DB
12
on the remote control.
Remote Control
Function Eject a disc
Select to operate TV/DVD
Switches between the analogue TV and the digital TV
Enter standby mode or turn on the power
Select channel Select Teletext page Enter password Activate the channel organizer function
Display program position number Teletext time display
Turn the sound on/off
Toggle between the TV and radio mode
Select an input source
Change the TV channel or Teletext page up or down In Standby: Turn on the power
Volume
Select menu of a DVD disc
3
Select title of a DVD disc
Activate the digital menu
Display the EPG (Electronic Progr. Guide)
Cursor buttons
Memorize Teletext page 100 CH LIST
Call Setup menu Activate the analogue menu
Exit the menu screen Cancel marking
Remove DVD set up menu
Play
Stop
Hold the text page Skip chapter to reverse direction
Reveal quiz page answers Review playpack
Sub page selection Forward playback
Teletext enlargement Skip chapter to forward direction
Fastext/TOPtext buttons DVD control buttons
Marking desired scene Change playback angle of a DVD disc Repeat playback between A and B (DVD/CD) Teletext ON/OFF
Display the subtitle Select between the available broadcast audio
Display the multi audio menu Change sound track language of DVD
Switches between the present channel and the last selected channel Zoom (for DVD playback)
Locating desired scene Select picture format Sleep Timer
Page 33
11, 32
11, 20
10
14 15 25, 50 22
14, 27, 29, 39
14
27
11
14, 15 11
14
38
38
20
29, 30
10
10 15 14
47 11
11 36
47, 51
32
32
15 34
15 34
15 34
15 34
15 34, 37
36 38 37 15
28, 39 16
28 39
14 35
35 17 14
7
Page 6
Remote Control
Install the batteries
Use batteries type UM4/R03 (AAA-Size). Do not use old or weak batteries. The remote control may not work properly with a weak voltage from such batteries. Replace exhausted batteries with new ones. Never try to recharge normal batteries - this could cause an explosion.
Note:
Exhausted batteries can leak corrosive electrolyte, which may cause damage to the remote control ­therefore remove exhausted batteries immediately.
Open the battery
1
compartment.
Install the batteries as shown
2
below, ensuring the correct polarity.
Close the battery
3
compartment.
Aerial connection
Note: Before you connect other appliances:
To avoid potentially damaging your set, make sure all items are switched off and disconnected from the
mains power when you make the connections. Arrange the desired connection.
When you have finished making the connections, reconnect the mains power to the unit and switch it
back on.
Connect your aerial as shown below. Connections to other equipment is explained further on pages 55~57. If you have problems with reception, consult a specialist of aerial.
Back Side (Illustration of 19DV555DB)
(L)
Distance of Remote Control Operation
Remote sensor
Maximum distance approx. 5m
Transmitter window
30 30
Point the remote control directly at the remote sensor.
The remote control handset will not work properly in the following cases:
If bright sunlight directly beams onto the unit front. If an obstacle is placed between the unit and the
If the batteries have not been installed according to their polarities.
handset.
Z
If the batteries are weak.
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
8
Auto setup
Your unit has an Automatic installation which makes installation in your unit easy. When you turn on the unit for the first time, the Automatic installation routine is activated. Using this routine, you can select the on-screen language and automatically search for and store all the receivable analogue and digital (DVB) channels. The Automatic station presetting feature is for the set’s built-in tuner only. If you have a device such as a digital decoder (eg. Satellite or Digital Terrestrial) connected (see page 55), you would need to tune it in separately according to its own instructions.
Note:
To cancel the Auto Tuning, press EXIT during the process.
If on the “AUTO INSTALLATION COUNTRY” screen “UK” is selected, “Move To” cannot be used in UK (see page 23).
THE AUTOMATIC TUNING PROCESS WILL ONLY START BY ITSELF THE FIRST TIME YOU SWITCH THE SET ON. HOWEVER YOU CAN RESTART THIS PROCESS VIA THE MENU SYSTEM (see page 12 for analogue channels, and page 20 for digital channels).
10
Preparation:
Press
(Power) on the unit or press (On/Standby) on
the remote control.
AUTO INSTALLATION menu will
1
appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select LANGUAGE, then press ENTER. Press ϵ or ϶ to select desired language. Then press ENTER.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select COUNTRY,
2
then press ENTER. Press ϵ or ϶ to select your country. Then press ENTER.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select AUTO
3
TUNING, then press ENTER. The confirmation screen will be displayed. Press ENTER to start automatic tuning. Your TV will now automatically tune in all available channels. Your TV will tune the analogue channels first, then tune the digital channels.
Note:
Please be patient - the Auto
• Tuning process can take several minutes to complete.
When the programme on the screen stops changing and the sound comes on, the search process is complete.
EXIT : END MENU: RETURN
EXIT : END MENU: RETURN
EXIT : END MENU: RETURN
(ANALOGUE)
Auto Scan
TV
001 BBC ONE 002 BBC TWO 007 BBC THREE
Carrier :1
Frequency (kHz) :562000
Searching... Progress
AUTO INSTALLATION
LANGUAGE ENGLISH
COUNTRY UK AUTO TUNING
ENGLISH
AUTO INSTALLATION
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH COUNTRY
UK AUTO TUNING
UK
AUTO INSTALLATION
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
COUNTRY UK
AUTO TUNING
AUTO TUNING
10 %
DVB-T 16QAM
:003
Radio
070 BBC Radio 1
Exit
(DIGITAL)
(K)
R
R
(A) (B) (C) (D)
(A) Power supply: Connect the supplied power cable to an AC 220-240V/50Hz mains power supply only
- do not attempt to connect it to any other type of supply. Never try to repair a damaged AC power cord with isolation-tape - this should be repaired by a specialist or replaced. Do not let your pet loose near the cable. Animals biting into the cable could receive a fatal electric shock, and could cause a hazard to others.
(B) HEADPHONE jack: Plug headphones with a mini plug (3.5 mm) into this jack. (C) COMPONENT input: See page 57. (D) AV2 input: Input for analogue A/V-Signal (Composite or S-Video). See page 57. (E) PC MONITOR input (PC): See page 53. (F) Scart socket (AV1): For the connection of scart cable. See pages 55~57. (G) PC AUDIO input: See pages 53, 54. (H) HDMI input : See page 54. (I) Aerial input socket: Connect the outdoor aerial to the aerial input socket as shown. (J) Digital audio output: Digital output for CD/DVD & DVB-T (see page 56). (K) C.I. slot: The Common Interface allows you to insert CAM (Conditional Access Module) and a suitable
Smart Card to give you access to additional Pay-TV services. (See page 26) Before inserting the module, make sure to turn off the main power and then insert the module all the way into the slot until it is flushed with the side panel buttons.
(L) Bracket holes: Fix a wall mounting bracket (not supplied) here.
(E) (F) (G)(H)(I) (J)
9
Quick guide for ANALOG MENU operation/Selecting the
video input source/On-screen Language Selection
Make sure the aerial connection and power supply are connected as per the description on previous page.
Preparations:
Turn on the unit with the button on the unit. The indicator will light up in green. To change the unit to standby mode, press
on the remote control.
(Power) indicator will change from green to red. To turn on the unit from standby mode, press remote control again. In standby mode, you can also turn the unit on with
on the unit or PAGE / on
the remote control. To turn off the unit press button on the unit - to completely switch it off, disconnect the mains power supply. Press TV/DVD to select the TV mode.
Press ATV/DTV to select the
• analogue TV mode.
:001
Note:
If no buttons are pressed for more
• than approx. 60 seconds, the MENU disappears automatically.
(Power)
(Channel) or
Quick guide for ANALOG MENU operation
Call ANALOG MENU and for example: Select AUTO TUNING.
Press INPUT.
1
(Power)
Select ATV. Press MENU.
2
Press ϵ or ϶ to select .
on the
Press ϳ or ϴ to select AUTO
3
TUNING, then press ENTER to enter the AUTO TUNING menu.
(Power)
... on the following pages the MENU can be called in the same way as here.
4
Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
Selecting the video input source
Press INPUT to view a signal from another device connected to your TV, such as a VCR or DVD player. You can select each input source depending on which input jacks you used to connect your devices. To select the video input source, press ϳ /ϴ. Then press ENTER within 6 seconds.
You can return to ATV mode by pressing a numbered button
• even if you switched to external input mode from DTV mode.
On-screen Language Selection
Select LANGUAGE (unless you
1
have already selected when the set was first switched on). Then press ENTER.
Press ϵ or ϶ to select the desired language.
2
Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
3
AUTO TUNING
MANUAL TUNING
CH ALLOCATION
LANGUAGE ENGLISH VERTICAL POSITION 0
AUTO 4:3 DEFAULT 4:3
AUTO TUNING
MANUAL TUNING
CH ALLOCATION
LANGUAGE ENGLISH VERTICAL POSITION 0
AUTO 4:3 DEFAULT
INPUT SELECT
ATV
DTV
AV1
AV2
COMPONENT
HDMI
AUTO TUNING
MANUAL TUNING
CH ALLOCATION
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH VERTICAL POSITION 0
AUTO 4:3 DEFAULT
ENGLISH
4:3
4:3
11
Page 7
Automatic station presetting with the built-in Tuner/ Changing the order of stored channels
Automatic station presetting with the built-in Tuner
Perform this feature to search for and store new analogue TV programmes after the Automatic installation. (see page 10)
Preparation:
Make sure your antenna is connected to the aerial input (see page 9). Select ATV (see page 11). Then press MENU.
Select AUTO TUNING, then press
1
ENTER.
Select COUNTRY, then press ENTER.
2
Press ϵ or ϶ to select your country, then press ENTER.
Select START. Then press ENTER.
3
The automatic tuning will search for available broadcasts and should store the channels in the correct order. During the search the sound is muted. When all programs have been stored, the normal TV screen will appear.
Changing the order of stored channels
The Automatic station presetting stores the stations in a specific order. However, this order can be changed if you wish.
Select CH ALLOCATION.
1
Then press ENTER.
Select desired option, then press
2
ENTER.
After setting the each option, press MENU to return to CH
3
ALLOCATION menu.
Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
4
Description about the each setting option: SORT: Press ϳ or ϴ to select the channel that you want to move, then press ENTER.
Note:
To restart digital auto tuning, see page 20.
When the COUNTRY is set to UK, the automatic tuning will search for UHF broad-casts only.
When changing the order of the channels, it is best to start with Ch1.
12
Press ϳ or ϴ to select the position that you want to move the channel to, then press ENTER. ERASE PROGRAM: Press ϳ or ϴ to select the channel that you want to erase, then press ENTER. SKIP: Press ϳ or ϴ to select the channel that you want to skip, then press ENTER. CH LABEL: Press ϳ or ϴ to select channel that you want to rename, then press ENTER. Press ϳ or ϴ to select character, then press ϵ or ϶. The cursor will move to the next position. Press ENTER to set the channel label.
mark will appear.
AUTO TUNING
MANUAL TUNING
CH ALLOCATION
LANGUAGE ENGLISH VERTICAL POSITION 0
AUTO 4:3 DEFAULT
COUNTRY
START
UK
AUTO TUNING
MANUAL TUNING
CH ALLOCATION
LANGUAGE ENGLISH VERTICAL POSITION 0
AUTO 4:3 DEFAULT
SORT
ERASE PROGRAM
SKIP
CH LABEL
Manual TV station presetting
If you like, you may manually tune a certain station into a selected program position, without deleting or modifying program position’s contents. Example: Store the BBC 2 into program position 2.
Preparation: connect aerial cable. Select program position
1
2. Press 2 (see page 14). OSD will indicate “2” in right upper corner. Eventually recently stored TV-channel’s name might also appear.
Press MENU. Press ϵ or ϶ to select
2
tool-page (see right). Press ϳ or ϴ
4:3
UK
4:3
Note:
Usually fine tuning is not necessary, due to tuning’s automatically stopping at the very best position. If you fine-tune anyway, proper working of teletext-reception with built-in tuner is no longer guaranteed.
to select MANUAL TUNING. Press ENTER.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select COLOUR
3
SYSTEM, then press ENTER. Press ϵ or ϶ to select AUTO, PAL or SECAM, then press ENTER. Please note that PAL should be selected for use in UK.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select SOUND
4
SYSTEM, then press ENTER. Press ϵ or ϶ to select AUTO, B/G, I, D/K or L/L’, then press ENTER.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select SEARCH.
5
Press ENTER. Press ϵ or ϶, to start tuning. Tuning will stop automatically at next available station. If this does not happen to be the BBC 2, press ϵ or ϶ again to continue tuning for the BBC 2. Then press ENTER.
If you like to use fine-tuning, select
6
FINE and press ENTER. Press ϶ or ϵ to fine tune. See the note on this page.
To store other stations in additional memory-cells, repeat
7
steps 1 to 6.
Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
8
AUTO TUNING
MANUAL TUNING
CH ALLOCATION
LANGUAGE ENGLISH VERTICAL POSITION 0
AUTO 4:3 DEFAULT
SEARCH
FINE 168.30MHz
COLOUR SYSTEM AUTO
SOUND SYSTEM
BBC1 168.30MHz
AUTO
SEARCH
FINE 168.30MHz
COLOUR SYSTEM
AUTO SOUND SYSTEM
BBC1 168.30MHz
AUTO
SEARCH
FINE 168.30MHz
COLOUR SYSTEM AUTO SOUND SYSTEM AUTO
BBC1 168.30MHz
SEARCH
FINE 175.30MHz
COLOUR SYSTEM AUTO SOUND SYSTEM
BBC1 175.30MHz
4:3
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
13
Basic Operation
Note:
If the built-in tuner does not receive anything (e.g. if no antenna is connected) during TV-operation, then the TV-unit will change to standby after approx. 15 minutes.
14
Channel selection
With the numbered buttons. Example:
No. 2: Press 0 and within 2 seconds, press 2.
No. 29: Press 2 and within 2 seconds, press 9.
Press CH
or to change up or down a channel. This takes
approx. 2 seconds. If the auto search only stored 5 stations, only these 5 will appear. Skipped channels will not appear (see page12).
The CH LIST shows a list of all receivable programmes. They are located in channels 1 to 99. Press CH LIST to display the CH LIST. Press ϳ or ϴ to select the desired channel. Press CH LIST to display the selected channel. Press EXIT to exit.
QuickView
button allows you to go back to the last selected
CH RTN
channel.
Volume adjusting
Press VOL + or – to adjust the volume. The volume level indicator disappears after 4 seconds.
MUTE
Press MUTE. The sound will be cut off. MUTE will appear for approx. 4 seconds. The muting can be released by pressing MUTE again or VOL + or –.
Information display
In the analogue TV mode: Press
. Channel number and picture size setting will appear for approx. 4 seconds. In the digital TV mode: Press
. The program information will appear (see ‘Channel banner’ on page 27).
SLEEP TIMER
To set the sleep timer press SLEEP. SLEEP and the minutes will appear. Each time you press SLEEP, the SLEEP time shown will change in the order of 120, 110, 100, 90, 80, 70, 60, 50, 40, 30, 20, 10, 0. When the displayed time runs out, the unit will switch to standby. The display will disappear after approx. 4 seconds.
To cancel the sleep timer: Press SLEEP repeatedly until ‘0’ appears.
STEREO 1 BBC1
AUTO
Teletext
Teletext is sent page by page. This unit is able to automatically store up to 256 pages, but they can only be accessed once they have been stored. This can take a few moments.
Fastext/TOPtext
The Fastext/TOPtext is teletext with a special directory. On the lower part of the screen there are four different coloured fields (red, green, yellow and blue). These fields lead directly to the pages shown within. The coloured buttons on the remote control correspond to the coloured fields. Press the appropriate coloured button in order to activate the desired colour field.
Switch on / off Teletext
Teletext is not transmitted by all channels. Select a channel that shows teletext. Press
. You will now see a teletext page. (If “100” is shown without any text information, it may mean that the channel you have selected does not support teletext.) Press
again in order to switch off teletext.
again in order to switch on teletext again.
Press The last page which was stored is now shown.
TELETEXT
Note:
You cannot select any other channels as long as teletext is switched on. Switch teletext off when you want to switch over to another channel.
Select Page
Press CH
or until the page you desire
appears. Or ... enter the requested page number by using the 10 Number Buttons. And if you mistype something, just enter the com­plete 3-digit wrong page number then enter the de­sired number again. Or ... press one of the coloured teletext buttons so that a page from Fastext/TOPtext is shown.
Hold Pages
Some pages are divided up into subpages by the channel. Subpages are automatically shown in turn, as they are transmitted. In order to hold the page, press Press
again in order to display the next subpage.
Directly Select Subpages
You can directly select the subpages if required.
Example:
Page 128 from Teletext comprises of 2 subpages. In the right upper corner you will, for example, see 1/2. That means that page one of 2 subpages is being shown at the moment.
128 128 CEEFAX 21.07.03 15:01:38
Press in order to select subpage 2. 4 dashes (----) are shown. Enter 0 0 0 2. It can take a minute before subpage 0002 appears. Press
again in order to switch off the subpage feature. You can only select other teletext pages when the subpage feature is switched off.
Enlargement
In order to enlarge the display, press Either the upper or lower half of the screen is enlarged. Each time you press display of the upper or lower half of the screen or the full picture.
Answering Quiz Questions
Some pages contain quiz questions with concealed answers. Press
in order to show the answers.
Page 100
Press ENTER in order to show page 100.
you switch between the
1/2
.
.
15
Page 8
Stereo reception with the built-in analogue tuner
The built-in Tuner can detect and receive NICAM stereo broadcasts automatically.
Note:
In case of bad reception, the stereo
• sound also can be disturbed.
16
NICAM stereo sound reception:
Select NICAM, then press ENTER.
1
Press ϵ or ϶ to select AUTO or OFF. Select OFF if you do not want to receive NICAM sound.
Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
2
The following types of broadcast are possible with NICAM transmissions
‘NICAM ST’ illuminates for approx. 4 seconds when a NICAM STEREO broadcast signal is received.
‘NICAM M1’ illuminates for approx. 4 seconds when a NICAM MONO A broadcast signal is received.
‘NICAM M1/M2’ illuminates for approx. 4 seconds when a NICAM MONO A and MONO B broadcast signal is received.
This will be displayed for approx. 4 seconds if a NICAM signal is received when the ‘NICAM OFF’ option is selected.
NICAM AUTO
BASS 25
TREBLE 25
BALANCE 0
HDMI AUDIO HDMI
RESET
NICAM ST
NICAM M1
NICAM M1 / M2
NICAM OFF
Stereo reception in Germany
‘STEREO’ illuminates for approx. 4 seconds when a STEREO broadcast signal is received.
When 2-channel sound reception is available, you can select your preferred audio with the AUDIO SELECT button.
Each time you press AUDIO SELECT, the sound channel will switch to the alternative channel available.
NICAM 2-channel sound reception (not available in Germany)
NICAM M1/M2
STEREO
NICAM M1/M2
2-channel sound reception in Germany
SOUND 1 / 2
SOUND 1 / 2
Picture format
The broadcaster may transmit a Wide Screen Signalling (WSS) signal which can determine the correct picture width and set it automatically when the AUTO setting is used. If you want to change this setting, you can select from the formats listed below.
AUTO
Press PIC SIZE repeatedly until AUTO
AUTO
appears.
Notes:
When the PICTURE SIZE is set to AUTO, the aspect ratio will automatically change according to the Wide Screen Signalling (WSS) signal, if it is available. This may be either transmitted by the broadcasting TV channel, or via a recording from a VCR etc. Any WSS signal received will only be effective in the AUTO mode - however, some DVD players / Digital Decoders etc. will automatically switch the aspect ratio via the SCART input (Pin 8 switching), even if AUTO is not selected. In any case if you want to change to a different aspect ratio to the one selected automatically, you can change it by pressing PIC SIZE.
In PC mode, the PICTURE SIZE feature is available only for 16:9 or 4:3 format. (In ‘WXGA INPUT’ mode, the PICTURE SIZE feature is not available.)
In HDMI or COMPONENT mode of scanning rate: 720p and 1080i, the PICTURE SIZE feature is available only for 16:9 format.
Using the special functions to change the size of the displayed image (i.e. changing the height/width ratio) for the purposes of public display or commercial gain may infringe on copyright laws.
Manual format setting
Pressing PIC SIZE repeatedly scrolls through the following options.
4:3
This mode shows a 4:3 picture in its original size and shape with vertical bands on the left and right side.
FULL SCREEN
Stretches the left and right hand sides of a 4:3 picture horizontally to fill the screen, while leaving the centre of the picture unstretched.
Note:
• In this mode the picture is geometrically distorted on the left and the right sides of the screen.
16:9
This mode is used with 16:9 signals from a Digital decoder, DVD player or other external source. This uniformly stretches a 4:3 image horizontally to fill the screen (For example, a 16:9 image is often stored “anamorphically” on a DVD, where the 16:9 image is stored as a horizontally compressed 4:3 image - this mode restores the image to its correct 16:9 proportions).
CINEMA:
This mode is used to zoom-in on (expand) 4:3 ‘letterbox’ format pictures (with black bars at the top and bottom) so that they fill more of the screen.
Note:
• In the CINEMA mode, part of the picture may be slightly cut off due to the expansion. However, it is possible to scroll the picture up or down to view the top or bottom part of the picture (see page 18).
14:9
This enlarges a 4:3 picture to the 14:9 format.
FULL SCREEN
(16:9)
(CINEMA)
(14:9)
17
Other convenience functions
You can change the default settings to convenience use.
Icon Selected Items Setup hint
PICTURE PREFERENCE
BRIGHTNESS / CONTRAST / COLOUR / TINT(NTSC) / SHARPNESS
COLOUR TEMPERATURE Bluish (COOL) / Neutral (MEDIUM) / Reddish (WARM) BLUE BACK ON / OFF You can set the TV to automatically change to a blue screen and
BACKLIGHT You can use the Back light feature to adjust the screen brightness
RESET Select “RESET” to reset PICTURE PREFERENCE, BRIGHTNESS,
NICAM See page 16. BASS / TREBLE / BALANCE You can adjust the sound quality to your preference. HDMI AUDIO See page 54. RESET Select “RESET” to reset BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE to the
AUTO TUNING See page 12. MANUAL TUNING See page 13. CH ALLOCATION See page 12. LANGUAGE See page 11. VERTICAL POSITION When the CINEMA mode is selected (see page 17), you can adjust
AUTO 4:3 DEFAULT
AV1 OUTPUT See page 58. AV COLOUR See page 58. REC SCREEN
STATUS
RESET TV SETTING Press ENTER to enter the RESET TV SETTING screen.
Note:
* AUTO 4:3 DEFAULT is available only for AUTO picture size setting. * In COMPONENT mode, AUTO 4:3 DEFAULT is available only for 480i/576i mode.
SPORTS Bright and dynamic picture (factory-set) STANDARD Standard picture quality (factory-set) MOVIE Movie-like picture setting (factory-set) MEMORY Your personal preferences
You can adjust the picture to your preference. The “TINT(NTSC)” option can be selected if an NTSC 3.58MHz or NTSC 4.43MHz signal is input through one of the AV sockets, and NTSC or AUTO has been selected for the AV COLOUR option.
mute the sound if the signal is weak or absent.
for improved picture clarity.
CONTRAST, COLOUR, TINT(NTSC), SHARPNESS, COLOUR TEMPERATURE and BACKLIGHT to the factory preset values.
factory preset values.
the vertical picture position. Press ϵ or ϶ to adjust the vertical
4:3 / 16:9 This option selects the default way that a 4:3 signal is shown - either
*
ON / OFF This function is used in conjunction with the Timer function that is
position of the picture by up to +10 and downwards by up to -10.
as normal “4:3” or expanded in the “16:9” mode, according to your preferences.
included as part of the Digital EPG. It determines whether the TV screen switches on or not when a programmed Timer setting begins
- see page 30 for further details.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select “YES”, then prees ENTER. Reset the TV function will now begin, and this unit will automatically turn off. As the power is not automatically turned on, press watch TV.
Guide to using the Digital Menu system
When the set is in the digital mode, you can access the main menu by pressing DIGTAL MENU on the remote control. This main menu contains several options,
- Language Setup
- Channel Organizer
- Installation
- System Configuration
- Technical Information
- Common Interface The main menu is the gateway for all the other ‘sub’ menus. You can navigate between the different options in the main menu by pressing ϵ or ϶. The DIGITAL MENU button will also function like an ‘EXIT’ button, i.e. when any menu is active, pressing the DIGITAL MENU button will return to the previous stage.
Preparation:
Press ATV/DTV to select the digital TV mode.
Press DIGITAL MENU to display the Main menu.
1
Press ϵ or ϶ to select desired options. (Example: selecting the Language Setup option.)
Guide of the available buttons
Press ENTER.
2
The selected menu will appear.
Some of the options have a sub menu. Press ϳ or ϴ to select desired sub menu, then press ENTER.
(Example: sub menu in the
to
Installation option.)
When you have finished making adjustments, press EXIT to
3
return to the normal screen.
Note:
In analogue TV mode, DIGITAL MENU will not work. Please press ATV/DTV to select digital TV mode to display the digital menu. However, it is possible to use the MENU in the digital TV mode. The analogue menu includes some general settings for this TV that apply to both modes, and it will be displayed over the digital TV screen.
Installation System Configuration
Channel Organizer Technical Information
Language Setup
CH1 CH2
ABC
ABC
CH3
Navigate
Language Setup
Menu Language
Pref. Au
dio
Language
Pref. Subtitle La
Pref. Digital Service Langua
CH1 CH2
ABC
ABC
CH3
Auto Scan
Manual Scan Carrier Setup
Common Interface
puteS egaugnaLunem niaM
Texd
i
i
CI
Enter Exit
nguage English
ge
Enter Exit
Navigate
Texd
English
English
English
i
i
noitallatsnIunem niaM
CI
18
19
Page 9
Language Setup/Auto Scan
Language Setup
Preparation:
Switch on appliance. Press TV/DVD to select the TV mode, then press ATV/DTV. The appliance switches over to DVB-T-mode. Menu languages supported are English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Russian, Portuguese, Dutch, Polish, Swedish, Turkish, Finnish, Greek, Danish and Norwegian. (Welsh and Gaelic are available only for Digital Service Language.)
1
2
3
Auto Scan
Preparation:
Please ensure that all the connections have been made
Note:
If “FINLAND” is selected on the “AUTO INSTALLATION (COUNTRY)” screen, two languages are displayed for each item and the first selected language has priority. The language output depends on the languages contained in the broadcast. All the channels will be deleted
• before the scanning process begins. You can cancel the scan process
• at any time by pressing EXIT. The carriers and the services stored before EXIT is pressed will be stored. When the signal from the
• broadcasting station is being updated and you are watching a digital broadcast, the channel will be automatically updated. The list of services screen will appear while updating, and the ‘Scan completed’ message will be shown after the update is complete.
Auto Scan
DVB-T 16QAM
TV
:003
Radio
070 BBC Radio 1
001 BBC ONE 002 BBC TWO 007 BBC THREE
Information
Scan completed
Carrier :1
Frequency (kHz) :562000
Searching...
20
Progress
Enter Exit
Navigate
:001
correctly (see page 9).
1
2 3
Press DIGITAL MENU, the menu will appear on the screen. Press ϵ or ϶ to select Language Setup option, then press ENTER.
Language Setup menu will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select the item you want to change. Press ϵ or ϶ to select desired language.
When all changes are decided, press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select ‘Auto Scan’ then press ENTER.
The confirmation banner will be displayed. Press ϵ or ϶ to select ‘Yes’ or ‘No’, then press ENTER.
The Auto Scan process will now begin. The scanning process will be displayed in the progress bar.
u
nem niaM
CH1 CH2
ABC
ABC
CH3
Language Setup
Language Setup
M
e
nu
L
a
n
g
u
a
g
e
Pre
f. A
u
d
io
L
a
n
g
u
Pre
f. Su
b
tit
le
L
a
n
g
P
re
f. D
ig
it
a
l S
e
rv
ic
Navigate
unem niaM
CH1 CH2
ABC
ABC
CH3
Auto Scan
Manual Scan Carrier Setup
DVB-T 16QAM
Auto Scan
TV
001 BBC ONE 002 BBC TWO 007 BBC THREE
Carrier :1
Frequency (kHz) :562000
Searching... Progress
Navigate
a
g
e
u
a
g
e
e
L
a
n
g
:003
u
a
g
eE
Enter Exit
Radio
070 BBC Radio 1
Enter Exit
Texd
i
i
CI
En
g
lish
En
g
lish
En
g
li
s
h
n
g
lish
Texd
i
i
CI
:001
Manual Scan/ Carrier Setup
Manual Scan
With the Manual Scan option, you can tune one carrier at a time, by entering the carrier parameters manually.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select ‘Manual Scan’, then press ENTER.
1
CH1 CH2
ABC
ABC
CH3
Auto Scan
Manual Scan
Manual Scan
Ch
F
re
ABC
ABC
a
n
n
e
l lis
t
qu
e
n
c
y
(
CH1 CH2 CH3
Carrier Setup
k
H
z
)47
0..9
Navigate
Auto Scan Manual Scan
Carrier Setup
You can choose the carrier number from the Channel list by
2
puteS egaugnaL
noitallatsnI
Note:
If on the ‘AUTO INSTALLATION COUNTRY’ screen ‘FINLAND’ is selected, ‘Frequency (kHz)’ cannot be used.
When the Country is set to FINLAND in the ‘AUTO INSTALLATION COUNTRY’
If there is a Channel List in the data after Auto Scan or Manual Scan, Channel Type Selection Menu will be displayed and available to set Channel List Type. Select the Channel List Type by pressing ϵ/϶ and press ENTER
If “FINLAND” is selected on the “AUTO INSTALLATION COUNTRY” screen, Data is displayed on the “Carrier Setup” screen.
using ϵ or ϶ and the corresponding frequency set for the carrier will be set for tuning.
Otherwise you can also directly enter the frequency value to start the tuning.
After setting the carrier, press ENTER to start the scanning.
3
During the scan process, the list of services (TV/Radio) collected for the carrier will be listed.
Then the confirmation banner will be displayed.
4
Press ϵ or ϶ to select ‘Yes’ or ‘No’, then press ENTER.
Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
5
Carrier Setup
The Carrier setup option menu lists all the carriers (multiplexes) that are currently available and allows you to Rename, Delete or Rescan carriers individually.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select ‘Carrier Setup’ then press ENTER.
1
All the carriers are listed with their frequency and service
2
information - the user can scroll through the carrier list and select each one individually to Rename, Delete or Rescan.
Rename:
3
Select carrier, then press Red button. The alphanumeric keypad will appear. You can rename a service as per your preference (see page 23).
Delete:
Select carrier, then press Green button. The check mark (
) will be displayed for selected carrier. Then press
ENTER. The confirmation banner will be displayed. Press ϵ or ϶ to select ‘Yes’ or ‘No’, then press ENTER. If the option ‘Yes’ is selected then all the marked carriers will be deleted from the list.
Rescan:
Rescan allows to tune the already tuned carrier, to collect any new programmes that are currently available in the stream. Press Blue button, to rescan the current selected carrier.
Texd
i
i
Ch
4
Enter Exit
Texd
i
i
noitallatsnIunem niaM
CI
-2
1
0
0
0
noitallatsnIunem niaM
CI
21
Channel Organizer
The Channel Organizer feature provides options to organise the channels. The following options are supported: Lock, Skip, Go To, Delete, Rename, Move, Move To.
Press ϵ or ϶ to select ‘Channel Organizer’, then press
1
ENTER.
CH1 CH2
ABC
ABC
CH3
Channel Organizer
The Channel Organizer menu will appear. The available
2
programmes will be listed, depending on the current mode. The selected programme will be highlighted. To toggle within the service list, press ϳ or ϴ.
By pressing the corresponding Number Button (1-7) or
3
the ENTER you can activate the following functions from this menu for each channel: Lock, Skip, Go To, Delete, Rename, Move and Move To. (You can deactivate each of these functions by pressing the same number again.) See page 23 for setting details.
rezinagrO lennahC
S.No Service Name Lock Skip Del Move
671 MNO 672 PQR 673 STU 674 TCM 679 VWXYZ 800 SAT.1 672 ARTE
1. Lock 4. Delete 7. Move To
2. Skip 5. Rename
3. Go To 6. Move
0..9
D.Menu TV/RadioExit
Navigate
Indications:
S.No Service Name Lock Skip Del Move
030 CBBC
Service number
Service name
Pay channel
Locked service
Skipped service
Delete mark
Move mark
Channel Organizer
Setting details
rezina
grO lennahCunem niaM
Texd
i
i
CI
Lock
Skip
TV
Go To
Delete
Rename
Move
Move To *
Note:
* If on the “AUTO INSTALLATION(COUNTRY)” screen “UK” is selected, “Move To” cannot be used in U.K.
When the service is locked, you must enter your PIN whenever you tune to the service.
Press ϳ/ϴ to select the desired service.
Press 1 on the remote control. If you already set the PIN, enter it here. If not, enter the factory preset PIN “0000”. An icon displays indicating the service is locked.
Pressing 1 will turn the lock icon on and off. (PIN entry is required.)
Press DIGITAL MENU.
Services that are set to skip will not be picked up when pressing CH
Press ϳ/ϴ to select the desired ser vice.
Press 2 on the remote control. An icon displays indicating the service to be skipped.
Pressing 2 will turn the skip icon on and off.
Press DIGITAL MENU.
To view services that are set to be skipped, use 0-9 or select from the Channel List.
Use this function to jump to the specific service in one step. This is useful when there are many services displayed on screen to scroll through.
Press 3 on the remote control. Now you can change the service number on the left side of the screen.
Enter the number using 0-9, and then press ENTER. The highlight moves to the
selected service.
Delete the selected service(s) from the memory.
Press ϳ/ϴ to select the desired service.
Press 4 on the remote control. An icon displays indicating the service to be deleted.
Pressing 4 will turn the delete icon on and off.
Press DIGITAL MENU. A confirmation message displays.
Press ϵ/϶ to select “Yes”, and then press ENTER.
Change individual service names.
Press ϳ/ϴ to select the desired service.
Press 5 on the remote control. A character set screen displays.
Press Yellow button to enter a new name for the service.
Press ϳ/ϴ/ϵ/϶ to move the cursor, then press ENTER to confirm the input of a character.
Press DIGITAL MENU. A confirmation message displays.
Press ϵ/϶ to select “Yes”, and then press ENTER.
Sort the order of the selected service by moving the service position.
Press ϳ/ϴ to select the desired service.
Press 6 on the remote control. An icon displays indicating the service to be moved.
Pressing 6 will turn the move icon on and off.
Move the selected service to the desired position using ϳ/ϴ, and then press ENTER
to register the change.
Sort the order of the selected service by modifying the service number.
Press ϳ/ϴ to select the desired service.
Press 7 on the remote control. Now you can change the service number on the left
side of the screen.
Enter the number using 0-9, and then press ENTER. The service moves to the new
position.
/ .
Note:
While in TV mode, only TV programmes will be displayed and only radio programmes will be displayed while in radio mode.
The displays of Channel / Service name will be abbreviated depend on its size of the letter.
22
23
Page 10
Display Setup/Time Setup
Display Setup
1
2
3
Time Setup
If the time displayed on the Channel banner differs from the actual time, it can be corrected.
1
2
3
24
Press ϳ or ϴ to select ‘Display Setup’, then press ENTER.
Main menu System Configuration
CH1 CH2
ABC
ABC
CH3
Display Setup menu will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select the item you want to change. Then you can change each setting by pressing ϵ or ϶.
Banner
1 Sec, 2 Sec.….
timeout
7 Sec.
Banner
Top Select whether the service
position
Bottom
After all the changes are made, press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
Select how long the service banner information appears on screen.
banner information appears on top or bottom of the screen.
Display Setup
Time Setup P
assword Setup
Subtitle
Texd
i
i
CI
Press ϳ or ϴ to select ‘Time Setup’, then press ENTER.
Main menu System Configuration
CH1 CH2
ABC
ABC
CH3
Time Setup menu will appear. If the time displayed on the Channel banner differs from the actual time, adjust the time offset with the ϵ or ϶ button until the correct time is shown.
Note:
Normally, this would be done by selecting “Auto”.
After all the changes are made, press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
Display Setup
Time Setup
P
assword Setup
Subtitle
Texd
i
i
CI
Note:
There are 15 age-based ratings, ranging from ‘4’ (years old) to ‘18’ (years old) and ‘None’. Eg. If the Parental Lock is set to ‘8’ (years old), only the services which have the parental rating of ‘8’ (years old) or under will be viewable without entering the Password.
You will be prompted to enter the password, when you set new parental rating. You can set the new parental rating only when you enter the password correctly, otherwise the old parental code will be retained.
Password Setup (Parental lock)
Password Setup (Parental lock)
This feature allows you to have a parental control of the service viewing as per your preference. Once a service is protected with a password, it cannot be viewed unless the correct password is provided.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select ‘Password Setup’, then press
1
ENTER.
‘Enter Password’ will appear. Press ‘0 0 0 0’ using the
2
Number Buttons. (This is the default password.)
Press ϳ or ϴ to select ‘Parental Lock’, then press ϵ or ϶ to
3
select desired parental rating (see note). Then press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
You can also change the password using the next option.
4
Press ϳ or ϴ to select ‘Change password’.
Then enter your chosen new password (0 to 9), be sure to remember this password. After you have entered the new password for the first time, you need to enter the same password again for confirmation. The Information banner will then appear.
Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
While toggling between channels, if a service which has a parental rating is selected then you will be asked to enter the correct password to view that channel. If the channel you are currently watching supports a parental rating then the rating will also be displayed in the Channel banner menu (see page 27).
IMPORTANT NOTE ON RESETTING THE PASSWORD
We suggest that you remove the following instruction from the operating instructions to prevent children from reading it.
If you forget your password, follow steps below to reset the password.
1. Press ATV/DTV to select the digital TV mode.
2. Press MENU to display the analogue menu, then
press ϵ or ϶ to select
3. Press The password is reset to ‘0000’.
Main menu System Configuration
CH1 CH2
ABC
ABC
CH3
4 times within 5 seconds.
(SETUP).
Display Setup Time Setup
P
assword Setup
Subtitle
Texd
i
i
CI
25
Version/Software Upgrade/Common Interface
Version
You can check the software and hardware versions.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select ‘Version’, then press ENTER.
1
Note:
During the Software Updating process, do not turn off the unit. At this time you cannot use any of the buttons, apart from
After the Software Updating process, the Digital Menu memory settings will be lost, so it is necessary to go through the setting up procedures again.
26
(Power).
The hardware and software versions are displayed.
Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
2
Software Upgrade
Software Upgrade allows you to download the latest software available on the Engineering channel.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select ‘Software upgrade’, then press
1
ENTER.
If a software upgrade is available from an Over- Air-
2
Download (OAD) then the message ‘S/W available, do you want to download?’ will be displayed - you can then select ‘Yes’ or ‘No’ by pressing ϵ or ϶, then press ENTER.
If you select the option ‘Yes’ then the Software Upgrade
3
process will be initiated. It will take about 20 minutes and after this process is complete, the TV will be rebooted automatically.
If you select the option ‘No’ you can continue to watch TV programmes as before.
Common Interface
You can access the Common Interface module information from this menu option.
Preparations
Insert CAM into the DVB Common Interface slot on the backside of the TV (see page 9).
Press ϵ or ϶ to select ‘Common Interface’, then press
1
ENTER.
The CAM module name will be displayed. You have to press
2
ENTER to view further information.
In the CI Menu, CAM specific information such as Module
3
information, Smart card information, Language and Software Download are shown. Press ϳ or ϴ to select information, then press ENTER to see detail.
Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
4
Main menu Technical Information
CH1 CH2
ABC
ABC
CH3
Main menu Technical Information
CH1 CH2
ABC
ABC
CH3
CH1 CH2
ABC
ABC
CH3
Texd
i
i
Version
Software upgrade
Texd
i
i
Version
Software upgrade
Texd
i
i
Common Interface
Channel list/Channel banner
Channel list
Press CH LIST to display the Channel list menu.
1
S.No Services
671 MNO 672 PQR 673 STU
List of the
674 TCM
CI
Select the Services:
2
List of the services present under the selected Channel group will be displayed in the left side of the menu. Press ϳ or ϴ to toggle within the service list, then press
ENTER.
Toggle between the list of TV and Radio services:
The TV/RADIO is used to toggle between the TV and Radio mode. If you press CH LIST when you are in Radio mode then the channel list menu will display the list of Radio
CI
Note:
ecafretnI nommoCunem niaM
CI
If any Channel group doesn’t have any service at the time, ‘No services’ and ‘No Information’ will be displayed in the menu.
Channel / Service names can only be displayed up to about 16 characters
- if the name is longer than this, it will be abbreviated. The Basic Service Information screen (Step 2) displays the full Channel/Service names, not the abbreviated names. Subtitles are displayed on the
• channel banner. Some broadcasts may not provide this service.
services. If you wish to view the list of TV services without exiting the current menu, TV/RADIO should be pressed once.
Channel banner
When you change from one channel to another, the Channel banner will be displayed for the selected service. In the channel banner menu, information such as current date & time, channel name, etc. will be displayed.
While watching the service, press to display the Channel
1
banner at any time. It will disappear after the Banner timeout value (this can be adjusted to your preferred value, see page 24).
Service name
Service No.
Duration graph
Unclassified
Genre
Starting time/Ending time of current programme
Press again to display the
2
Basic Service Information. You can verify the signal strength and quality of the selected service here. If necessary, adjust the direction of the antenna to obtain the maximum signal strength.
When the Country setting has been set to FINLAND,
once more to display the advanced detailed
press information.
To remove the Channel banner immediately, press
3
services
DVB Teletext available
DVB Subtitle available
Lock status
Pay TV
Audio mode
251_ABC_Monosco_0... 17:17:37
Programme name
Parental rating
Basic Service Information DVB-T 64QAM
S
e
rvice N
am
e
67
Sig
n
al Qua
lity
S
ign
al St
rength
67
1_M
N
O
_10S
tep
_08
6
71
_MN
O
_1
0S
tep
_0
C
D
E
F
G
HIJ
K
LMN
O
P
o
pq
rstuvwxyz
Enter Exit
679 VWXYZ 800 SAT.1
1 M
8
Q
2
20
R
Navigate
01:egA
N
0_0005
_0
S
T
VT tsil lennahC
Enter TV/RadioExit
oeretSENO CBB 100
Time and date
7002/80/0283:7180:71
O
6
5%
63
%
_
0
03
0_Au
dio
2
_AB
...
00
5_
00
30_A
u
dio
2_AB
U
V
WX
Y
Zabcdefgh
ijklmn
again.
27
Page 11
Multi audio/DVB-Subtitle
/
Note:
DVB-Subtitle can also be changed by
pressing of SUBTITLE repeatedly.
28
Multi audio
You can select your preferred Audio mode and DVB (digital TV) subtitle Language. The Multi audio menu will display the Audio mode and Language options available with the current broadcast.
Press AUDIO SELECT to display the Multi audio menu.
1
The Audio mode and Language code will be displayed if available.
To select Audio mode, press ϵ or ϶. In general the below
2
audio modes will be supported in a service. Stereo, Left, Right and L + R.
To select a Language code, press ϳ or ϴ to select code within Language code list.
When completely different audio tracks are being broadcast
• from the left and right channels, select Left or Right.
Press EXIT. Your selected audio preferences will be saved.
3
DVB-Subtitle
DVB-Subtitle is a feature supported in DVB (Digital Video Broadcasting) applications in which the service shown can be accompanied by a text display on the screen in parallel with the corresponding audio service. The DVB-Subtitle feature can be enabled or disabled at anytime.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Subtitle”, then press ENTER.
1
Press ϵ or ϶ to select your desired subtitle language from
2
the available languages.
To turn off the DVB-Subtitle, press ϵ or ϶ repeatedly until
3
‘Off’ appears in the Subtitle menu. Press EXIT. Your selected subtitle language will be saved.
Multi audio
Audio mode
No. Language Code
001 ENG
Navigate
Multi audio
Audio mode
No. Language Code
001 ENG
Navigate
Main menu System Configuration
CH1 CH2
ABC
ABC
CH3
Subtitle
egaugnaL
Navigate
Enter Exit
Enter Exit
Display Setup Time Setup Password Setup
Subtitle
Enter Exit
English
Stereo
L+R
Texd
i
i
EPG (Electronic Program Guide)
The Guide menu shows the available programme listings for the next 8 days only, including today. However, the guide menu will show ‘No Event Name’ for programmes which are more than 8 days ahead, or for programmes within the 8 days when no programme information is available.
I
C
Press GUIDE to display the Guide menu.
1
Service list :
Lists all the services that are currently available. As you scroll through the service list by pressing ϳ or ϴ, the Event list will be refreshed accordingly, and you will see the programme information for the currently highlighted programme. To scroll through the service list page by page, press Red or Green button.
Events list :
List the events in a grid of rows and columns. Each row shows the list of events that are available, for the corresponding service in the service list. Within each row, you can press ϵ or ϶ to navigate through the rest of the events. You can easily move to the Previous day or Next day in the Events List by pressing Yellow or Blue button (the date of the programme information you are currently viewing is shown in the top right hand corner).
The full Event name along with the duration of the event will be displayed in the bar above. Event title will be displayed only if available otherwise ‘No Description’ message will be displayed.
From within the Guide menu, you can open the Description
2
menu for the currently highlighted programme by pressing
The Guide/Description menu shows the extended event description of an event. You can scroll and view the complete event description of the event using ϳ or ϴ.
To return to the Guide menu, press To clear the menu screen, press EXIT.
Guide 16:50 Sun 20/08/2008 TV
671_MNO_10Step_0820_0100_0120_Audio2_0100_0120...
MNO PQS STU TCM
Service list
VWXYZ SAT.1 ARTE DEF
01:00Channels
671_M... 672_PQR_SMPTE_col... 673_STU_SDTV... 673_STU_SDTV Moving... No Event Name 679_VWXYZ_Monosoo_0100_0300... No Event Name No Event Name No Event Name
Page - Page + Prev.Day Next Day
Navigate
Highlighted programme
02:0001:30
671_MNO_10step
671_M...
672_PQR_SMPTE_col...
Enter Exit Guide
View Info
.
8002/80/02nuS671 MNO
Events list
TV/Radio
.
29
EPG Timer
You can choose whether or not the screen switches on when the timer event begins - please see page 18 (Rec screen status (LCD Power on/off)). This is so that if you are using the timer to make a recording to your VCR or other device, the TV screen will not switch on unless you want it to. If you try to switch to another channel while a timer event is in progress, the following message will appear: ‘WARNING: CHANGING THE CHANNEL WILL INTERRUPT YOUR EVENT TIMER. ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO PROCEED? YES/NO’. Select Yes or No according to your wishes.
Press GUIDE to display the Guide menu. Then press
1
ϳ/ϴ/ϵ/϶ to highlight the programme you want to set as a
Note:
When the EPG Timer starts, the message “Event Timer Started” will appear.
A maximum of eight Timers can be programmed.
If the EPG Timer starts when it is already switched on, it will start at the exact time that is set. If it starts from the standby mode, it will begin 20 seconds in advance of the stated time. You cannot hasten the start time from
• the original start time of the Event.
You cannot set with the same date and time of another Event.
Press the Yellow the start time of the event.
Press the Blue time duration of the event.
If the EPG Timer begins during standby mode, the indicator on the unit will be lit in orange. This is to indicate that an EPG Timer event has begun in standby mode.
When in power-off-condition, EPG Timer cannot be activated.
30
button
button
to change
to change the
(Power)
timer event, then press ENTER.
Note:
If you select an event which has already started, the selected program will be displayed on the screen, as you cannot set the timer for a programme which has already started.
To display the stored timer events, press GUIDE twice. The Event Timer menu (see step 3 below) will appear. You can also delete or change the frequency (Once / Daily / Weekly) of the stored timer events (but please note that you cannot edit the time details that have been set from the EPG).
The confirmation banner will be displayed.
2
Press ϵ or ϶ to select ‘Yes’ or ‘No’, then press ENTER (the selected option is shown in blue).
The Event Timer menu will appear.
3
Press the Red button to set the Timer mode for a selected event.
The Timer mode
4
specifies the frequency of Timer wake-up which can be set as Once, Daily or Weekly. Press ENTER to save the selected Timer mode.
Note:
To delete a timer event, select the specified event, then press the Green
To return to the Guide menu, press DIGITAL MENU.
5
To clear the menu screen, press EXIT.
Guide 16:50 Sun 20/08/2008 TV
671_MNO_10Step_0820_0100_0120_Audio2_0100_0120...
MNO PQS STU TCM VWXYZ SAT.1 ARTE DEF
Page - Page + Prev.Day Next Day
Navigate
Event Timer
Service Name Mode Date Time Duration BBC ONE Once 26/02/08 08:10 00:23
Timer mode Edit Timer Edit Duration
Navigate
Event Timer
Service Name Mode Date BBC ONE Once 26/02
Once Daily Weekly
button
.
01:00Channels
671_M...
671_M... 672_PQR_SMPTE_col... 673_STU_SDTV... 673_STU_SDTV Moving... No Event Name 679_VWXYZ_Monosoo_0100_0300... No Event Name No Event Name No Event Name
Enter Exit Guide
View Info
Delete Timer
02:0001:30
671_MNO_10step
672_PQR_SMPTE_col...
Enter Exit
Disc
DVD discs must be Region 2 or Region ALL type to play on this unit. The suitable disc formats are: DVD-Video, DVD-R/-RW (Video format only), Audio CD, CD-R/CD-RW and Video CD. Some CD-R/RW discs may be incompatible.
This unit can play an 8cm disc. Please do not use a disc adapter. It may cause trouble.
Please do not insert any disc of an irregular shape into the unit, as it may interfere with the function of the unit.
You may not be able to remove it.
Please do not use after market accessories, such as a ring protector, as this may cause trouble with the operation of the unit.
Do not play DVD-ROM, DVD-Audio, CD-G, Photo CD or SVCD to prevent accidental erasure of prerecorded
8002/80/02 nuS 671 MNO
TV/Radio
material.
Title
When two or more movies are recorded on a disc, the disc is divided into two or more sections. Each section is called a “TITLE”.
Chapter
The titles can be subdivided into many sections. Each section is called a “CHAPTER”.
Track
Video CD/Audio CD can contain several items. These are assigned to tracks.
Removing Disc from Case
Be sure to hold the edge of disc. Do not touch the surface of the disc. Pick up the disc gently from the case.
Do not scratch the disc.
Do not get dirt on the surface of the disc.
Do not stick a label or adhesive tape on the disc.
Do not drop or bend the disc.
Storing Disc
Store the disc in the case to avoid risk of scratches, dirt or damage.
Do not leave disc exposed to direct sunlight or in hot or humid places.
Cleaning Disc
Wipe the disc with a clean, dry cloth from center to edge.
Do not wipe in circular direction.
Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners.
On Video CDs
This unit supports Video CDs equipped with the PBC (Version 2.0) function. (PBC is the abbreviation of Playback Control.) You can enjoy two playback variations depending on types of discs.
Video CD not equipped with PBC function (Version 1.1) Sound and movie can be played on this TV/DVD in the same way as an audio CD.
Video CD equipped with PBC function (Version 2.0) In addition to operation of a Video CD not equipped with the PBC function, you can enjoy playback of interactive software with search function by using the menu displayed on the TV screen (Menu Playback). Some of the functions described in this owner’s manual may not work with some discs.
To turn off the PBC
1.
Press PLAY MODE in the Stop mode.
2.
Press ϳ/ϴ to select “Mode”, then press ENTER repeatedly until “Off” appears.
3.
Press PLAY MODE again to clear the screen.
To turn on the PBC
Follow the above step 1~2, then press ENTER repeatedly until “PBC” appear.
CHAPTER 1
TRACK 1 TRACK 2 TRACK 3 TRACK 4 TRACK 5
DVD DISC
TITLE1 TITLE2
CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 3CHAPTER 1
Video-CD/Audio-CD
31
Page 12
Playing a disc
This section shows you the basics on how to play a disc.
Basic playback (DVD/VCD/Audio CD)
Preparation
Make sure that the (ON). (The
Press TV/DVD on the remote control to select the DVD
1
mode.
Place the disc in the
2
disc slot with the label side facing forward. (If the disc has a label.)
Do not place a disc which is unplayable in this unit.
On the TV-screen, “ ” changes to “Reading” and then
3
playback commences.
A menu screen will appear on the TV screen if the disc
• has a menu feature. Press ϳ/ϴ/ϵ/϶ to select title, then press ENTER.
• Title is selected and play commences.
Press to end playback.
4
The unit records the stopped point, depending on the
• disc. “ resume playback (from the scene point). If you press again (“ ” appears on the screen.), the
• unit will clear the stopped point.
To start playback in the stop mode
Press PLAY (
(Power) switch on the unit is pushed in
(Power) indicator lights up.)
Reading
” appears on the screen. Press
).
PLAY
( ) to
Playing a disc
To pause playback (still mode)
Press
during playback.
To resume normal playback, press PLAY (
The sound is muted during still mode.
To stop playback
Press .
To remove the disc
Press
.
Remove the disc after the disc comes out.
Note:
If a non-compatible disc is loaded, “Incorrect Disc”, “Region Code Error” or “Parental Error” will appear on the TV screen according to the type of loaded disc. In this case, check your disc again (see pages 31 and 50).
Some discs may take a minute or so to start playback.
When you set a single-faced disc label backwards (i.e. the wrong way), “Reading” will appear on the display for a few minutes and then “Incorrect Disc” will continue to be displayed.
Some discs may not work the resuming facility.
Resuming cannot function when you play a PBC-featured Video CD while the PBC is on. To turn off the PBC, see page
31.
Some playback operations of DVDs may be intentionally fixed by software producers. Since this unit plays DVDs according to the disc contents the software producers designed, some playback features may not be available. Also refer to the instructions supplied with the DVDs. Do not move the unit during playback. Doing so may damage
• the disc. In many instances, a menu screen will appear after playback
• of a movie is completed. Prolonged display of an on-screen menu may damage your television set, permanently etching that image onto its screen. To avoid this, be sure to press on your remote control once the movie is completed.
There may be a slight delay between the button is pressed and the function activates.
).
Note:
If the unit does not operate properly:
Static electricity, etc., may affect the player’s operation. Disconnect the AC power cord once, then connect it again. If a disc is inserted during some modes
• other than DVD mode, it may switch to DVD mode and then playback may be begun automatically.
32
Playing a disc
Note:
A prohibition symbol “ at the upper right of the screen. This symbol means either the feature you tried is not available on the disc, or the unit cannot access the feature at this time. This does not indicate a problem with the unit.
34
” may appear
You can play discs at various speeds.
Playing in fast reverse or fast forward directions (DVD/ VCD/Audio CD)
Press
or during playback. : Fast reverse playback : Fast forward playback
Each time you press
To resume normal playback Press PLAY (
Note:
The unit mutes sound during reverse and forward scan of DVD/VCD/Audio CD discs.
The playback speed may differ depending on the disc.
You can use fast reverse/fast forward playback for DivX
Playing frame by frame (DVD/VCD)
Press
during still playback.
Each time you press
To resume normal playback Press PLAY (
Note:
You can use frame by frame playback for DivX
The sound is muted during frame by frame playback.
Playing in slow-motion (DVD/VCD)
Press
or during playback.
Each time you press
To resume normal playback Press PLAY (
Note:
The sound is muted during slow-motion playback.
You can use slow motion playback for DivX
Reverse slow (
Locating a chapter or track (DVD/VCD/Audio CD)
Press SKIP number you want. Playback starts from the selected chapter or track.
To locate succeeding chapters or tracks, press SKIP Playback starts from the beginning of the current chapter or track. To locate the preceding chapter or track, press SKIP in quick succession. Playback starts from the beginning of the preceding chapter or track.
or , the playback speed changes.
).
®
CD.
, the picture advances one frame.
).
®
CD.
or , the slow-motion speed changes.
).
®
) does not work on VCD and DivX® CD.
or repeatedly to display the chapter or track
CD.
.
twice
Zooming/Locating desired scene
Zooming (DVD/VCD)
This unit will allow you to zoom in the frame image. You can then make selections by switching the position of the frame.
Press ZOOM during playback.
1
The centre part of the image will be zoomed in. Each press of ZOOM will change the ZOOM
3 (x 2.0).
(x 1.5) and
Press ϳ/ϴ/ϵ/϶ to view a different part of the frame.
2
You may move the frame from the centre position to UP, DOWN, LEFT or RIGHT direction.
In the zoom mode, press ZOOM repeatedly to return to a
3
Locating desired scene (DVD/VCD/Audio CD)
Use the title, chapter and time recorded on the DVD disc to locate the desired point to playback. In the case of VCD/Audio CD discs, time and track are used to locate the desired point to playback. To check the title, chapter/track and time, press
1
2
3
4
Off).
1:1 view (
Note:
You can select the Pause or Slow in the zoom mode.
• Some discs may not respond to zoom feature.
• Zoom function can be used for DivX
Press JUMP during playback or resume stop mode.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select the “Title/Track”, “Chapter” or “Time”.
Press Number buttons (0–9) to input the number.
If you input a wrong number,
• press CANCEL. Refer to the package
• supplied with the disc to check the numbers.
Press ENTER. Playback starts.
When you change the title, playback starts from Chapter 1 of the selected title.
Some discs may not work in the above operation.
Note:
In case of the Audio CD and Video-CD, only Track and Time can be selected.
In case of the Video-CD playback with PBC, the JUMP does not work. Turn off the PBC (see page 31).
Only Time search function can be used for DivX
Title Chapter Time
Title Chapter Time
Title Chapter 12 Time
®
CD.
1(x 1.3), 2
Jump
Jump
Jump
®
1
.
CD.
33
35
Page 13
Marking desired scenes
Note:
Some discs may not work with the
• marking operation. The marking is cancelled when you
• eject the disc or turn the power off. Some subtitles recorded around the
• marker may fail to appear. In case of Video CD with PBC,
• Marker function is prohibited. Marker function does not work with
• MP3/JPEG CD/DivX
36
®
CD.
Marking the scenes (DVD/VCD/Audio CD)
The unit stores the points that you want to watch again up to 3 points. You can resume playback from each scene.
Press MARKER during
1
playback.
Select the blank Marker using
2
ϳ or ϴ. Then press ENTER at the desired scene.
Repeat this procedure to set the other 2 scenes.
Press MARKER to clear this display.
3
Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3
Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3
2700 54
Returning to the scenes (DVD/VCD/Audio CD)
Press MARKER during
1
playback or stop mode.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select the
2
Marker 1-3.
Press ENTER.
3
Playback starts from the marked scene.
To cancel the Marker
Follow the above steps 1~2, then press CANCEL.
Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3
Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3
2700 54
01
160825
02
31
27
54
00 01
16
25
02
08
31
Repeat playback/A-B Repeat playback
Repeat playback (DVD/VCD)
Press PLAY MODE during playback or stop mode.
1
Press ENTER repeatedly to
2
select “Chapter” or “Title”.
The unit automatically starts repeat playback after finishing the current title or chapter.
[Video CD]
Press ϴ to select “Repeat”. Press ENTER to select “Track” or “All”.
If you set the repeat mode during stop mode, press PLAY
(
) to start Repeat playback.
Press PLAY MODE again to clear the screen.
3
To resume normal playback
Select Repeat : “Off” in step 2.
Note:
Some discs may not work with the repeat operation.
• In case of Video CD with PBC, Repeat functions are
• prohibited during playback. Chapter/Track repeat function is cancelled whenever
SKIP (
) or SKIP ( ) is pressed.
A-B Repeat playback (DVD/VCD/Audio CD)
A-B repeat playback allows you to repeat selection between two selected points.
Press REPEAT A-B during
1
playback. The start point is selected.
Press REPEAT A-B again.
2
The end point is selected. Playback starts at the point that you selected. Playback stops at the end point and returns to Point A automatically, then starts again.
To resume normal playback
Press REPEAT A-B again.
Off
” appears on the screen.
Note:
In A-B Repeat mode, subtitles near the A or B locations may not be displayed.
You may not be able to set A-B Repeat for the scenes that include multiple angles.
A-B Repeat playback does not work when Repeat playback is activated.
You may not be able to set A-B Repeat during certain scenes of the DVD.
A-B Repeat does not work with an interactive DVD and MP3/JPEG CD.
In case of Video CD with PBC, A-B Repeat is prohibited.
Play Mode
Repeat : Off
A
AB
37
Changing angles/Title selection/DVD menu
Changing angles (DVD)
When playing back a disc recorded with multi-angle facility, you can change the angle that you are viewing the scene from.
Press ANGLE during
1
playback. The current angle will appear.
Press ANGLE repeatedly until the desired angle is
2
selected.
Note:
Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change
• the angles even if multi-angles are recorded on the DVD.
Title selection (DVD)
Two or more titles are recorded on some discs. If the title menu is recorded on the disc, you can select the desired title.
Press TOP MENU during playback.
1
Title menu appears on the screen.
Press ϳ/ϴ/ϵ/϶ to select the desired title.
2
Press ENTER or PLAY ( ).
3
The playback of the selected title will start.
Note:
Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to select the title. Depending on the DVD, a “title menu” may simply be called a “menu” or “title” in the instructions supplied with the disc.
DVD menu (DVD)
Some DVDs allow you to select the disc contents using the menu. When you playback these DVDs, you can select the subtitle language, soundtrack language, etc, using the menu.
Press DVD MENU during playback.
1
The DVD menu appears on the screen.
Press DVD MENU again to resume playback at the scene
• when you pressed DVD MENU.
Press ϳ/ϴ/ϵ/϶ to select the desired item.
2
Press ENTER.
3
The menu continues to another screen. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set the item completely.
Note:
Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to resume
• playback from the scene point when you press DVD
MENU.
38
Changing soundtrack language/Subtitles/Disc status
Changing Soundtrack Language (DVD/VCD)
You can select the language when you play a multilingual disc.
Press AUDIO SELECT during
1
1/2
Note:
If the desired language is not heard after pressing the button several times, the language is not recorded on the disc.
The selected soundtrack language is cancelled when you eject the disc. The initial default language or available language will be heard if the disc is played back again.
Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change subtitles, or to turn subtitles on or off.
While playing a DVD, the subtitle may change when you loaded or eject the disc.
In some cases, a selected subtitle language may not be changed immediately.
playback. The current soundtrack language will appear.
Press AUDIO SELECT repeatedly
2
until the desired language is selected.
The on screen display will
• disappear after a few seconds.
In case of Video CD playback
Audio type changes as follows each time you press AUDIO SELECT.
LR L R
Subtitles (DVD)
When playing back a disc recorded with subtitles, you can select the subtitle language or turn the subtitle off.
Press SUBTITLE repeatedly during
1
playback until the desired language is selected.
To turn off the subtitle, press
2
SUBTITLE until “Off” appears.
The on screen display will
• disappear after a few seconds.
Disc status (DVD/VCD)
With press of , the status of the disc will appear on the screen. To cancel the display, press
[DVD]
DISC OPERATION
TITLE NO.
DVD 00:15:25 01:41:39 Title 1/3 Chapter 2/24 1/1 Eng Dolby Digital 1/2 Eng 1/1
ANGLE NO.
AUDIO LANGUAGE A KIND OF AUDIO
[Video CD]
DISC OPERATION
VCD 00:08:32 00:51:03 Track 3/15
TRACK NO.
again.
ELAPSED TIME
SUBTITLE LANGUAGE
ELAPSED TIME
TOTAL TIME
TOTAL TIME
1/2 Eng Dolby Digital
2/2 Fre Dolby Digital
1/5 Eng
Off
CHAPTER NO.
39
Page 14
MP3/JPEG/DivX® and Audio CD operation
This unit can playback the MP3/JPEG/DivX®-data which has been recorded on CD-R/RW. Audio CD also can be played back. To produce the MP3/JPEG/DivX and a MP3/JPEG/DivX This unit requires discs/recordings to meet certain technical standards in order to achieve optimal playback quality. There are many different types of recordable disc formats (including CD-R containing MP3 files). Not all recordable discs will produce optimal playback quality. The technical criteria set forth in this instruction manual are meant only as a guide. Use of CD-RW for MP3 files is not recommended.
MP3/JPEG/DivX® - data information
Limitations on MP3/JPEG/DivX® playback
MP3/JPEG/DivX “.mp3”, “.jpg”, “div”, “divx”, “avi”.
MP3/JPEG/DivX
This unit can read 2000 files per disc. If one disc has more than 2000 files, it reads up to 2000 files, the remaining files will be omitted.
MP3/JPEG/DivX
It may take more than one minute for this unit to read MP3/JPEG/DivX
Music recorded by “Joliet Recording Specification” can be played back.
The music files recorded by “Hierarchical File System” (HFS) cannot be played.
Limitations on displaying of the file name.
The maximum number for display is 15 characters. Long file names will be condensed.
Available characters for display are the following: capital or small alphabets of A through Z, numbers of 0 through 9, and _ (under score).
Other characters than those above are replaced in hyphen.
To playback MP3/JPEG/DivX
1.
Use MP3/JPEG/DivX
2.
Insert two or three digit number in the head of file name. (ex. “01” “02” or “001” “002”).
3.
Refrain from making too many sub-folders.
CAUTION:
Some MP3/JPEG/DivX
The CD-R/RW that has no music data or non MP3/JPEG/DivX
Standard sampling frequency and the bit rate:
MP3
MPEG-1 Audio 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz 32kbps ~ 320kbps (constant bit rate or variable bit rate) The recommend recording setting for a high-quality sound is 44.1kHz of sampling frequency and 128kbps of constant bit rate.
®
DivX
video
®
DivX
version: DivX® 3, 4, 5, and 6 (specifically 3.1.1, 4.1.2, 5.0.2, 5.0.5, 5.1.1, 5.2.1, 6.0 at Home
Theater profile). Audio format: MPEG1 Layer2 (MP2), MPEG1 Layer3 (MP3) Sampling frequencies: 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz Bit rate: 32kbps ~ 320kbps Resolution: Max 720 x 576 (at 25fps), Max 720 x 480 (at 30fps)
®
-encoding Software (not supplied). The Apple-HFS-System cannot be played.
®
CD are standardized by ISO9660, its file name must include following extensions;
®
CD must be corresponded to the ISO standardized files.
®
CDs cannot be used for the purpose of recording on this unit.
®
CD in the recorded order.
®
software that records data alphabetically or numerically.
®
CDs cannot be played back depending on the recording conditions.
®
-data, you need a Windows-PC with CD-RW drive
®
files depending on its structure.
®
files cannot be played back.
MP3/JPEG/DivX® and Audio CD operation
Note:
MP3 file on the Kodak Picture CD is
• not recognized on this unit. During MP3/JPEG-Playback, you
• cannot use JUMP and A-B Repeat functions. You can use Repeat (Track or All),
• Random functions and Program playback for MP3/JPEG/DivX Playback (See pages 44, 45)
Loading CD
Load a MP3/JPEG/DivX® CD or an Audio CD into the disc slot.
1
A file browser screen will appear on the screen.
2
In case the current directory includes 9 files or more, press ϳ or ϴ to scroll in the file list.
To see contents in folder, select the folder and then press ENTER. To return to the parent directory, select “ Up ...” then press ENTER.
In case of a CD containing a mixture of MP3, JPEG and
®
DivX
files, the files are played back by selecting them
from the file browser.
Operation status
File list
/MP3-5.MP3
MP3-5
MP3-6 MP3-7 MP3-8 Picture-1 Picture-2 Movie-1 Movie-2
File number
1/15 00:00:00
Elapsed time
Select Files
Repeat :Off
Mode :Off
Music Playing
Preview windowCursor
Selected file name
MP3 and Audio CD playback
In the file browser, press ϳ/ϴ to select the desired file.
1
When PLAY ( displaying file browser displayed, playback begins automatically starting from the first file. In this case, if the first file is an MP3 file, only MP3 files are played back in order. If the first file is a JPEG file, the first JPEG file is played back. If the first file is a DivX played back. If there is no file at a root directory, playback does not begin automatically.
Press ENTER.
2
The selected file starts playing back.
Press to end playback.
3
The unit records the stopped point. “
screen. Press PLAY ( scene point). If you press
• the stopped point.
Select Files
The file type to make it display in the file browser can be chosen.
1.
Press ϵ or ϶ to select “Select Files” at right column in the file browser.(“Select Files” is not applicable to Audio CD.)
2.
Press ENTER, then press ϳ or ϴ to select file type from the list (Music, Picture or Movie).
3.
Press ENTER to add/remove check mark. Checked file type will be displayed in the file browser.
4.
®
Press RETURN to save the setting.
-
) is pressed after
®
file, the first DivX® file is
) to resume playback (from the
again or unload the disc, the unit will clear
Tool kit window
File type
: Indicates Music file
(Audio CD/MP3)
: Indicates Picture file
(JPEG)
: Indicates Movie file
®
(DivX
video)
/MP3-2.MP3
Folder-1 Folder-2 MP3-1
MP3-2
MP3-3 MP3-4 MP3-5 MP3-6
” appears on the
Select Files
Repeat :Off
Mode :Off
JPEG Preview
Go
40
MP3/JPEG/Divx® and Audio CD operation
JPEG playback
In the file browser, press ϳ/ϴ to select the desired JPEG
1
file. To display a thumbnail list, press DVD MENU. Press ϳ/ϴ/ϵ/϶ to select the desired file.
Note:
During JPEG playback, you cannot use Jump and A-B Repeat functions.
When an image exceeds 5760 x 3840 pixels, the entire image (preview window or thumbnail list) may not be displayed on a screen.
It may have a longer interval due to the size of data.
42
(To return to the file browser, press TOP MENU.)
When PLAY ( after displaying the file browser, playback begins automatically starting from the first file. In this case, if the first file is a JPEG file, the first JPEG file is played back.
If the first file is an MP3 file, only MP3 files are played back in order. If the first file is a DivX played back. If there is no file at a root directory, playback does not begin automatically.
Press ENTER. The selected picture appears on the screen.
2
Rotating an image
You can rotate an image by 90 degrees. Press ANGLE during playback of the image. “
Zooming an image
Zoom function also can be used in viewing JPEG files. Press ZOOM (See “Zooming” on page 35).
Press to end playback.
3
The file browser appears on the screen. If you want to watch the other file, repeat steps 1 ~ 2.
Slide show playback
The slide show enables you to view pictures (files) one after another automatically.
Preparation
Set “JPEG Interval” setting to “Off”, “5 Seconds”, “10 Seconds” or “15 Seconds” (See page 49).
Select your desired starting file for the slide show in step 1
1
above.
Press ENTER or PLAY ( ) to start slide show from the
2
selected file.
If you press temporary. “ Press PLAY ( show.
If the picture appears upside down or sideways, press ANGLE repeatedly until it’s right side up. “
When the slide show playback finished, the file list appears.
To stop the slide show, press
) is pressed
”, “ ”, “ ” or “ ” appears on the screen.
during the slide show, the slide show stops ” appears briefly on the screen.
) or SKIP ( ) again to resume the slide
” or “ ” appears on the screen.
/Picture-01.JPG
Picture-01
Picture-02 Picture-03 Picture-04 Picture-05 Picture-06 Picture-07 Picture-08
®
file, the first DivX® file is
Select Files
Repeat :Off
Mode :Off
JPEG Preview
W: 2048 H: 1536
”, “ ”,
. The file list appears.
MP3/JPEG/Divx® and Audio CD operation
Note:
In order to play DivX on this unit, you first need to register the unit with registration code. See page 50.
Depending on the recording conditions of DivX be able to use fast reverse/forward playback or JUMP function.See pages 34, 35.
®
VOD content
®
file, you may not
DivX® playback
In the file browser, press
1
ϳ/ϴ to select the desired file.
When PLAY ( ) has been pressed after the file browser displayed, playback begins automatically starting from the first file. In this case, if the first file is a JPEG file, the first JPEG file is played back. If the first
®
file, the first DivX® file is played back. If the first
file is a DivX file is an MP3 file, only MP3 file are played back in order. If there is no file at a root directory, playback does not begin automatically.
Press ENTER or PLAY ( ). The selected DivX® movie will
2
be played back on the TV screen.
Press STOP ( ) to end playback.
3
The unit records the stopped point. “ TV screen. Press PLAY ( the scene point).
If you press STOP ( will clear the stopped point. To watch the other file, repeat steps 1 ~ 2.
Playing DivX® VOD content
DivX® VOD content is protected by DRM (Digital Rights Man­agement) system. This restricts playback of content to specific registered devices.
If the incorrect DRM file is loaded, “Authorization Error This player is not authorized to play this video.” will appear on the screen. When you attempt to play DivX VOD, the number of plays is limited and the right message will appear on the screen. If you wish to play it, select “Yes”.
If the number of plays goes over
• the limit, then “Rental Expired” will be displayed. In this case, the file will not be played.
/Movie-01.DIVX
Movie-01
Movie-02
Movie-03
Movie-04
Movie-05
Movie-06
Movie-07
Movie-08
) to resume playback (from
Select Files
Repeat :Off
Mode :Off
JPEG P review
” appears on the
) again or unload the disc, the unit
View DivX® VOD Rental
This rental has 5 views left.
Do you want to use one
®
of your 5 views now?
NoYes
41
43
Page 15
MP3/JPEG/DivX® and Audio CD operation
Repeat playback (Audio CD/MP3/JPEG/DivX®)
In the file browser, press ϳ/ϴ/ϵ/϶
1
to select “Repeat” during stop mode.
Press ENTER repeatedly to select
2
“Track” or “All”.
Press PLAY ( ).
3
The unit automatically starts repeat playback after finishing the current track.
To resume normal playback
Select Repeat : “Off” in step 2.
Random playback (Audio CD/MP3/JPEG/DivX®)
In the file browser, press ϳ/ϴ/ϵ/϶ to select “Mode” during
1
stop mode.
Press ENTER to select “Random”.
2
Press PLAY ( ).
3
The Random playback will start.
To resume normal playback
Select Mode : “Off” in step 2.
Note:
The repeat or random function is cancelled when you eject the disc or turn the power off.
The track repeat function is cancelled when
or is pressed.
In case of Audio CD, the function of A-B Repeat also can be used. See “A-B Repeat playback” (See page
37).
44
Folder-1 Folder-2 MP3-1
Folder-1 Folder-2 MP3-1
Folder-1 Folder-2 MP3-1
Folder-1 Folder-2 MP3-1
Select Files
Repeat :Off
Mode :Off
Select Files
Repeat :Track
Mode :Off
Select Files
Repeat :Off
Mode :Off
Select Files
Repeat :Off
Mode :Random
MP3/JPEG/DivX® and Audio CD operation
Program playback (Audio CD/MP3/JPEG/DivX®)
In the file browser, pressϳ/ϴ/ϵ/϶
1
to select “Edit Mode”, then press ENTER.
When “Edit Mode” is black color, you can mark the files which you want to add into Program list.
Press ϳ/ϴ/ϵ/϶ to select the file
2
you want to add into the program list.
Press ENTER. Selected file was marked. Repeat this procedure to select the other files.
Press ϳ/ϴ/ϵ/϶ to select “Add To
3
Program”. Then press ENTER. All marked files are added into the program list. (The maximum number of files can be added is
30.)
When you finish storing the files you want into the Program list, select “Edit Mode” again and press ENTER to release edit mode.
Press ϳ/ϴ to select “Program View”, then press ENTER.
4
Program View shows only the programed files that you have added in Step 2.
Browser View Program View
Folder-1 Folder-2 MP3-1 MP3-2
In the Program View, press PLAY ( ). The files start to
5
playback in programmed order that were added by you.
To remove file from program list in stop mode
In the Edit Mode, switch to Program View. Select the files you want to remove, then press ENTER. Select “Clear Program” and press ENTER. Marked file is removed from program list.
Note:
The program function is cancelled when you eject the disc or
• turn the power off.
Edit Mode
ProgramView
AddTo Program
Folder-1 Folder-2 MP3-1 MP3-2
Folder-1 Folder-2 MP3-1
P3-1.MP3
Folder-1 Folder-2
MP3-1
Folder-1 Folder-2 MP3-1
Repeat :Off
Mode :Off
Repeat :Off
Mode :Off
ProgramView
AddTo Program
Edit Mode
Browser View
Clear Program
Edit Mode
Edit Mode
Edit Mode
45
Program playback/Random playback
You can arrange the playback order of tracks or files on the disc. And the unit can also select tracks or files at random and playback them. These feature works for Video CD. For Audio CD and MP3/JPEG/DivX CD, please see “Random playback (Audio CD/MP3/JPEG/DivX page 44 and “Program playback (Audio CD/MP3/JPEG/DivX page 45.
Note:
In case of Video CD with PBC, you cannot set Program playback.
The program is cancelled when you eject the disc or turn the power off.
In case of Video CD with PBC, you cannot set Random function during playback.
46
®
®
Program playback (VCD)
1
®
2
)” on
)” on
3
4
Random playback (VCD)
1 2
3
Press PLAY MODE during stop mode.
Press ϳ/ϴ to select “Mode”, then press ENTER to select “Program”.
Press ϵ/϶ to select the programming position. Use Number buttons (0–9) to input the track numbers on sequentially.
If you input a wrong number, press CANCEL.
Press ϵ/϶ to return to the left column, then press ϳ/ϴ to select the “Program Playback” and press ENTER.
The programs you selected will start to playback in order.
To resume normal playback, select Mode “Off” in step 2.
To change the program
1.
Select Mode to “Program” (as step 2), press ϳ/ϴ/ϵ/϶ to select the track number you want to change, then press CANCEL.
2.
Press Number buttons (0–9) to overwrite the new track number.
To clear the program one by one
Select Mode to “Program”, press ϳ/ϴ/ϵ/϶ to select the track number. Then press CANCEL.
To clear all the programs
In the above column, press ϳ/ϴ to select “Clear Program”. Then press ENTER.
Press PLAY MODE during playback or stop mode.
Press ϳ/ϴ to select “Mode”, then press ENTER to select “Random”.
Press PLAY ( ). The Random Playback will start.
If you set “Random” during playback mode, Random
• playback will begin after the track that is currently being played has ended. To resume normal playback, select Mode “Off” in step 2.
Play Mode
Mode : Off
Repeat : Off
Program Playback
Play Mode
Mode : Program
Repeat : Off
Program Playback
Play Mode
Mode : Program
Repeat : Off
Program Playback
Play Mode
Mode : Random
Repeat : Off
Program Playback
1 – – – 2 – – – 3 – – –
1 – – – 2 – – – 3 – – –
1 9
2 – – – 3 – – –
1 – – – 2 – – – 3 – – –
Customizing The Function Settings
You can change the default settings to customize performance to your preference.
Setting procedure
Press SETUP in stop mode.
1
The following on-screen display appears.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select the desired
2
section, then press ϶ or ENTER.
First option will be highlighted.
3
Press ϳ or ϴ to select the desired option.
Then press ϶ or ENTER.
4
The selectable settings will appear.
Change the selection using ϳ or ϴ, by referring to the
5
corresponding pages 48 ~ 50. Press ENTER to save the setting.
Repeat steps 3 and 5 to change other option.
• To select another section, go back to step 2 by pressing
ϵ or RETURN repeatedly.
To clear SETUP screen, press SETUP or press RETURN
6
repeatedly.
Setting details
Section Option Details
Menu
To select the language of “Menu”,
Subtitle
“Subtitle” and “Audio” if more than one
Audio
languages are available on the disc.
OSD To select a preferred language for on
screen display.
TV
To select a picture size according to the
Screen
aspect ratio of your TV.
Display To turn On or Off the operational status
display on the screen.
Picture
To select a preferred picture mode from
Mode
“Video”, “Film” or “Auto”.
JPEG
To select a preferred setting for the slide
Interval
show playback.
Night
To select On or Off for Night Mode.
Mode Digital
To select a digital output sound
Out
format corresponding to your system connection.
Parental To select a preferred parental level for
the parental setting. Password To change the password. DivX(R)
To display your 8-character registration VOD
code.
Parental : Off
DRC : Off
E.B.L. : Off
Menu : English
Set Password
QSound : On
TV Screen : 4:3
Subtitle : English
Output : Interlace
Display : On
Audio : English
DivX(R) VOD
Picture Mode : Auto
OSD : English
JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds
Screen Saver : On
Parental : Off
DRC : Off
Menu : English
TV Screen : 16:9
Set Password
QSound : On
Subtitle : English
Display : On
Output : Interlace
Audio : English
Picture Mode : Auto
DivX(R) VOD
JPEG Interval : Off
Parental : Off
DRC : Off
Menu : English
TV Screen : 16:9
Set Password
QSound : On
Subtitle : English
Display : On
Output : Interlace
Audio : English
Picture Mode : Auto
DivX(R) VOD
JPEG Interval : Off
TV Screen 4:3
TV Screen 4:3
Display : On
Picture Mode : Aut
JPEG Interval : Off
4:3
16:9
Page
48
49
50
47
Page 16
Customizing The Function Settings
Menu, Subtitle, Audio
You can select the language of “Menu”, “Subtitle” and “Audio” if more than one language is recorded onto the disc.
English, Francais, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano:
The selected language will be heard or seen.
Parental : Off
DRC : Off
E.B.L. : Off
48
Menu : English
QSound : On
TV Screen : 4:3
Subtitle : English
Set Password
Display : On
Audio : English
Output : Interlace
Picture Mode : Auto
OSD : English
DivX(R) VOD
JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds
Screen Saver : On
Parental : Off
DRC : Off
TV Screen : 16:9
Set Password
QSound : On
Display : On
Output : Interlace
Picture Mode : Auto
DivX(R) VOD
JPEG Interval : Off
Other:
Other languages can be selected (see “Language Code List” on page 52).
Off (Subtitle):
Subtitles do not appear.
Original (Audio):
The unit will select the first priority language of each disc.
Note:
If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the first- priority
• language is selected.
OSD
The setup language can be selected.
English: To display OSD language is English Francais: To display OSD language is French Espanol: To display OSD language is Spanish Deutsch: To display OSD language is German Italiano: To display OSD language is Italian
TV Screen
You have the following screen sizes to choose from:
4:3
(Letterbox)
When playing back a wide screen-DVD disc, it displays the wide picture with black bands at the top and bottom of screen.
4:3
(Panscan)
It displays the wide picture on the whole screen with left and right edges automatically cut off.
16:9
(Wide screen)
A wide screen picture is displayed full size, although the image on the screen may be geometrically distorted in this mode because the TV screen has an aspect ratio of 4:3 not 16:9.
Note:
If the DVD disc is not formatted in the pan & scan style, it displays 4:3
• style.
Display
On screen display can be switched on or off when you press any buttons.
Off: On screen displays do not appear when you press any buttons
except SUBTITLE, PLAY MODE, MARKER,
JUMP.
On: On screen displays appear when you press the buttons (factory
setting).
, AUDIO SELECT and
Parental : Off
Menu : English
E.B.L. : Off
Night Mode : Off
Set Password
Subtitle : English
TV Screen : 4:3
Digital Out : Bitstream
Output : Interlace
Audio : English
Display : On
DivX(R)VOD
Picture Mode :Auto
JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds
Screen Saver : On
Customizing The Function Settings
Picture Mode
There are two types of source content in pictures recorded in DVD video discs: film content (pictures recorded from films at 24 frames per second) and video content (video signals recorded at 30 frames per second). Make this selection according to the type of content being viewed.
Auto: Select this selection normally. The DVD player automatically detects source content, film
or video of playback source, and converts that signal in an appropriate method.
Film: The DVD player converts film content pictures appropriately.
Suitable for playback of film content pictures.
Video: The DVD player filters video signal, and converts it appropriately. Suitable for playback of video content pictures.
Note:
Depending on the disc, pictures may be cut off or doubled. In this case,
• select “Video”.
JPEG Interval
You can continuously playback all JPEG files automatically. After the selection below, the disc will start playback on JPEG files which have been recorded.
Off: Plays back one file at a time. 5 Seconds: Plays back images in the form of a slide show at 5 second
10 Seconds: Plays back images in the form of a slide show at 10 second
15 Seconds: Plays back images in the form of a slide show in 15 second
Night Mode
Night Mode enables you to control the dynamic range so as to achieve a suitable sound for your equipment.
Off: It plays back at the recording level on the disc. On: Loud sound such as explosion is toned down slightly when played
Note:
Digital Out
You can select the digital output sound format corresponding to your system connection.
Off: There is no sound output from DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack. PCM: Change Dolby Digital to PCM for the output.
Select when connected to a 2 channel digital stereo
Bitstream: Disc audio bitstream data will be output.
Note:
intervals.
intervals.
intervals.
back. This is suitable when it is connected to a stereo.
This function works only when the disc recorded with Dolby Digital is played back. The level of Night Mode may differ depending on DVD video disc.
amplifier.
Even if you select “Bitstream”, MPEG Audio will be output in PCM format.
49
Customizing The Function Settings
Parental
Some discs are specified as not suitable for children. Such discs can be limited not to playback with the unit.
1) Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Parental”, then press ENTER. “Enter Password”
screen will appear.
2) Press “0000” using Number buttons (0–9). (Please note, this is pre-
DRC : Off
E.B.L. : Off
Menu : English
Parental : Off
QSound : On
TV Screen : 4:3
Subtitle : English
Password : Change
DivX(R) VOD : Display
Display : On
Audio : English
Picture Mode : Auto
OSD : English
JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds
Screen Saver : On
setting password of this unit). Then press ENTER. The parental level list will appear.
Level 1: DVD software for adults cannot be played back. Level 8: Virtually all DVD software can be played back. Level Off: The parental control setting does not function.
3) Press ϳ or ϴ to select from the level 1 to level 8. The limitation will be
more severe as the level number is lower. Then press ENTER.
4) Press
to activate Parental control setting.
Note:
If each setup (pages 48 ~ 50) has been completed, the unit can always
• work under the same condition (especially with DVD discs). Each setup will be retained in the memory even if you turn the power off. Depending on the discs, the unit cannot limit playback.
• Some discs may not be encoded with specific rating level information
• though its disc jacket says “adult.” For those discs, the age restriction will not work. The password is required every time when you change the parental
• level. If you input a wrong number, press CANCEL.
Password
1) Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Password”, then press ENTER. “Enter Current
Password” screen will appear.
2) Press Number buttons (0–9) to input the current password (If the
password has not been set yet after you purchase this unit, it is “0000”).
3) Then press ENTER. “Enter New Password” screen will appear. Press
Number buttons (0–9) to input the new password.
4) Press ENTER. Now your new password has been set. Be sure to
remember this number!
If you forget the password.
1) Press
to remove the disc.
2) While holding 7 down on the remote control and at the same time
press STOP (DVD) on the side panel. “Password Clear” appears on the screen. Now the password has been returned to the initial value (“0000”).
(R)
DivX
VOD
In order to play DivX® VOD (Video On Demand) content on this unit, you first need to register the unit with your DivX generating a DivX
1) Press ϳ or ϴ to select “DivX(R) VOD”. Then press ENTER.
®
VOD registration code, which you submit to your provider.
Your 8-character registration code is displayed. Make a note of the code as you will need it when you register with a DivX ENTER to select Done.
®
VOD content provider. You do this by
®
VOD provider. Then press
Temporary cancel the rating level by DVD disc
Depending on the DVD disc, the disc may try to temporarily cancel the rating level that you have set. It is up to you to decide whether to cancel the rating level or not.
Note:
This temporary cancellation of rating level will be kept until the disc is ejected. When the disc is ejected, the original rating level will be set again automatically.
Load a DVD disc.
1
If the DVD disc has been designed to temporarily cancel the
2
Rating level, the screen which follows the “Reading” screen will change, depending on which disc is played. If you select “YES” with the ENTER, password input screen will then appear.
Enter the password with
3
Number buttons (0–9). Then press ENTER.
To exit from the entry, press RETURN.
Playback will commence if the entered password was
4
correct.
Enter Password
50
51
Page 17
Language Code List
Enter the appropriate code number for the initial settings “Menu”, “Subtitle” and/or “Audio” (see pages 48).
Language Name Code Language Name Code Language Name Code Language Name Code Abkhazian 1112 Fiji 1620 Lingala 2224 Singhalese 2919 Afar 1111 Finnish 1619 Lithuanian 2230 Slovak 2921 Afrikaans 1116 French 1628 Macedonian 2321 Slovenian 2922 Albanian 2927 Frisian 1635 Malagasy 2317 Somali 2925 Amharic 1123 Galician 1722 Malay 2329 Spanish 1529 Arabic 1128 Georgian 2111 Malayalam 2322 Sundanese 2931 Armenian 1835 German 1415 Maltese 2330 Swahili 2933 Assamese 1129 Greek 1522 Maori 2319 Swedish 2932 Aymara 1135 Greenlandic 2122 Marathi 2328 Tagalog 3022 Azerbaijani 1136 Guarani 1724 Moldavian 2325 Tajik 3017 Bashkir 1211 Gujarati 1731 Mongolian 2324 Tamil 3011 Basque 1531 Hausa 1811 Nauru 2411 Tatar 3030 Bengali; Bangla 1224 Hebrew 1933 Nepali 2415 Telugu 3015 Bhutani 1436 Hindi 1819 Norwegian 2425 Thai 3018 Bihari 1218 Hungarian 1831 Oriya 2528 Tibetan 1225 Breton 1228 Icelandic 1929 Panjabi 2611 Tigrinya 3019 Bulgarian 1217 Indonesian 1924 Pashto, Pushto 2629 Tonga 3025 Burmese 2335 Interlingua 1911 Persian 1611 Turkish 3028 Byelorussian 1215 Irish 1711 Polish 2622 Turkmen 3021 Cambodian 2123 Italian 1930 Portuguese 2630 Twi 3033 Catalan 1311 Japanese 2011 Quechua 2731 Ukrainian 3121 Chinese 3618 Javanese 2033 Corsican 1325 Kannada 2124 Romanian 2825 Uzbek 3136 Croatian 1828 Kashmiri 2129 Russian 2831 Vietnamese 3219 Czech 1329 Kazakh 2121 Samoan 2923 Volapük 3225 Danish 1411 Kirghiz 2135 Sanskrit 2911 Welsh 1335 Dutch 2422 Korean 2125 Scots Gaelic 1714 Wolof 3325 English 1524 Kurdish 2131 Serbian 2928 Xhosa 3418 Esperanto 1525 Laothian 2225 Serbo-Croatian 2918 Yiddish 2019 Estonian 1530 Latin 2211 Shona 2924 Yoruba 3525 Faroese 1625 Latvian, Lettish 2232 Sindhi 2914 Zulu 3631
52
Rhaeto-Romance
2823 Urdu 3128
PC connection
As PCs are sometimes supplied with a ‘conventional’ CRT monitor, you may need to adjust the display settings of your PC’s graphics card, otherwise the pictures may not appear correctly. Switch on your PC (still with your original monitor) - select ‘1360 x 768’ for the screen resolution, and select 60 Hz for the on-screen refresh rate. Switch off your PC, then connect it to your LCD TV while both items are still switched off.
Monitor Display modes
MODE Resolution V. Frequency H. Frequency Pixel Clock Frequency
VGA 640 x 480 60.000Hz 31.500kHz 25.200MHz
SVGA 800 x 600 60.317Hz 37.879kHz 40.000MHz
XGA 1024 x 768 60.004Hz 48.363kHz 65.000MHz WXGA 1280 x 720 59.870Hz 47.776kHz 79.500MHz WXGA 1280 x 768 59.939Hz 44.955kHz 74.175MHz WXGA 1360 x 768 60.015Hz 47.712kHz 85.5000MHz
(according to Graphic card)
Select PC input
Switch on the LCD-TV. Select the PC input mode (see page 11).
Note:
If there is no video signal from the computer when the unit is in PC mode, “NO SIGNAL” will appear on the TV screen.
Digital PC connection via HDMI input is not supported. If you try to connect your PC digitally anyway, the TV-operation might freeze. TV will stop to respond properly on usercommands. Countermeasure: Switch-off your TV and disconnect from the 220~240V power-supply. Disconnect the digital PC connection. Now you may retry operating your TV.
If a digital PC connection does show a picture, proper working is not guaranteed. Digital PC connection is not granted for this TV.
Description about the each setting option:
PICTURE Menu BRIGHTNESS and CONTRAST: You can adjust
these according to your personal preferences. HOR POSITION and VER POSITION: to adjust the horizontal and vertical placing of the image. PHASE and CLOCK: eliminates the horizontal (PHASE) and vertical (CLOCK) interfering lines.
RED/GREEN/BLUE: influences the colour balance. BACKLIGHT: Press ϵ or ϶ to adjust the level you
require. WXGA INPUT: When you input an WXGA signal, set this option to “ON”. RESET: Press ENTER to reset BRIGHTNESS, CONTRAST, RED, GREEN, BLUE and BACKLIGHT to the factory preset values.
Use a PC-VGA cable (not supplied) to connect the LCD-Monitor to your PC. Make the connections carefully so as not to break or bend the contacts inside the plug.
TV (Back side view)
to PC AUDIO input
Audio cable
(not supplied)
VGA cable
Example: Adjust the contrast.
During PC mode press MENU.
1
The Menu will appear on the screen.
Select CONTRAST, then press ENTER. Press ϵ or ϶ to
2
adjust CONTRAST.
Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
3
(not supplied)
AUDIO Menu BASS/TREBLE/BALANCE: Tone setting menu. RESET: Press ENTER to reset BASS, TREBLE and
BALANCE to the factory preset values.
PC
BRIGHTNESS 25
CONTRAST 40
HOR POSITION 0
VER POSITION
PHASE 25
CLOCK
0
0
53
Connecting an HDMI or a DVI device to the HDMI input
The HDMI input receives digital audio and uncompressed video from a HDMI equipped device or uncompressed digital video from a DVI equipped device. When you connect to a DVI device with a HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable, it only transfers the video signal, so it is necessary to use separate analogue leads to transfer the audio signals. Select the HDMI input mode (see page11).
TV
(Back side view)
To PC AUDIO
Note:
This set is classed as “HD-Ready”. This means that it is capable of displaying HD (High Definition) signals when connected to a suitable HD source, such as an HD receiver or DVD player that has HD capability, via HDMI, DVI, or Component Video connections. Some devices may not operate
• properly with the TV.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High­Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
54
input
Selecting the HDMI audio input source
You must choose the appropriate HDMI audio input setting for each connection, depending on whether the source is equipped with a DVI or HDMI socket.
Select HDMI AUDIO then press
1
ENTER. Press ϵ or ϶ to select HDMI or DVI.
Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
2
Note:
Follow the user’s manual that came with the HDMI-system, which you try to connect to this TV. If there is no picture available via HDMI-connection, do connect via SCART-cable first. Use the HDMI-system’s remote-control to call the HDMI-system’s setup-menu onto the screen. Follow the HDMI-system’s manual, to set its video-output to
• HDMI. When successfully set to HDMI, select this TV’s HDMI-input,
• as described in here on page 11 (Select Video Input).
HDMI cable (type A connector)
(not supplied)
HDMI - to - DVI adapter cable
(HDMI type A connector) (not supplied)
To HDMI output
Audio cable
(not supplied)
To DVI output
HDMI device
DVI device
NICAM AUTO
BASS 25
TREBLE 25
BALANCE 0
HDMI AUDIO HDMI
RESET
HDMI
Connection to other equipment
1. Connecting other units to your TV Caution. Before connecting:
• Make sure to disconnect the appliance from the power
supply in order to avoid any potential damage from occurring.
• Make sure to establish the required connection.
• Make sure that connections are properly and correctly
attached before connecting the appliances to the power supply.
Connect with Satellite receiver as shown below. Select the TV-Program at the satellite receiver. To do this, use the remote control of the satellite receiver. You cannot store the same station once again additionally in LCD-Monitor which already stored in satellite receiver.
Antenna
or
Satellite antenna
Note:
S-Video signals can be played back through the AV2 input (see page 57).
2. Connecting a DVD player
TV (Back side view)
Satellite receiver
VCR
DEC
TV
(All illustrated SCART cables and antenna cables are not supplied)
Decoder
(SCART cable, not supplied)
Video recorder
DVD Player
TV (Back side view)
TV (Back side view)
AV1
To ensure optimum picture quality, select RGB for the DVD player’s output signal (see Owner’s manual of the DVD player). AV1 SCART is compatible with RGB signal. Select AV1 input mode to view (see page 11).
AV2
R
ANT
DVD player
55
Page 18
Connection to other equipment
3. Connecting an audio system
You can supply the TV sound to the stereo equipment with the scart socket. Use a special scart cable for
the connection which sold at the accessory shop. (please consult your hi-fi instructions for details).
Note:
The Bass/Treble/Balance adjustments (see P.18) only function with the sound from the TV speakers - it does not affect the audio output sockets.
TV (Back side view)
(Scart-RCA cable,
not supplied)
Stereo amplifier
Audio input
Connection to other equipment
5. Connecting Video camera and Video recorder
Select the “MONITOR” option in the SETUP menu (see No.7 on page 58). Select the AV2 input mode (see page 11). You can see the playback picture from video camera. This signal is output via AV1 and can be recorded by video recorder. With this arrangement, Video recorder will record exactly what is shown on the screen.
Note:
• If you have a camcorder with S-video, use an S-video cable instead of a standard video cable. Do not connect both a standard video cable and an S-video cable at the same time, or the picture performance will be unacceptable.
• When you input the PAL-M signal to AV2 input, select AV COLOUR setting to AUTO, otherwise the monochrome images will be displayed.
TV (Back side view)
R
TV (Back side view)
(SCART cable, not supplied)
(S-VIDEO cable, not supplied)
(AV cable, not supplied)
Video camera to AV2
AV output
Video recorder to AV1
Recording
Playback
4. Connection of a digital amplifier or digital A/V receivers (with DTS or Dolby Digital Decoder)
DTS and Dolby Digital are two different systems. DTS-DVDs cannot be played with a Dolby Digital
receiver. Please use in this case a decoder that matches your DVDs.
Note:
In earlier years Dolby Digital was known as AC-3. Nowadays only the name has changed. To enjoy
• Dolby Digital you may still use your “old” AC-3 decoder. Also the commercially available AC-3 DVDs can still be played with any Dolby Digital DVD player.
TV (Back side view)
Audio digital cable
(not supplied)
A/V receiver with (AC-3) Dolby Digital decoder
After connecting a Dolby Digital decoder please select in the DVD menu the Dolby Digital (DD) sound track option.
Several DVDs may be pre-recorded on both sides however only one side contains the Dolby Digital sound track. Please insert the correct DVD side.
When a DTS sound track is played the integrated loudspeakers are mute. The DTS sound can only be played digitally using the digital outlet. DTS decoder is necessary for hearing.
Digital audio output is active only when receiving DVB-T, not when receiving analogue cable TV broadcasting.
56
Connection to other equipment
7. Setting of Scart socket
1
In , select AV1 OUTPUT, then press ENTER.
This determines whether the AV1 outputs the signal from the internal
2
tuner or whatever input is shown on the screen.
Press ϵ or ϶ to select TV or MONITOR.
TV: Outputs the last channel position selected. MONITOR: The picture displayed on TV-screen
Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
3
AV colour adjustment
The AV Colour setting only applies when viewing devices connected to the AV inputs.
1
In , select AV COLOUR, then press ENTER.
Press ϵ or ϶ to select AUTO.
2
If AUTO option does not work, press ϵ or ϶ to select
3
desired colour (e.g. NTSC 3.58).
Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
4
Note:
PAL is the colour system used in Germany. NTSC 3.58 is used in the USA, PAL 60 used in Germany handled video recorders, which play NTSC video tape recording.
If the picture shows horizontal stripes:
Set to AUTO as the description above.
AV1 OUTPUT
AV COLOUR
REC SCREEN STATUS
RESET TV SETTING
TV
AV1 OUTPUT
AV COLOUR
REC SCREEN STATUS
RESET TV SETTING
AUTO
6. Connecting to a DVD player or other AV device with Component Video outputs
If your DVD player (or other device) has Component Video output jacks, use a suitable set of leads (RCA/
Phono) to connect these to the Component Video inputs on this TV as shown - it can greatly enhance the picture quality and performance. Please remember that you will also need to connect separate leads (RCA/Phono) for the audio signals. Select the COMPONENT input mode (see page 11).
TV (Back side view)
R
To COMPONENT IN
Note:
The Component Video input of this unit are for use with equipment which outputs interlaced signals (PAL:
• 576i/1080i or NTSC: 480i/1080i) and progressive signals (PAL: 576p/720p or NTSC: 480p/720p).
Audio cable (not supplied)
Video cable (not supplied)
Component output Audio output
YPbPr
DVD player
57
Status message
Information/Status
message
Invalid entry The channel does not exist. (e.g., “000“)
TV
AUTO
OFF
TV
AUTO
OFF
No radio services Cannot change to Radio mode because there is no radio service in
No TV services Cannot change to TV mode because there is no TV service in the
No services There are no services in the received signal. No subtitles There are no subtitles in the received signal. No video No audio The signal does not contain audio or video. Audio stream not available The Multi Audio Menu cannot be displayed because there is no
Descrambling not possible The ser vices for the selected channel are not available for this card. CI card initialized CI card is initializing. CAM module has been removed CAM module has been removed. (CAM is used for inserting the CI
Database empty There are no services in the TV. No signal There are no signal inputs. Locked service The service is locked with the channel organizer. Scrambled service The service is scrambled and unavailable. Digital Service Not available. Not Running Broadcasting has been suspended. HD service This service is for HD. New service added … A new ser vice has been added. Upgrading available service
details Duplicate carrier found The same signal has already been set. Invalid Stream Contains a video format that is not supported by this TV.
the channel list.
channel list.
sound.
card.)
Service information has been changed. The channel list is updating.
Cause
58
59
Page 19
Troubleshooting table
Please check the following list before requesting service.
Symptom Possible solution Page
TV
No picture, no sound Switch on the set.
No reception Have you tuned in the TV stations?
The TV switches off with missing antenna input signal
In
menu, the TUNING
option cannot be selected. Wrong Colours Colour and Brightness errors can occur when the viewing angle /
While viewing a DVB (digital) channel, there is sound but no picture.
Blocky image or image stops intermittently.
Some digital channels cannot be viewed.
“Database empty” message appears on the screen.
DVD
The playback picture has occasional distortion.
The unit does not start playback.
appears on the screen.
The LCD panel is a very high technology product, giving you fine picture details. Occasionally, a few nonactive pixels may appear on the screen as a fixed point of blue, green or red. Please note that this does not affect the performance of your product.
* This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual
property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
* Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.
*
* Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #: 5,451,942 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending.
DTS and DTS Digital Out are registered trademarks and the DTS logos and Symbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
* Unauthorized recording of copyrighted television programs, films, video cassettes and other materials may infringe
the rights of copyright owners and be contrary to copyright laws.
* DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license.
Check that the mains power outlet is properly connected. Select appropriate input mode. Unplug unit for 1 minute, then plug it back in.
Connect the antenna. Make sure the set is ON and not in Standby mode
This is normal. 15 minutes after the antenna signal has disappeared, the set will change to standby mode.
The unit is set to AV mode. Press 1 on the remote control. 11
ambient air temperature (see technical specifications) are exceeded. Some channel offers audio content only. It is normal.
Check all antenna connections. Move the antenna away from areas of possible interference. Try using an antenna booster.
Contact the service provider to subscribe.
Check all antenna connections and try auto tuning again. 9, 20
The disc is dirty. Eject the disc and clean it. Some times a small amount of picture distortion may appear. This is not a malfunction.
No disc is inserted. Insert a disc. An unplayable disc is inserted. Insert a playable disc (Check the disc type and colour system). Place the disc in the disc slot with the label side facing forward. The disc is dirty. Clean the disc. Cancel the parental lock function or change the parental lock level.
The function is prohibited with the unit or the disc. 34
10, 11
31, 32
50, 51
Specifications
Model 19DV555DB/19DV556DB 22DV555DB/22DV556DB TV
6 9
11
9 9
14
9
32 31
32 31
System: Analogue: PAL UK, IR, CCIR, FRENCH System, B/G, D/K, I/I, L
Digital: DVB-T (OFDM 2k/8k 16QAM/64QAM)
Video Colour System: PAL/SECAM/NTSC 3.58/NTSC 4.43/PAL 60
Preset channels: Analogue channels (99) + Digital channels (Carrier 200/Service1000)
Frequency Range: Analogue: IreE2~E4, X~Z+2, S1~S10, E5~E12, S11~S41, E21~E69
LCD: 18.95” TYPE (48.14 cm visible)
HDMI input: HDMI compliant (type A connector)
Digital: E5~E12, ItaD~H2, Fra1~F6, Rus6~12, E21~E69
TFT low-glass Active Matrix Colour LCD, 1440 x 900 Pixel
HDCP compliant Suggested scan rates: PAL: 576i/576p/720p/1080i NTSC: 480i/480p/720p/1080i PC Audio: 2-channel PCM, 32/44.1/48 kHz sampling frequency 16/20/24 bits per sample
22” TYPE (55.8 cm visible) TFT low-glass Active Matrix Colour LCD, 1680 x 1050 Pixel
Audio Output Power: approx. 1.5W (MAX) x 2
DVD
Signal system: NTSC, PAL (Region 2)
Applicable disc: DVD (12cm, 8cm), CD (12cm, 8cm)
Output: Audio : (RCA) –12.0 dBm, 1 k ǣ
Pickup: CD : Wavelength: 775 - 805 nm
Digital Audio : 0.5Vp-p/75 ǣ
Maximum output power: 0.5 mW DVD : Wavelength: 640 - 660 nm Maximum output power: 1.0 mW
GENERAL
Power Source: AC 220-240V, 50Hz
Power Consumption: Operation: approx. 60W at 230V,
50Hz Standby: approx. 1W at 230V, 50Hz
Operation: approx. 65W at 230V, 50Hz Standby: approx. 1W at 230V, 50Hz
Weight: 5.2 kg 6.2 kg
Dimensions: 47.2(W)x40.1(H)x20.7(D)cm 53.7(W)x44(H)x20.7(D)cm
Surrounding temperature:
Operation: 5°C ~ 40°C/Storage: –20°C ~ 60°C
ACCESSORIES
2 batteries (AAA/R03/UM-4)/Remote control unit/Aerial cable/AC cord
Weight and Dimensions are approximate. Because we continually strive to improve our products we may change specifications and designs without prior notice.
60
61
Page 20
EU Conformity Statement
“This product is marked with “CE” and complies therefore with the applicable harmonized European standards listed under the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC and the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC.”
Responsible for CE-marking is TOSHIBA INFORMATION SYSTEMS (U.K.) LTD, Toshiba Court, Weybridge Business Park, Addlestone Road, Weybridge, Surrey, KT15 2UL, United Kingdom
19/22-inch* Diagonal LCD TV/DVD COMBINATION
Following information is only for EU-member states:
The use of the symbol indicates that this product may not be treated as household waste. By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product. For more detailed information about recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product.
Following information is only valid for EU-member States: Disposal of batteries and/or accumulators
The crossed out wheeled dust bin symbol indicates that batteries and/or accumulators must be collected and disposed of separately from household waste.
If the battery or accumulator contains more than the specifi ed values of lead (Pb), mercury (Hg), and/or cadmium (Cd) defi ned in the Battery Directive (2006/66/EC), then the chemical symbols for lead (Pb), mercury (Hg) and/or cadmium (Cd) will appear below the crossed out wheeled dust bin symbol.
By participating in separate collection of batteries, you will help to assure the proper disposal of products and batteries and thus help to prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health.
For more detailed information about the collection and recycling programmes available in your country, please contact your local city office or the shop where you purchased the product.
J51Z0231A SH 08/10
P
19DV555DG 19DV556DG 22DV555DG
OWNER’S MANUAL
Illustration of 19DV555DG
©2008 Toshiba Corporation Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly. *Screen size is approximate.
Owner’s Record
The model number and serial number are on the back of your TV/DVD. Record these numbers in the spaces below. Refer to these numbers whenever you communicate with your Toshiba dealer about this TV/DVD.
Model number: Serial number:
Precautions
CAUTION:
THIS UNIT IS A CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT. HOWEVER THIS UNIT USES A VISIBLE LASER BEAM WHICH COULD CAUSE HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE IF DIRECTED. BE SURE TO OPER­ATE THE PLAYER CORRECTLY AS INSTRUCTED.
THE FOLLOWING CAUTION LABEL IS LOCATED ON THE REAR PANEL OF THE UNIT.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
WHEN THIS UNIT IS PLUGGED INTO THE WALL OUTLET, DO NOT PLACE YOUR EYES CLOSE TO THE OPENINGS TO LOOK INTO THE INSIDE OF THIS UNIT.
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
Headphone Warning
Loud music can damage your hearing irreversibly, therefore do not set the volume to a high level when listening through headphones, particularly for extended listening periods.
Information for the DVB-T function
Any function relative to the digital television (with the DVB logo) is available only within the country or area where such signals are transmitted. Verify with the salesman if it is possible to receive a DVB-T signal in the zone where you live.
Even if the television conforms to the DVB-T specifications, the compatibility to future digital DVB-T transmissions is not guaranteed. Some digital television functions may not be available in some countries.
• The DVB-T system present in this device is FTA (Free to air).
* The “HD ready” Logo is a trademark of EICTA. * DVB is a registered trademark of the DVB Project. This logo indicates that the product is compliant with
European Digital Broadcasting.
Possible Adverse Effects on LCD Screen: If a fixed (non-moving) pattern remains on the LCD screen for long periods of time, the image can become permanently engrained in the LCD TV panel and cause subtle but permanent ghost images. This type of damage is NOT COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY. Never leave your TV on for long periods of time while it is displaying the following formats or images:
• Fixed Images, such as stock tickers, video game patterns, TV station logos, and websites.
• Special Formats that do not use the entire screen. For example, viewing letterbox style (16:9) media on a normal (4:3) display (Black bars at top and bottom of screen); or viewing normal style (4:3) media on a widescreen (16:9) display (Black bars on left and right sides of screen).
Precautions ........................................................... 2
Contents ............................................................... 3
Important safety information.................................. 4
Location of controls ............................................... 6
Remote Control ..................................................... 7
Aerial connection ..................................................9
Auto setup........................................................... 10
Quick guide for ANALOG MENU operation ........ 11
Selecting the video input source .........................11
On-screen Language Selection .......................... 11
Automatic station presetting with the built-in Tuner
Changing the order of stored channels ...............12
Manual TV station presetting .............................. 13
Basic Operation ..................................................14
Teletext ............................................................... 15
Stereo reception with the built-in analogue tuner .. 16
Picture format...................................................... 17
Other convenience functions .............................. 18
Guide to using the Digital Menu system .............. 19
Language Setup ................................................. 20
Auto Scan ...........................................................20
Manual Scan ....................................................... 21
Carrier Setup ...................................................... 21
Channel Organizer .............................................. 22
Display Setup ...................................................... 24
Time Setup ......................................................... 24
Password Setup (Parental lock) .......................... 25
Version ................................................................ 26
Software Upgrade ............................................... 26
Common Interface .............................................. 26
Channel list .........................................................27
Channel banner .................................................. 27
Multi audio .......................................................... 28
DVB-Subtitle ....................................................... 28
EPG (Electronic Program Guide) ........................29
EPG Timer .......................................................... 30
Disc..................................................................... 31
Playing a disc ...................................................... 32
Zooming .............................................................. 35
Locating desired scene ....................................... 35
Marking desired scenes ...................................... 36
Repeat playback ................................................. 37
A-B Repeat playback ..........................................37
Changing angles ................................................. 38
Title selection ...................................................... 38
DVD menu .......................................................... 38
Changing soundtrack language ..........................39
Subtitles .............................................................. 39
Disc status ..........................................................39
MP3/JPEG/DivX
Program playback ............................................... 46
Random playback ............................................... 46
Customizing The Function Settings ..................... 47
®
and Audio CD operation ......... 40
.. 12
Contents
Temporary cancel the rating level by DVD disc ... 51
Language Code List ............................................ 52
PC connection .................................................... 53
Connecting an HDMI or a DVI device to the HDMI input
Connection to other equipment ........................... 55
AV colour adjustment .......................................... 58
Status message ..................................................59
Troubleshooting table .......................................... 60
Specifications ..................................................... 61
.. 54
2
3
Page 21
Important safety information
This unit has been produced according to all current safety regulations. The following safety tips should safeguard users against careless use and the dangers connected with such use.
Although this appliance has been carefully manufactured and rigorously checked prior to leaving the
• factory, as with all electrical appliances it is possible for problems to develop. If you notice smoke, an excessive build-up of heat or any other unexpected phenomena, you should disconnect the plug from the mains power socket immediately. Ensure that the unit is sufficiently ventilated! Never place next to or underneath curtains!
• This set should be only be connected to an AC 220~240V / 50Hz mains power supply - do not attempt to
• connect it to any other type of supply. The apparatus must be connected to a main socket outlet with a protective earthing connection.
• The socket-outlet must be installed near the equipment and easily accessible.
• Any repairs must be carried out by qualified service personnel only.
• Do not open this unit. A non-expert attempting to repair the unit could be dangerous and potentially cause
• a fire hazard. Keep away from rodents. Rodents (and also cockatiels) enjoy biting into electric flexes.
• The animal can cause a short cut (fire hazard!) and receive a fatal electric shock.
• Always hold plug when pulling out plug from power mains supply system. Do not pull on flex. The flex can
• become overloaded and cause a short cut. Never wet clean. Only use a damp cloth, the same as when cleaning furniture.
• Set up unit so that no one is able to trip over the flex.
• Only use the unit on a stable, shock-free base in order to avoid any danger from falling.
• Take note that toddlers can pull the unit down from the table or cupboard by means of its flex. Children
• can hurt themselves when doing this. Do not use the unit near heat sources. The casing and flex could be damaged by the impact of heat.
• The screen is made of glass and can break if damage is done to it. Be careful when collecting sharp-
• edged glass splitters. You could be hurt or the unit could be damaged.
• If the unit is mounted on the wall, contact the shop where you purchased the unit for advice, and leave the
• installation work to experts. Incomplete installation work can cause you injuries. When installing the set on a wall, allow at least 10 cm clearance between the rear of the set and the wall.
• Clearance of less than 10 cm will obstruct the vents and cause the interior of the set to overheat, resulting in faults or damage to the set. Taking fall-prevention measures
- If these measures are not taken, the unit can fall and you could be injured.
- Contact the shop where you purchased the unit to obtain full details of the measures. When a TV stand is used,
- Ensure the unit is fully on the stand and placed in the centre.
- Do not leave the stand doors open.
- You could be hurt as a result of the unit falling or breaking, or your fingers being caught or jammed. Take
extra precautions if you have children.
Avoid placing the unit on any surfaces that may be subject to vibrations or shocks.
• To protect the unit during a thunder storm unplug the AC power cord and disconnect the aerial. Caution:
• Do not touch the aerial connector. When you leave your home for a long period of time, unplug the AC power cord for safety reasons.
• The unit becomes warm when in operation. Do not place any covers or blankets on the unit in order to
• prevent overheating. The ventilation holes are not to be blocked. Do not set up near radiators. Do not place in direct sunshine. When placing on a shelf leave 10 cm free space around the whole unit. Make some space around TV (Correct shelf assembly).
• The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such
• as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus. Liquids spilled into the unit can cause serious damage. Switch the set OFF and disconnect the mains power supply, then consult a qualified service person before attempting to use the unit again. Moisture condensation occurs, for example, when you pour a cold drink into a glass on a warm day. Drops
• of water form on the outside of the glass. In the same way, moisture may condense on the optical pick-up lens inside this unit, one of the most crucial internal parts of the unit. Moisture condensation occurs during the following cases.
- When you bring the unit directly from a cold place to a warm place.
- When you use the unit in a room where you just turned on the heater, or a place where the cold wind
from the air conditioner directly hits the unit.
- In summer, when you use the unit in a hot and humid place just after you move the unit from an air
conditioned room.
- When you use the unit in a humid place. Do not use the unit when moisture condensation may occur.
• If you use the unit in such a situation, it may damage discs and internal parts. Remove the disc, connect
• the mains lead of the unit to the mains power outlet, turn on the unit, and leave it for two or three hours.
4
After two or three hours, the unit will have warmed up and evaporated any moisture. Keep the unit connected to the mains power outlet and moisture condensation will seldom occur.
Important safety information
Where to install
Locate the television away from direct sunlight and strong lights, soft, indirect lighting is recommended for comfortable viewing. Use curtains or blinds to prevent direct sunlight falling on the screen.
Place on a sturdy platform, the mounting surface should be flat and steady. It should then be secured to the wall with a sturdy tie using the clip on the back of the stand, or secured to the platform using the fixing strap located underneath the table top stand, this will prevent it from falling over.
The LCD display panels are manufactured using an extremely high level of precision technology, however sometimes some parts of the screen may be missing picture elements or have luminous spots. This is not a sign of a malfunction.
Make sure the television is located in a position where it cannot be pushed or hit by objects, as pressure will break or damage the screen, and that small items cannot be inserted into slots or openings in the case.
Retractable pedestal stand and locating the LCD TV
Observe the following safety precautions:
1) Ensure that unpacking and transfer of the unit is carried out by two or more people.
2) Put the LCD TV on a large level area in a recumbent posture.
3) Grab the pedestal stand and lift the display up. Confirm the pivot is locked.
4) Place the TV on a sturdy, level surface that can support the weight of the TV.
5) Be sure to secure the TV to a wall stud, pillar, surface, or other immovable structure. To secure the TV in this manner: (1) attach a clip to an immovable structure, then (2) pass a sturdy strap through the clip and attach each end to the hooks located at the back of the TV. Be sure to leave at least 10 cm between the TV and the wall or similar structure
.
for ventilation
To fold the pedestal stand
1) Slide the lever on the back side of the pedestal stand to the left.
2) Lay the display down.
NOTE: Do not operate the LCD TV when the pedestal stand is folded. The pedestal stand should not be folded at any time except for packing purposes.
Please take note
EXCLUSION CLAUSE
Toshiba shall under no circumstances be liable for loss and/or damage to the product caused by: i) fire; ii) earthquake; iii) accidental damage; iv) intentional misuse of the product; v) use of the product in improper conditions; vi) loss and/or damage caused to the product whilst in the possession of a third party; vii) any damage or loss caused as a result of the owner’s failure and/or neglect to follow the instructions
set out in the owner’s manual;
viii) any loss or damage caused directly as a result of misuse or malfunction of the product when used
simultaneously with associated equipment;
Furthermore, under no circumstances shall Toshiba be liable for any consequential loss and/or damage including but not limited to the following, loss of profit, interruption of business, the loss of recorded data whether caused during normal operation or misuse of the product.
If stationary images generated by text services, channel identification logos, computer displays, video games, on screen menus, etc. are left on the television screen for any length of time they could become conspicuous, it is always advisable to reduce both the brightness and contrast settings.
Sturdy tie (as short as possible)
Hooks
Screw hole
Band
Slide the lever to the left
Back side of the pedestal stand
Clip
Screw
Top ViewSide View
5
Location of controls
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Adjusting the angle of the base
You can adjust the angle of the TV-screen for 3° forward or for 10° backward from vertical angle. Hold the base of the TV while adjusting the angle.
Description of Indicators and Controls
1. Remote sensor
2.
(Power) indicator: The LED indicator lights up red in standby mode, orange in standby mode
when the timer is activated, and green in the power ON mode.
3. Loudspeakers
4.
(EJECT): Eject a disc.
(Volume) +/– buttons / In Menu: Setting.
5.
(Channel) /PLAY (϶) button: Press to change to a higher numbered channel set into
6.
memory. DVD mode : Playback. In Menu: Setting. In Standby: Turning on the unit.
(Channel) /STOP (Ϯ) button: Press to change to a lower numbered channel set into
7.
memory. DVD mode : Stop. In Menu: Setting. In Standby: Turning on the unit.
8. MENU button: To display the analogue menu screen.
9.
(INPUT SELECT) button: Select input mode for ATV/DTV/AV1/AV2/COMPONENT/HDMI/PC/
DVD. In Menu : Using as ENTER button.
(Power)-button: Preparation: Connect power-cable to 230V/50Hz.
10.
a) If standby-LED is red, you may power-off. To power-off, press power-button 1x and release. For confirmation, standby-LED will turn off. b) If standby-LED is off, you may power-on. To power-on, press power-button 1x and release. For confirmation, standby-LED will change to red and about 1 second later to green. c) If the TV is currently working, press power-button 1x and release to power-off. For confirmation, standby-LED will turn off. In power-off-condition, the unit cannot be power-on by pressing
In power-off-condition, the TV’s power-consumption is approx. 1 Watt.
If total disconnection from the mains is required, please unplug.
6
Disc slot
Illustration of 19DV555DG
2
1
on the remote control.
Remote Control
Function Eject a disc
Select to operate TV/DVD
Switches between the analogue TV and the digital TV
Enter standby mode or turn on the power
Select channel Select Teletext page Enter password Activate the channel organizer function
Display program position number Teletext time display
Turn the sound on/off
Toggle between the TV and radio mode
Select an input source
Change the TV channel or Teletext page up or down In Standby: Turn on the power
Volume
Select menu of a DVD disc
3
Select title of a DVD disc
Activate the digital menu
Display the EPG (Electronic Progr. Guide)
Cursor buttons
Memorize Teletext page 100 CH LIST
Call Setup menu Activate the analogue menu
Exit the menu screen Cancel marking
Remove DVD set up menu
Play
Stop
Hold the text page Skip chapter to reverse direction
Reveal quiz page answers Review playpack
Sub page selection Forward playback
Teletext enlargement Skip chapter to forward direction
Fastext/TOPtext buttons DVD control buttons
Marking desired scene Change playback angle of a DVD disc Repeat playback between A and B (DVD/CD) Teletext ON/OFF
Display the subtitle Select between the available broadcast audio
Display the multi audio menu Change sound track language of DVD
Switches between the present channel and the last selected channel Zoom (for DVD playback)
Locating desired scene Select picture format Sleep Timer
Page 33
11, 32
11, 20
10
14 15 25, 50 22
14, 27, 29, 39
14
27
11
14, 15 11
14
38
38
20
29, 30
10
10 15 14
47 11
11 36
47, 51
32
32
15 34
15 34
15 34
15 34
15 34, 37
36 38 37 15
28, 39 16
28 39
14 35
35 17 14
7
Page 22
Remote Control
Install the batteries
Use batteries type UM4/R03 (AAA-Size). Do not use old or weak batteries. The remote control may not work properly with a weak voltage from such batteries. Replace exhausted batteries with new ones. Never try to recharge normal batteries - this could cause an explosion.
Note:
Exhausted batteries can leak corrosive electrolyte, which may cause damage to the remote control ­therefore remove exhausted batteries immediately.
Open the battery
1
compartment.
Install the batteries as shown
2
below, ensuring the correct polarity.
Close the battery
3
compartment.
Aerial connection
Note: Before you connect other appliances:
To avoid potentially damaging your set, make sure all items are switched off and disconnected from the
mains power when you make the connections. Arrange the desired connection.
When you have finished making the connections, reconnect the mains power to the unit and switch it
back on.
Connect your aerial as shown below. Connections to other equipment is explained further on pages 55~57. If you have problems with reception, consult a specialist of aerial.
Back Side (Illustration of 19DV555DG)
(L)
Distance of Remote Control Operation
Remote sensor
Maximum distance approx. 5m
Transmitter window
30 30
Point the remote control directly at the remote sensor.
The remote control handset will not work properly in the following cases:
If bright sunlight directly beams onto the unit front. If an obstacle is placed between the unit and the
If the batteries have not been installed according to their polarities.
handset.
Z
Z
If the batteries are weak.
Z
Z
Z
Z
8
Auto setup
Your unit has an Automatic installation which makes installation in your unit easy. When you turn on the unit for the first time, the Automatic installation routine is activated. Using this routine, you can select the on-screen language and automatically search for and store all the receivable analogue and digital (DVB) channels. The Automatic station presetting feature is for the set’s built-in tuner only. If you have a device such as a digital decoder (eg. Satellite or Digital Terrestrial) connected (see page 55), you would need to tune it in separately according to its own instructions.
Note:
To cancel the Auto Tuning, press EXIT during the process.
If on the “AUTO INSTALLATION COUNTRY” screen “UK” is selected, “Move To” cannot be used in UK (see page 23).
THE AUTOMATIC TUNING PROCESS WILL ONLY START BY ITSELF THE FIRST TIME YOU SWITCH THE SET ON. HOWEVER YOU CAN RESTART THIS PROCESS VIA THE MENU SYSTEM (see page 12 for analogue channels, and page 20 for digital channels).
10
Preparation:
Press
(Power) on the unit or press (On/Standby) on
the remote control.
AUTO INSTALLATION menu will
1
appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select LANGUAGE, then press ENTER. Press ϵ or ϶ to select desired language. Then press ENTER.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select COUNTRY,
2
then press ENTER. Press ϵ or ϶ to select your country. Then press ENTER.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select AUTO
3
TUNING, then press ENTER. The confirmation screen will be displayed. Press ENTER to start automatic tuning. Your TV will now automatically tune in all available channels. Your TV will tune the analogue channels first, then tune the digital channels.
Note:
Please be patient - the Auto
• Tuning process can take several minutes to complete.
When the programme on the screen stops changing and the sound comes on, the search process is complete.
EXIT : END MENU: RETURN
EXIT : END MENU: RETURN
EXIT : END MENU: RETURN
(ANALOGUE)
Auto Scan
TV
001 BBC ONE 002 BBC TWO 007 BBC THREE
Carrier :1
Frequency (kHz) :562000
Searching... Progress
AUTO INSTALLATION
LANGUAGE ENGLISH
COUNTRY GERMANY AUTO TUNING
ENGLISH
AUTO INSTALLATION
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
COUNTRY
GERMANY AUTO TUNING
GERMANY
AUTO INSTALLATION
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
COUNTRY GERMANY
AUTO TUNING
AUTO TUNING
10 %
DVB-T 16QAM
Radio
:003
070 BBC Radio 1
Exit
(DIGITAL)
(K)
R
R
(A) (B) (C) (D)
(A) Power supply: Connect the supplied power cable to an AC 220-240V/50Hz mains power supply only
- do not attempt to connect it to any other type of supply. Never try to repair a damaged AC power cord with isolation-tape - this should be repaired by a specialist or replaced. Do not let your pet loose near the cable. Animals biting into the cable could receive a fatal electric shock, and could cause a hazard to others.
(B) HEADPHONE jack: Plug headphones with a mini plug (3.5 mm) into this jack. (C) COMPONENT input: See page 57. (D) AV2 input: Input for analogue A/V-Signal (Composite or S-Video). See page 57. (E) PC MONITOR input (PC): See page 53. (F) Scart socket (AV1): For the connection of scart cable. See pages 55~57. (G) PC AUDIO input: See pages 53, 54. (H) HDMI input : See page 54. (I) Aerial input socket: Connect the outdoor aerial to the aerial input socket as shown. (J) Digital audio output: Digital output for CD/DVD & DVB-T (see page 56). (K) C.I. slot: The Common Interface allows you to insert CAM (Conditional Access Module) and a suitable
Smart Card to give you access to additional Pay-TV services. (see page 26) Before inserting the module, make sure to turn off the main power and then insert the module all the way into the slot until it is flushed with the side panel buttons.
(L) Bracket holes: Fix a wall mounting bracket (not supplied) here.
(E) (F) (G)(H)(I) (J)
9
Quick guide for ANALOG MENU operation/Selecting the
video input source/On-screen Language Selection
Make sure the aerial connection and power supply are connected as per the description on previous page.
Preparations:
Turn on the unit with the button on the unit. The indicator will light up in green. To change the unit to standby mode, press
on the remote control.
(Power) indicator will change from green to red. To turn on the unit from standby mode, press remote control again. In standby mode, you can also turn the unit on with
on the unit or PAGE / on
the remote control. To turn off the unit press button on the unit - to completely switch it off, disconnect the mains power supply. Press TV/DVD to select the TV mode.
Press ATV/DTV to select the
• analogue TV mode.
:001
Note:
If no buttons are pressed for more
• than approx. 60 seconds, the MENU disappears automatically.
(Power)
(Channel) or
Quick guide for ANALOG MENU operation
Call ANALOG MENU and for example: Select AUTO TUNING.
Press INPUT.
1
(Power)
Select ATV. Press MENU.
2
Press ϵ or ϶ to select .
on the
Press ϳ or ϴ to select AUTO
3
TUNING, then press ENTER to enter the AUTO TUNING menu.
(Power)
... on the following pages the MENU can be called in the same way as here.
4
Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
Selecting the video input source
Press INPUT to view a signal from another device connected to your TV, such as a VCR or DVD player. You can select each input source depending on which input jacks you used to connect your devices. To select the video input source, press ϳ /ϴ. Then press ENTER within 6 seconds.
You can return to ATV mode by pressing a numbered button
• even if you switched to external input mode from DTV mode.
On-screen Language Selection
Select LANGUAGE (unless you
1
have already selected when the set was first switched on). Then press ENTER.
Press ϵ or ϶ to select the desired language.
2
Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
3
AUTO TUNING
MANUAL TUNING
CH ALLOCATION
LANGUAGE ENGLISH VERTICAL POSITION 0
AUTO 4:3 DEFAULT 4:3
AUTO TUNING
MANUAL TUNING
CH ALLOCATION
LANGUAGE ENGLISH VERTICAL POSITION 0
AUTO 4:3 DEFAULT
INPUT SELECT
ATV
DTV
AV1
AV2
COMPONENT
HDMI
AUTO TUNING
MANUAL TUNING
CH ALLOCATION
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH VERTICAL POSITION 0
AUTO 4:3 DEFAULT
ENGLISH
4:3
4:3
11
Page 23
Automatic station presetting with the built-in Tuner/ Changing the order of stored channels
Automatic station presetting with the built-in Tuner
Perform this feature to search for and store new analogue TV programmes after the Automatic installation. (see page 10)
Preparation:
Make sure your antenna is connected to the aerial input (see page 9). Select ATV (see page 11). Then press MENU.
Select AUTO TUNING, then press
1
ENTER.
Select COUNTRY, then press ENTER.
2
Press ϵ or ϶ to select your country, then press ENTER.
Select START. Then press ENTER.
3
The automatic tuning will search for available broadcasts and should store the channels in the correct order. During the search the sound is muted. When all programs have been stored, the normal TV screen will appear.
Changing the order of stored channels
The Automatic station presetting stores the stations in a specific order. However, this order can be changed if you wish.
Select CH ALLOCATION.
1
Then press ENTER.
Select desired option, then press
2
ENTER.
After setting the each option, press MENU to return to CH
3
ALLOCATION menu.
Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
4
Description about the each setting option: SORT: Press ϳ or ϴ to select the channel that you want to move, then press ENTER.
Note:
To restart digital auto tuning, see page 20.
When the COUNTRY is set to UK, the automatic tuning will search for UHF broad-casts only.
When changing the order of the channels, it is best to start with Ch1.
12
Press ϳ or ϴ to select the position that you want to move the channel to, then press ENTER. ERASE PROGRAM: Press ϳ or ϴ to select the channel that you want to erase, then press ENTER. SKIP: Press ϳ or ϴ to select the channel that you want to skip, then press ENTER. CH LABEL: Press ϳ or ϴ to select channel that you want to rename, then press ENTER. Press ϳ or ϴ to select character, then press ϵ or ϶. The cursor will move to the next position. Press ENTER to set the channel label.
mark will appear.
AUTO TUNING
MANUAL TUNING
CH ALLOCATION
LANGUAGE ENGLISH VERTICAL POSITION 0
AUTO 4:3 DEFAULT
COUNTRY
GERMANY
START
GERMANY
AUTO TUNING
MANUAL TUNING
CH ALLOCATION
LANGUAGE ENGLISH VERTICAL POSITION 0
AUTO 4:3 DEFAULT
SORT
ERASE PROGRAM
SKIP
CH LABEL
Manual TV station presetting
If you like, you may manually tune a certain station into a selected program position, without deleting or modifying program position’s contents. Example: Store the BBC 2 into program position 2.
Preparation: connect aerial cable. Select program position
1
2. Press 2 (see page 14). OSD will indicate “2” in right upper corner. Eventually recently stored TV-channel’s name might also appear.
Press MENU. Press ϵ or ϶ to select
2
tool-page (see right). Press ϳ or ϴ
4:3
4:3
Note:
Usually fine tuning is not necessary, due to tuning’s automatically stopping at the very best position. If you fine-tune anyway, proper working of teletext-reception with built-in tuner is no longer guaranteed.
to select MANUAL TUNING. Press ENTER.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select COLOUR
3
SYSTEM, then press ENTER. Press ϵ or ϶ to select AUTO, PAL or SECAM, then press ENTER. Please note that PAL should be selected for use in UK.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select SOUND
4
SYSTEM, then press ENTER. Press ϵ or ϶ to select AUTO, B/G, I, D/K or L/L’, then press ENTER.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select SEARCH.
5
Press ENTER. Press ϵ or ϶, to start tuning. Tuning will stop automatically at next available station. If this does not happen to be the BBC 2, press ϵ or ϶ again to continue tuning for the BBC 2. Then press ENTER.
If you like to use fine-tuning, select
6
FINE and press ENTER. Press ϵ or ϶ to fine tune. See the note on this page.
To store other stations in additional memory-cells, repeat
7
steps 1 to 6.
Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
8
AUTO TUNING
MANUAL TUNING
CH ALLOCATION
LANGUAGE ENGLISH VERTICAL POSITION 0
AUTO 4:3 DEFAULT
SEARCH
FINE 168.30MHz
COLOUR SYSTEM AUTO
SOUND SYSTEM
BBC1 168.30MHz
AUTO
SEARCH
FINE 168.30MHz
COLOUR SYSTEM
AUTO SOUND SYSTEM
BBC1 168.30MHz
AUTO
SEARCH
FINE 168.30MHz
COLOUR SYSTEM AUTO SOUND SYSTEM AUTO
BBC1 168.30MHz
SEARCH
FINE 175.30MHz
COLOUR SYSTEM AUTO SOUND SYSTEM
BBC1 175.30MHz
4:3
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
13
Basic Operation
Note:
If the built-in tuner does not receive anything (e.g. if no antenna is connected) during TV-operation, then the TV-unit will change to standby after approx. 15 minutes.
14
Channel selection
With the numbered buttons. Example:
No. 2: Press 0 and within 2 seconds, press 2.
No. 29: Press 2 and within 2 seconds, press 9.
Press CH
or to change up or down a channel. This takes
approx. 2 seconds. If the auto search only stored 5 stations, only these 5 will appear. Skipped channels will not appear (see page12).
The CH LIST shows a list of all receivable programmes. They are located in channels 1 to 99. Press CH LIST to display the CH LIST. Press ϳ or ϴ to select the desired channel. Press CH LIST to display the selected channel. Press EXIT to exit.
QuickView
button allows you to go back to the last selected
CH RTN
channel.
Volume adjusting
Press VOL + or – to adjust the volume. The volume level indicator disappears after 4 seconds.
MUTE
Press MUTE. The sound will be cut off. MUTE will appear for approx. 4 seconds. The muting can be released by pressing MUTE again or VOL + or –.
Information display
In the analogue TV mode: Press
. Channel number and picture size setting will appear for approx. 4 seconds. In the digital TV mode: Press
. The program information will appear (see ‘Channel banner’ on page 27).
SLEEP TIMER
To set the sleep timer press SLEEP. SLEEP and the minutes will appear. Each time you press SLEEP, the SLEEP time shown will change in the order of 120, 110, 100, 90, 80, 70, 60, 50, 40, 30, 20, 10, 0. When the displayed time runs out, the unit will switch to standby. The display will disappear after approx. 4 seconds.
To cancel the sleep timer: Press SLEEP repeatedly until ‘0’ appears.
STEREO 1 ARD
AUTO
Teletext
Teletext is sent page by page. This unit is able to automatically store up to 256 pages, but they can only be accessed once they have been stored. This can take a few moments.
Fastext/TOPtext
The Fastext/TOPtext is teletext with a special directory. On the lower part of the screen there are four different coloured fields (red, green, yellow and blue). These fields lead directly to the pages shown within. The coloured buttons on the remote control correspond to the coloured fields. Press the appropriate coloured button in order to activate the desired colour field.
Switch on / off Teletext
Teletext is not transmitted by all channels. Select a channel that shows teletext. Press
. You will now see a teletext page. (If “100” is shown without any text information, it may mean that the channel you have selected does not support teletext.) Press
again in order to switch off teletext.
again in order to switch on teletext again.
Press The last page which was stored is now shown.
TELETEXT
Note:
You cannot select any other channels as long as teletext is switched on. Switch teletext off when you want to switch over to another channel.
Select Page
Press CH
or until the page you desire
appears. Or ... enter the requested page number by using the 10 Number Buttons. And if you mistype something, just enter the com­plete 3-digit wrong page number then enter the de­sired number again. Or ... press one of the coloured teletext buttons so that a page from Fastext/TOPtext is shown.
Hold Pages
Some pages are divided up into subpages by the channel. Subpages are automatically shown in turn, as they are transmitted. In order to hold the page, press Press
again in order to display the next subpage.
Directly Select Subpages
You can directly select the subpages if required.
Example:
Page 128 from Teletext comprises of 2 subpages. In the right upper corner you will, for example, see 1/2. That means that page one of 2 subpages is being shown at the moment.
128 128 CEEFAX 21.07.03 15:01:38
Press in order to select subpage 2. 4 dashes (----) are shown. Enter 0 0 0 2. It can take a minute before subpage 0002 appears. Press
again in order to switch off the subpage feature. You can only select other teletext pages when the subpage feature is switched off.
Enlargement
In order to enlarge the display, press Either the upper or lower half of the screen is enlarged. Each time you press display of the upper or lower half of the screen or the full picture.
Answering Quiz Questions
Some pages contain quiz questions with concealed answers. Press
in order to show the answers.
Page 100
Press ENTER in order to show page 100.
you switch between the
1/2
.
.
15
Page 24
Stereo reception with the built-in analogue tuner
The built-in Tuner can detect and receive NICAM stereo broadcasts automatically.
Note:
In case of bad reception, the stereo
• sound also can be disturbed.
16
NICAM stereo sound reception:
Select NICAM, then press ENTER.
1
Press ϵ or ϶ to select AUTO or OFF. Select OFF if you do not want to receive NICAM sound.
Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
2
The following types of broadcast are possible with NICAM transmissions
‘NICAM ST’ illuminates for approx. 4 seconds when a NICAM STEREO broadcast signal is received.
‘NICAM M1’ illuminates for approx. 4 seconds when a NICAM MONO A broadcast signal is received.
‘NICAM M1/M2’ illuminates for approx. 4 seconds when a NICAM MONO A and MONO B broadcast signal is received.
This will be displayed for approx. 4 seconds if a NICAM signal is received when the ‘NICAM OFF’ option is selected.
NICAM AUTO
BASS 25
TREBLE 25
BALANCE 0
HDMI AUDIO HDMI
RESET
NICAM ST
NICAM M1
NICAM M1 / M2
NICAM OFF
Stereo reception in Germany
‘STEREO’ illuminates for approx. 4 seconds when a STEREO broadcast signal is received.
When 2-channel sound reception is available, you can select your preferred audio with the AUDIO SELECT button.
Each time you press AUDIO SELECT, the sound channel will switch to the alternative channel available.
NICAM 2-channel sound reception (not available in Germany)
NICAM M1/M2
STEREO
NICAM M1/M2
2-channel sound reception in Germany
SOUND 1 / 2
SOUND 1 / 2
Picture format
The broadcaster may transmit a Wide Screen Signalling (WSS) signal which can determine the correct picture width and set it automatically when the AUTO setting is used. If you want to change this setting, you can select from the formats listed below.
AUTO
Press PIC SIZE repeatedly until AUTO
AUTO
appears.
Notes:
When the PICTURE SIZE is set to AUTO, the aspect ratio will automatically change according to the Wide Screen Signalling (WSS) signal, if it is available. This may be either transmitted by the broadcasting TV channel, or via a recording from a VCR etc. Any WSS signal received will only be effective in the AUTO mode - however, some DVD players / Digital Decoders etc. will automatically switch the aspect ratio via the SCART input (Pin 8 switching), even if AUTO is not selected. In any case if you want to change to a different aspect ratio to the one selected automatically, you can change it by pressing PIC SIZE.
In PC mode, the PICTURE SIZE feature is available only for 16:9 or 4:3 format. (In ‘WXGA INPUT’ mode, the PICTURE SIZE feature is not available.)
In HDMI or COMPONENT mode of scanning rate: 720p and 1080i, the PICTURE SIZE feature is available only for 16:9 format.
Using the special functions to change the size of the displayed image (i.e. changing the height/width ratio) for the purposes of public display or commercial gain may infringe on copyright laws.
Manual format setting
Pressing PIC SIZE repeatedly scrolls through the following options.
4:3
This mode shows a 4:3 picture in its original size and shape with vertical bands on the left and right side.
FULL SCREEN
Stretches the left and right hand sides of a 4:3 picture horizontally to fill the screen, while leaving the centre of the picture unstretched.
Note:
• In this mode the picture is geometrically distorted on the left and the right sides of the screen.
16:9
This mode is used with 16:9 signals from a Digital decoder, DVD player or other external source. This uniformly stretches a 4:3 image horizontally to fill the screen (For example, a 16:9 image is often stored “anamorphically” on a DVD, where the 16:9 image is stored as a horizontally compressed 4:3 image - this mode restores the image to its correct 16:9 proportions).
CINEMA:
This mode is used to zoom-in on (expand) 4:3 ‘letterbox’ format pictures (with black bars at the top and bottom) so that they fill more of the screen.
Note:
• In the CINEMA mode, part of the picture may be slightly cut off due to the expansion. However, it is possible to scroll the picture up or down to view the top or bottom part of the picture (see page 18).
14:9
This enlarges a 4:3 picture to the 14:9 format.
FULL SCREEN
(16:9)
(CINEMA)
(14:9)
17
Other convenience functions
You can change the default settings to convenience use.
Icon Selected Items Setup hint
PICTURE PREFERENCE
BRIGHTNESS / CONTRAST / COLOUR / TINT(NTSC) / SHARPNESS
COLOUR TEMPERATURE Bluish (COOL) / Neutral (MEDIUM) / Reddish (WARM) BLUE BACK ON / OFF You can set the TV to automatically change to a blue screen and
BACKLIGHT You can use the Back light feature to adjust the screen brightness
RESET Select “RESET” to reset PICTURE PREFERENCE, BRIGHTNESS,
NICAM See page 16. BASS / TREBLE / BALANCE You can adjust the sound quality to your preference. HDMI AUDIO See page 54. RESET Select “RESET” to reset BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE to the
AUTO TUNING See page 12. MANUAL TUNING See page 13. CH ALLOCATION See page 12. LANGUAGE See page 11. VERTICAL POSITION When the CINEMA mode is selected (see page 17), you can adjust
AUTO 4:3 DEFAULT
AV1 OUTPUT See page 58. AV COLOUR See page 58. REC SCREEN
STATUS
RESET TV SETTING Press ENTER to enter the RESET TV SETTING screen.
Note:
* AUTO 4:3 DEFAULT is available only for AUTO picture size setting. * In COMPONENT mode, AUTO 4:3 DEFAULT is available only for 480i/576i mode.
SPORTS Bright and dynamic picture (factory-set) STANDARD Standard picture quality (factory-set) MOVIE Movie-like picture setting (factory-set) MEMORY Your personal preferences
You can adjust the picture to your preference. The “TINT(NTSC)” option can be selected if an NTSC 3.58MHz or NTSC 4.43MHz signal is input through one of the AV sockets, and NTSC or AUTO has been selected for the AV COLOUR option.
mute the sound if the signal is weak or absent.
for improved picture clarity.
CONTRAST, COLOUR, TINT(NTSC), SHARPNESS, COLOUR TEMPERATURE and BACKLIGHT to the factory preset values.
factory preset values.
the vertical picture position. Press ϵ or ϶ to adjust the vertical
4:3 / 16:9 This option selects the default way that a 4:3 signal is shown - either
*
ON / OFF This function is used in conjunction with the Timer function that is
position of the picture by up to +10 and downwards by up to -10.
as normal “4:3” or expanded in the “16:9” mode, according to your preferences.
included as part of the Digital EPG. It determines whether the TV screen switches on or not when a programmed Timer setting begins
- see page 30 for further details.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select “YES”, then prees ENTER. Reset the TV function will now begin, and this unit will automatically turn off. As the power is not automatically turned on, press watch TV.
Guide to using the Digital Menu system
When the set is in the digital mode, you can access the main menu by pressing DIGTAL MENU on the remote control. This main menu contains several options,
- Language Setup
- Channel Organizer
- Installation
- System Configuration
- Technical Information
- Common Interface The main menu is the gateway for all the other ‘sub’ menus. You can navigate between the different options in the main menu by pressing ϵ or ϶. The DIGITAL MENU button will also function like an ‘EXIT’ button, i.e. when any menu is active, pressing the DIGITAL MENU button will return to the previous stage.
Preparation:
Press ATV/DTV to select the digital TV mode.
Press DIGITAL MENU to display the Main menu.
1
Press ϵ or ϶ to select desired options. (Example: selecting the Language Setup option.)
Guide of the available buttons
Press ENTER.
2
The selected menu will appear.
Some of the options have a sub menu. Press ϳ or ϴ to select desired sub menu, then press ENTER.
(Example: sub menu in the
to
Installation option.)
When you have finished making adjustments, press EXIT to
3
return to the normal screen.
Note:
In analogue TV mode, DIGITAL MENU will not work. Please press ATV/DTV to select digital TV mode to display the digital menu. However, it is possible to use the MENU in the digital TV mode. The analogue menu includes some general settings for this TV that apply to both modes, and it will be displayed over the digital TV screen.
Installation System Configuration
Channel Organizer Technical Information
Language Setup
CH1 CH2
ABC
ABC
CH3
Navigate
Language Setup
Menu Language
Pref. Au
dio
Language
Pref. Subtitle La
Pref. Digital Service Langua
CH1 CH2
ABC
ABC
CH3
Common Interface
puteS egaugnaLunem niaM
Texd
i
i
CI
Enter Exit
nguage English
ge
Enter Exit
Navigate
Auto Scan
Manual Scan Carrier Setup
English
English
English
Texd
i
i
noitallatsnIunem niaM
CI
18
19
Page 25
Language Setup/Auto Scan
Language Setup
Preparation:
Switch on appliance. Press TV/DVD to select the TV mode, then press ATV/DTV. The appliance switches over to DVB-T-mode. Menu languages supported are English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Russian, Portuguese, Dutch, Polish, Swedish, Turkish, Finnish, Greek, Danish and Norwegian. (Welsh and Gaelic are available only for Digital Service Language.)
1
2
3
Auto Scan
Preparation:
Please ensure that all the connections have been made
Note:
If “FINLAND” is selected on the “AUTO INSTALLATION (COUNTRY)” screen, two languages are displayed for each item and the first selected language has priority. The language output depends on the languages contained in the broadcast. All the channels will be deleted
• before the scanning process begins. You can cancel the scan process
• at any time by pressing EXIT. The carriers and the services stored before EXIT is pressed will be stored. When the signal from the
• broadcasting station is being updated and you are watching a digital broadcast, the channel will be automatically updated. The list of services screen will appear while updating, and the ‘Scan completed’ message will be shown after the update is complete.
Auto Scan
DVB-T 16QAM
TV
:003
Radio
070 BBC Radio 1
001 BBC ONE 002 BBC TWO 007 BBC THREE
Information
Scan completed
Carrier :1
Frequency (kHz) :562000
Searching...
20
Progress
Navigate
:001
Exit
correctly (see page 9).
1
2 3
Press DIGITAL MENU, the menu will appear on the screen. Press ϵ or ϶ to select ‘Language Setup’, then press ENTER.
Language Setup menu will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select the item you want to change. Press ϵ or ϶ to select desired language.
When all changes are decided, press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select ‘Auto Scan’ then press ENTER.
The confirmation banner will be displayed. Press ϵ or ϶ to select ‘Yes’ or ‘No’, then press ENTER.
The Auto Scan process will now begin. The scanning process will be displayed in the progress bar.
u
nem niaM
CH1 CH2
ABC
ABC
CH3
Language Setup
Language Setup
Menu L
a
n
g
u
a
g
e
Pre
f. A
u
d
io
L
a
n
g
u
Pre
f.
S
u
b
title La
n
g
P
re
f. D
ig
it
a
l
S
e
rv
ice
Navigate
unem niaM
CH1 CH2
ABC
ABC
CH3
Auto Scan
Manual Scan Carrier Setup
Auto Scan
DVB-T 16QAM
TV
001 BBC ONE 002 BBC TWO 007 BBC THREE
Carrier :1
Frequency (kHz) :562000
Searching... Progress
a
g
e
u
a
g
e
L
a
n
g
:003
Navigate
u
a
g
eE
Enter Exit
Radio
070 BBC Radio 1
Texd
i
i
CI
En
g
lish
E
n
g
lish
En
g
l
is
h
n
g
lish
Texd
i
i
CI
:001
Exit
Manual Scan/ Carrier Setup
Manual Scan
With the Manual Scan option, you can tune one carrier at a time, by entering the carrier parameters manually.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select ‘Manual Scan’, then press ENTER.
1
CH1 CH2
ABC
ABC
CH3
Auto Scan
Manual Scan
Manual Scan
Ch
F
ABC
ABC
a
n
n
e
l lis
re
qu
e
n
Carrier Setup
t
c
y
(
k
H
z
)47
Navigate
CH1 CH2 CH3
Auto Scan Manual Scan
Carrier Setup
0..9
You can choose the carrier number from the Channel list by
puteS egaugnaL
noitallatsnI
Note:
If on the ‘AUTO INSTALLATION COUNTRY’ screen ‘FINLAND’ is selected, ‘Frequency (kHz)’ cannot be used.
When the Country is set to FINLAND in the ‘AUTO INSTALLATION COUNTRY’
If there is a Channel List in the data after Auto Scan or Manual Scan, Channel Type Selection Menu will be displayed and available to set Channel List Type. Select the Channel List Type by pressing ϵ/϶ and press ENTER
If “FINLAND” is selected on the “AUTO INSTALLATION COUNTRY” screen, Data is displayed on the “Carrier Setup” screen.
2
using ϵ or ϶ and the corresponding frequency set for the carrier will be set for tuning.
Otherwise you can also directly enter the frequency value to start the tuning.
After setting the carrier, press ENTER to start the scanning.
3
During the scan process, the list of services (TV/Radio) collected for the carrier will be listed.
Then the confirmation banner will be displayed.
4
Press ϵ or ϶ to select ‘Yes’ or ‘No’, then press ENTER.
Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
5
Carrier Setup
The Carrier setup option menu lists all the carriers (multiplexes) that are currently available and allows you to Rename, Delete or Rescan carriers individually.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select ‘Carrier Setup’ then press ENTER.
1
All the carriers are listed with their frequency and service
2
information - the user can scroll through the carrier list and select each one individually to Rename, Delete or Rescan.
Rename:
3
Select carrier, then press Red button. The alphanumeric keypad will appear. You can rename a service as per your preference (see page 23).
Delete:
Select carrier, then press Green button. The check mark (
) will be displayed for selected carrier. Then press
ENTER. The confirmation banner will be displayed. Press ϵ or ϶ to select ‘Yes’ or ‘No’, then press ENTER. If the option ‘Yes’ is selected then all the marked carriers will be deleted from the list.
Rescan:
Rescan allows to tune the already tuned carrier, to collect any new programmes that are currently available in the stream. Press Blue button, to rescan the current selected carrier.
Texd
i
i
Ch
4
Enter Exit
Texd
i
i
noitallatsnIunem niaM
CI
-2
1
0
0
0
noitallatsnIunem niaM
CI
21
Channel Organizer
The Channel Organizer feature provides options to organise the channels. The following options are supported: Lock, Skip, Go To, Delete, Rename, Move, Move To.
Press ϵ or ϶ to select ‘Channel Organizer’, then press
1
ENTER.
CH1 CH2
ABC
ABC
CH3
Channel Organizer
The Channel Organizer menu will appear. The available
2
programmes will be listed, depending on the current mode. The selected programme will be highlighted. To toggle within the service list, press ϳ or ϴ.
By pressing the corresponding Number Button (1-7) or
3
the ENTER you can activate the following functions from this menu for each channel: Lock, Skip, Go To, Delete, Rename, Move and Move To. (You can deactivate each of these functions by pressing the same number again.) See page 23 for setting details.
rezinagrO lennahC
S.No Service Name Lock Skip Del Move
671 MNO 672 PQR 673 STU 674 TCM 679 VWXYZ 800 SAT.1 672 ARTE
1. Lock 4. Delete 7. Move To
2. Skip 5. Rename
3. Go To 6. Move
0..9
D.Menu TV/RadioExit
Navigate
Indications:
S.No Service Name Lock Skip Del Move
030 CBBC
Service number
Service name
Pay channel
Locked service
Skipped service
Delete mark
Move mark
Channel Organizer
Setting details
rezina
grO lennahCunem niaM
Texd
i
i
CI
Lock
Skip
TV
Go To
Delete
Rename
Move
Move To *
Note:
* If on the “AUTO INSTALLATION(COUNTRY)” screen “UK” is selected, “Move To” cannot be used in U.K.
When the service is locked, you must enter your PIN whenever you tune to the service.
Press ϳ/ϴ to select the desired service.
Press 1 on the remote control. If you already set the PIN, enter it here. If not, enter the factory preset PIN “0000”. An icon displays indicating the service is locked.
Pressing 1 will turn the lock icon on and off. (PIN entry is required.)
Press DIGITAL MENU.
Services that are set to skip will not be picked up when pressing CH
Press ϳ/ϴ to select the desired ser vice.
Press 2 on the remote control. An icon displays indicating the service to be skipped.
Pressing 2 will turn the skip icon on and off.
Press DIGITAL MENU.
To view services that are set to be skipped, use 0-9 or select from the Channel List.
Use this function to jump to the specific service in one step. This is useful when there are many services displayed on screen to scroll through.
Press 3 on the remote control. Now you can change the service number on the left side of the screen.
Enter the number using 0-9, and then press ENTER. The highlight moves to the
selected service.
Delete the selected service(s) from the memory.
Press ϳ/ϴ to select the desired service.
Press 4 on the remote control. An icon displays indicating the service to be deleted.
Pressing 4 will turn the delete icon on and off.
Press DIGITAL MENU. A confirmation message displays.
Press ϵ/϶ to select “Yes”, and then press ENTER.
Change individual service names.
Press ϳ/ϴ to select the desired service.
Press 5 on the remote control. A character set screen displays.
Press Yellow button to enter a new name for the service.
Press ϳ/ϴ/ϵ/϶ to move the cursor, then press ENTER to confirm the input of a character.
Press DIGITAL MENU. A confirmation message displays.
Press ϵ/϶ to select “Yes”, and then press ENTER.
Sort the order of the selected service by moving the service position.
Press ϳ/ϴ to select the desired service.
Press 6 on the remote control. An icon displays indicating the service to be moved.
Pressing 6 will turn the move icon on and off.
Move the selected service to the desired position using ϳ/ϴ, and then press ENTER
to register the change.
Sort the order of the selected service by modifying the service number.
Press ϳ/ϴ to select the desired service.
Press 7 on the remote control. Now you can change the service number on the left
side of the screen.
Enter the number using 0-9, and then press ENTER. The service moves to the new
position.
/ .
Note:
While in TV mode, only TV programmes will be displayed and only radio programmes will be displayed while in radio mode.
The displays of Channel / Service name will be abbreviated depend on its size of the letter.
22
23
Page 26
Display Setup/Time Setup
Display Setup
1
2
3
Time Setup
If the time displayed on the Channel banner differs from the actual time, it can be corrected.
1
2
3
24
Press ϳ or ϴ to select ‘Display Setup’, then press ENTER.
Main menu System Configuration
CH1 CH2
ABC
ABC
CH3
Display Setup menu will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select the item you want to change. Then you can change each setting by pressing ϵ or ϶.
Banner
1 Sec, 2 Sec.….
timeout
7 Sec.
Banner
Top Select whether the service
position
Bottom
After all the changes are made, press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
Select how long the service banner information appears on screen.
banner information appears on top or bottom of the screen.
Display Setup
Time Setup P
assword Setup
Subtitle
Texd
i
i
CI
Press ϳ or ϴ to select ‘Time Setup’, then press ENTER.
Main menu System Configuration
CH1 CH2
ABC
ABC
CH3
Time Setup menu will appear. If the time displayed on the Channel banner differs from the actual time, adjust the time offset with the ϵ or ϶ button until the correct time is shown.
Note:
Normally, this would be done by selecting “Auto”.
After all the changes are made, press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
Display Setup
Time Setup
P
assword Setup
Subtitle
Texd
i
i
CI
Note:
There are 15 age-based ratings, ranging from ‘4’ (years old) to ‘18’ (years old) and ‘None’. Eg. If the Parental Lock is set to ‘8’ (years old), only the services which have the parental rating of ‘8’ (years old) or under will be viewable without entering the Password.
You will be prompted to enter the password, when you set new parental rating. You can set the new parental rating only when you enter the password correctly, otherwise the old parental code will be retained.
Password Setup (Parental lock)
Password Setup (Parental lock)
This feature allows you to have a parental control of the service viewing as per your preference. Once a service is protected with a password, it cannot be viewed unless the correct password is provided.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select ‘Password Setup’, then press
1
ENTER.
‘Enter Password’ will appear. Press ‘0 0 0 0’ using the
2
Number Buttons. (This is the default password.)
Press ϳ or ϴ to select ‘Parental Lock’, then press ϵ or ϶ to
3
select desired parental rating (see note). Then press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
You can also change the password using the next option.
4
Press ϳ or ϴ to select ‘Change password’.
Then enter your chosen new password (0 to 9), be sure to remember this password. After you have entered the new password for the first time, you need to enter the same password again for confirmation. The Information banner will then appear.
Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
While toggling between channels, if a service which has a parental rating is selected then you will be asked to enter the correct password to view that channel. If the channel you are currently watching supports a parental rating then the rating will also be displayed in the Channel banner menu (see page 27).
IMPORTANT NOTE ON RESETTING THE PASSWORD
We suggest that you remove the following instruction from the operating instructions to prevent children from reading it.
If you forget your password, follow steps below to reset the password.
1. Press ATV/DTV to select the digital TV mode.
2. Press MENU to display the analogue menu, then
press ϵ or ϶ to select
3. Press The password is reset to ‘0000’.
Main menu System Configuration
CH1 CH2
ABC
ABC
CH3
4 times within 5 seconds.
(SETUP).
Display Setup Time Setup
P
assword Setup
Subtitle
Texd
i
i
CI
25
Version/Software Upgrade/Common Interface
Version
You can check the software and hardware versions.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select ‘Version’, then press ENTER.
1
Note:
During the Software Updating process, do not turn off the unit. At this time you cannot use any of the buttons, apart from
After the Software Updating process, the Digital Menu memory settings will be lost, so it is necessary to go through the setting up procedures again.
26
(Power).
The hardware and software versions are displayed.
Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
2
Software Upgrade
Software Upgrade allows you to download the latest software available on the Engineering channel.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select ‘Software upgrade’, then press
1
ENTER.
If a software upgrade is available from an Over- Air-
2
Download (OAD) then the message ‘S/W available, do you want to download?’ will be displayed - you can then select ‘Yes’ or ‘No’ by pressing ϵ or ϶, then press ENTER.
If you select the option ‘Yes’ then the Software Upgrade
3
process will be initiated. It will take about 20 minutes and after this process is complete, the TV will be rebooted automatically.
If you select the option ‘No’ you can continue to watch TV programmes as before.
Common Interface
You can access the Common Interface module information from this menu option.
Preparations
Insert CAM into the DVB Common Interface slot on the backside of the TV (see page 9).
Press ϵ or ϶ to select ‘Common Interface’, then press
1
ENTER.
The CAM module name will be displayed. You have to press
2
ENTER to view further information.
In the CI Menu, CAM specific information such as Module
3
information, Smart card information, Language and Software Download are shown. Press ϳ or ϴ to select information, then press ENTER to see detail.
Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
4
Main menu Technical Information
CH1 CH2
ABC
ABC
CH3
Main menu Technical Information
CH1 CH2
ABC
ABC
CH3
CH1 CH2
ABC
ABC
CH3
Texd
i
i
Version
Software upgrade
Texd
i
i
Version
Software upgrade
Texd
i
i
Common Interface
Channel list/Channel banner
Channel list
Press CH LIST to display the Channel list menu.
1
S.No Services
671 MNO 672 PQR 673 STU
List of the
674 TCM
CI
Select the Services:
2
List of the services present under the selected Channel group will be displayed in the left side of the menu. Press ϳ or ϴ to toggle within the service list, then press
ENTER.
Toggle between the list of TV and Radio services:
The TV/RADIO is used to toggle between the TV and Radio mode. If you press CH LIST when you are in Radio mode then the channel list menu will display the list of Radio
CI
Note:
ecafretnI nommoCunem niaM
CI
If any Channel group doesn’t have any service at the time, ‘No services’ and ‘No Information’ will be displayed in the menu.
Channel / Service names can only be displayed up to about 16 characters
- if the name is longer than this, it will be abbreviated. The Basic Service Information screen (Step 2) displays the full Channel/Service names, not the abbreviated names. Subtitles are displayed on the
• channel banner. Some broadcasts may not provide this service.
services. If you wish to view the list of TV services without exiting the current menu, TV/RADIO should be pressed once.
Channel banner
When you change from one channel to another, the Channel banner will be displayed for the selected service. In the channel banner menu, information such as current date & time, channel name, etc. will be displayed.
While watching the service, press to display the Channel
1
banner at any time. It will disappear after the Banner timeout value (this can be adjusted to your preferred value, see page 24).
Service name
Service No.
Duration graph
Undefined
Genre
Starting time/Ending time of current programme
Press again to display the
2
Basic Service Information. You can verify the signal strength and quality of the selected service here. If necessary, adjust the direction of the antenna to obtain the maximum signal strength.
When the Country setting has been set to FINLAND,
once more to display the advanced detailed
press information.
To remove the Channel banner immediately, press
3
services
DVB Teletext available
DVB Subtitle available
Lock status
Pay TV
Audio mode
251_ABC_Monosco_0... 17:17:37
Programme name
Parental rating
Basic Service Information DVB-T 64QAM
S
e
rvice N
am
e
67
Sig
n
al Qua
lity
S
ign
al St
rength
67
1_M
N
O
_10S
tep
_08
6
71
_MN
O
_1
0S
tep
_0
C
D
E
F
G
HIJ
K
LMN
O
P
o
pq
rstuvwxyz
Enter Exit
679 VWXYZ 800 SAT.1
1 M
8
Q
2
20
R
Navigate
01:egA
N
0_0005
_0
S
T
VT tsil lennahC
Enter TV/RadioExit
oeretSENO CBB 100
Time and date
8002/80/0283:7180:71
O
6
5%
63
%
_
0
03
0_Au
dio
2
_AB
...
00
5_
00
30_A
u
dio
2_AB
U
V
WX
Y
Zabcdefgh
ijklmn
again.
27
Page 27
Multi audio/DVB-Subtitle
/
Note:
DVB-Subtitle can also be changed by
pressing of SUBTITLE repeatedly.
28
Multi audio
You can select your preferred Audio mode and DVB (digital TV) subtitle Language. The Multi audio menu will display the Audio mode and Language options available with the current broadcast.
Press AUDIO SELECT to display the Multi audio menu.
1
The Audio mode and Language code will be displayed if available.
To select Audio mode, press ϵ or ϶. In general the below
2
audio modes will be supported in a service. Stereo, Left, Right and L + R.
To select a Language code, press ϳ or ϴ to select code within Language code list.
When completely different audio tracks are being broadcast
• from the left and right channels, select Left or Right.
Press EXIT. Your selected audio preferences will be saved.
3
DVB-Subtitle
DVB-Subtitle is a feature supported in DVB (Digital Video Broadcasting) applications in which the service shown can be accompanied by a text display on the screen in parallel with the corresponding audio service. The DVB-Subtitle feature can be enabled or disabled at anytime.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Subtitle”, then press ENTER.
1
Press ϵ or ϶ to select your desired subtitle language from
2
the available languages.
To turn off the DVB-Subtitle, press ϵ or ϶ repeatedly until
3
‘Off’ appears in the Subtitle menu. Press EXIT. Your selected subtitle language will be saved.
Multi audio
Audio mode
No. Language Code
001 ENG
Navigate
Multi audio
Audio mode
No. Language Code
001 ENG
Navigate
Main menu System Configuration
CH1 CH2
ABC
ABC
CH3
Subtitle
egaugnaL
Navigate
Enter Exit
Enter Exit
Display Setup Time Setup Password Setup
Subtitle
Enter Exit
English
Stereo
L+R
Texd
i
i
EPG (Electronic Program Guide)
The Guide menu shows the available programme listings for the next 8 days only, including today. However, the guide menu will show ‘No Event Name’ for programmes which are more than 8 days ahead, or for programmes within the 8 days when no programme information is available.
I
C
Press GUIDE to display the Guide menu.
1
Service list :
Lists all the services that are currently available. As you scroll through the service list by pressing ϳ or ϴ, the Event list will be refreshed accordingly, and you will see the programme information for the currently highlighted programme. To scroll through the service list page by page, press Red or Green button.
Events list :
List the events in a grid of rows and columns. Each row shows the list of events that are available, for the corresponding service in the service list. Within each row, you can press ϵ or ϶ to navigate through the rest of the events. You can easily move to the Previous day or Next day in the Events List by pressing Yellow or Blue button (the date of the programme information you are currently viewing is shown in the top right hand corner).
The full Event name along with the duration of the event will be displayed in the bar above. Event title will be displayed only if available otherwise ‘No Description’ message will be displayed.
From within the Guide menu, you can open the Description
2
menu for the currently highlighted programme by pressing
The Guide/Description menu shows the extended event description of an event. You can scroll and view the complete event description of the event using ϳ or ϴ.
To return to the Guide menu, press To clear the menu screen, press EXIT.
Guide 16:50 Sun 20/08/2008 TV
671_MNO_10Step_0820_0100_0120_Audio2_0100_0120...
MNO PQS STU TCM
Service list
VWXYZ SAT.1 ARTE DEF
01:00Channels
671_M... 672_PQR_SMPTE_col... 673_STU_SDTV... 673_STU_SDTV Moving... No Event Name 679_VWXYZ_Monosoo_0100_0300... No Event Name No Event Name No Event Name
Page - Page + Prev.Day Next Day
Navigate
Highlighted programme
02:0001:30
671_MNO_10step
671_M...
672_PQR_SMPTE_col...
Enter Exit Guide
View Info
.
8002/80/02nuS671 MNO
Events list
TV/Radio
.
29
EPG Timer
You can choose whether or not the screen switches on when the timer event begins - please see page 18 (Rec screen status (LCD Power on/off)). This is so that if you are using the timer to make a recording to your VCR or other device, the TV screen will not switch on unless you want it to. If you try to switch to another channel while a timer event is in progress, the following message will appear: ‘WARNING: CHANGING THE CHANNEL WILL INTERRUPT YOUR EVENT TIMER. ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO PROCEED? YES/NO’. Select Yes or No according to your wishes.
Press GUIDE to display the Guide menu. Then press
1
ϳ/ϴ/ϵ/϶ to highlight the programme you want to set as a
Note:
When the EPG Timer starts, the message “Event Timer Started” will appear.
A maximum of eight Timers can be programmed.
If the EPG Timer starts when it is already switched on, it will start at the exact time that is set. If it starts from the standby mode, it will begin 20 seconds in advance of the stated time. You cannot hasten the start time from
• the original start time of the Event.
You cannot set with the same date and time of another Event.
Press the Yellow the start time of the event.
Press the Blue time duration of the event.
If the EPG Timer begins during standby mode, the indicator on the unit will be lit in orange. This is to indicate that an EPG Timer event has begun in standby mode.
When in power-off-condition, EPG Timer cannot be activated.
30
button
button
to change
to change the
(Power)
timer event, then press ENTER.
Note:
If you select an event which has already started, the selected program will be displayed on the screen, as you cannot set the timer for a programme which has already started.
To display the stored timer events, press GUIDE twice. The Event Timer menu (see step 3 below) will appear. You can also delete or change the frequency (Once / Daily / Weekly) of the stored timer events (but please note that you cannot edit the time details that have been set from the EPG).
The confirmation banner will be displayed.
2
Press ϵ or ϶ to select ‘Yes’ or ‘No’, then press ENTER (the selected option is shown in blue).
The Event Timer menu will appear.
3
Press the Red button to set the Timer mode for a selected event.
The Timer mode
4
specifies the frequency of Timer wake-up which can be set as Once, Daily or Weekly. Press ENTER to save the selected Timer mode.
Note:
To delete a timer event, select the specified event, then press the Green
To return to the Guide menu, press DIGITAL MENU.
5
To clear the menu screen, press EXIT.
Guide 16:50 Sun 20/08/2008 TV
671_MNO_10Step_0820_0100_0120_Audio2_0100_0120...
MNO PQS STU TCM VWXYZ SAT.1 ARTE DEF
Page - Page + Prev.Day Next Day
Navigate
Event Timer
Service Name Mode Date Time Duration BBC ONE Once 26/02/08 08:10 00:23
Timer mode Edit Timer Edit Duration
Navigate
Event Timer
Service Name Mode Date BBC ONE Once 26/02
Once Daily Weekly
button
.
01:00Channels
671_M...
671_M... 672_PQR_SMPTE_col... 673_STU_SDTV... 673_STU_SDTV Moving... No Event Name 679_VWXYZ_Monosoo_0100_0300... No Event Name No Event Name No Event Name
Enter Exit Guide
View Info
Delete Timer
02:0001:30
671_MNO_10step
672_PQR_SMPTE_col...
Enter Exit
Disc
DVD discs must be Region 2 or Region ALL type to play on this unit. The suitable disc formats are: DVD-Video, DVD-R/-RW (Video format only), Audio CD, CD-R/CD-RW and Video CD. Some CD-R/RW discs may be incompatible.
This unit can play an 8cm disc. Please do not use a disc adapter. It may cause trouble.
Please do not insert any disc of an irregular shape into the unit, as it may interfere with the function of the unit.
You may not be able to remove it.
Please do not use after market accessories, such as a ring protector, as this may cause trouble with the operation of the unit.
Do not play DVD-ROM, DVD-Audio, CD-G, Photo CD or SVCD to prevent accidental erasure of prerecorded
8002/80/02 nuS 671 MNO
TV/Radio
material.
Title
When two or more movies are recorded on a disc, the disc is divided into two or more sections. Each section is called a “TITLE”.
Chapter
The titles can be subdivided into many sections. Each section is called a “CHAPTER”.
Track
Video CD/Audio CD can contain several items. These are assigned to tracks.
Removing Disc from Case
Be sure to hold the edge of disc. Do not touch the surface of the disc. Pick up the disc gently from the case.
Do not scratch the disc.
Do not get dirt on the surface of the disc.
Do not stick a label or adhesive tape on the disc.
Do not drop or bend the disc.
Storing Disc
Store the disc in the case to avoid risk of scratches, dirt or damage.
Do not leave disc exposed to direct sunlight or in hot or humid places.
Cleaning Disc
Wipe the disc with a clean, dry cloth from center to edge.
Do not wipe in circular direction.
Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners.
On Video CDs
This unit supports Video CDs equipped with the PBC (Version 2.0) function. (PBC is the abbreviation of Playback Control.) You can enjoy two playback variations depending on types of discs.
Video CD not equipped with PBC function (Version 1.1) Sound and movie can be played on this TV/DVD in the same way as an audio CD.
Video CD equipped with PBC function (Version 2.0) In addition to operation of a Video CD not equipped with the PBC function, you can enjoy playback of interactive software with search function by using the menu displayed on the TV screen (Menu Playback). Some of the functions described in this owner’s manual may not work with some discs.
To turn off the PBC
1.
Press PLAY MODE in the Stop mode.
2.
Press ϳ/ϴ to select “Mode”, then press ENTER repeatedly until “Off” appears.
3.
Press PLAY MODE again to clear the screen.
To turn on the PBC
Follow the above step 1~2, then press ENTER repeatedly until “PBC” appear.
CHAPTER 1
TRACK 1 TRACK 2 TRACK 3 TRACK 4 TRACK 5
DVD DISC
TITLE1 TITLE2
CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 3CHAPTER 1
Video-CD/Audio-CD
31
Page 28
Playing a disc
This section shows you the basics on how to play a disc.
Basic playback (DVD/VCD/Audio CD)
Preparation
Make sure that the (ON). (The
Press TV/DVD on the remote control to select the DVD
1
mode.
Place the disc in the
2
disc slot with the label side facing forward. (If the disc has a label.)
Do not place a disc which is unplayable in this unit.
On the TV-screen, “ ” changes to “Reading” and then
3
playback commences.
A menu screen will appear on the TV screen if the disc
• has a menu feature. Press ϳ/ϴ/ϵ/϶ to select title, then press ENTER.
• Title is selected and play commences.
Press to end playback.
4
The unit records the stopped point, depending on the
• disc. “ resume playback (from the scene point). If you press again (“ ” appears on the screen.), the
• unit will clear the stopped point.
To start playback in the stop mode
Press PLAY (
(Power) switch on the unit is pushed in
(Power) indicator lights up.)
Reading
” appears on the screen. Press
).
PLAY
( ) to
Playing a disc
To pause playback (still mode)
Press
during playback.
To resume normal playback, press PLAY (
The sound is muted during still mode.
To stop playback
Press .
To remove the disc
Press
.
Remove the disc after the disc comes out.
Note:
If a non-compatible disc is loaded, “Incorrect Disc”, “Region Code Error” or “Parental Error” will appear on the TV screen according to the type of loaded disc. In this case, check your disc again (see pages 31 and 50).
Some discs may take a minute or so to start playback.
When you set a single-faced disc label backwards (i.e. the wrong way), “Reading” will appear on the display for a few minutes and then “Incorrect Disc” will continue to be displayed.
Some discs may not work the resuming facility.
Resuming cannot function when you play a PBC-featured Video CD while the PBC is on. To turn off the PBC, see page
31.
Some playback operations of DVDs may be intentionally fixed by software producers. Since this unit plays DVDs according to the disc contents the software producers designed, some playback features may not be available. Also refer to the instructions supplied with the DVDs. Do not move the unit during playback. Doing so may damage
• the disc. In many instances, a menu screen will appear after playback
• of a movie is completed. Prolonged display of an on-screen menu may damage your television set, permanently etching that image onto its screen. To avoid this, be sure to press on your remote control once the movie is completed.
There may be a slight delay between the button is pressed and the function activates.
).
Note:
If the unit does not operate properly:
Static electricity, etc., may affect the player’s operation. Disconnect the AC power cord once, then connect it again. If a disc is inserted during some modes
• other than DVD mode, it may switch to DVD mode and then playback may be begun automatically.
32
Playing a disc
Note:
A prohibition symbol “ at the upper right of the screen. This symbol means either the feature you tried is not available on the disc, or the unit cannot access the feature at this time. This does not indicate a problem with the unit.
34
” may appear
You can play discs at various speeds.
Playing in fast reverse or fast forward directions (DVD/ VCD/Audio CD)
Press
or during playback. : Fast reverse playback : Fast forward playback
Each time you press
To resume normal playback Press PLAY (
Note:
The unit mutes sound during reverse and forward scan of DVD/VCD/Audio CD discs.
The playback speed may differ depending on the disc.
You can use fast reverse/fast forward playback for DivX
Playing frame by frame (DVD/VCD)
Press
during still playback.
Each time you press
To resume normal playback Press PLAY (
Note:
You can use frame by frame playback for DivX
The sound is muted during frame by frame playback.
Playing in slow-motion (DVD/VCD)
Press
or during playback.
Each time you press
To resume normal playback Press PLAY (
Note:
The sound is muted during slow-motion playback.
You can use slow motion playback for DivX
Reverse slow (
Locating a chapter or track (DVD/VCD/Audio CD)
Press SKIP number you want. Playback starts from the selected chapter or track.
To locate succeeding chapters or tracks, press SKIP Playback starts from the beginning of the current chapter or track. To locate the preceding chapter or track, press SKIP in quick succession. Playback starts from the beginning of the preceding chapter or track.
or , the playback speed changes.
).
®
CD.
, the picture advances one frame.
).
®
CD.
or , the slow-motion speed changes.
).
®
) does not work on VCD and DivX® CD.
or repeatedly to display the chapter or track
CD.
.
twice
Zooming/Locating desired scene
Zooming (DVD/VCD)
This unit will allow you to zoom in the frame image. You can then make selections by switching the position of the frame.
Press ZOOM during playback.
1
The centre part of the image will be zoomed in. Each press of ZOOM will change the ZOOM
3 (x 2.0).
(x 1.5) and
Press ϳ/ϴ/ϵ/϶ to view a different part of the frame.
2
You may move the frame from the centre position to UP, DOWN, LEFT or RIGHT direction.
In the zoom mode, press ZOOM repeatedly to return to a
3
Locating desired scene (DVD/VCD/Audio CD)
Use the title, chapter and time recorded on the DVD disc to locate the desired point to playback. In the case of VCD/Audio CD discs, time and track are used to locate the desired point to playback. To check the title, chapter/track and time, press
1
2
3
4
Off).
1:1 view (
Note:
You can select the Pause or Slow in the zoom mode.
• Some discs may not respond to zoom feature.
• Zoom function can be used for DivX
Press JUMP during playback or resume stop mode.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select the “Title/Track”, “Chapter” or “Time”.
Press Number buttons (0–9) to input the number.
If you input a wrong number,
• press CANCEL. Refer to the package
• supplied with the disc to check the numbers.
Press ENTER. Playback starts.
When you change the title, playback starts from Chapter 1 of the selected title.
Some discs may not work in the above operation.
Note:
In case of the Audio CD and Video-CD, only Track and Time can be selected.
In case of the Video-CD playback with PBC, the JUMP does not work. Turn off the PBC (see page 31).
Only Time search function can be used for DivX
Title Chapter Time
Title Chapter Time
Title Chapter 12 Time
®
CD.
1(x 1.3), 2
Jump
Jump
Jump
®
1
.
CD.
33
35
Page 29
Marking desired scenes
Note:
Some discs may not work with the
• marking operation. The marking is cancelled when you
• eject the disc or turn the power off. Some subtitles recorded around the
• marker may fail to appear. In case of Video CD with PBC,
• Marker function is prohibited. Marker function does not work with
• MP3/JPEG CD/DivX
36
®
CD.
Marking the scenes (DVD/VCD/Audio CD)
The unit stores the points that you want to watch again up to 3 points. You can resume playback from each scene.
Press MARKER during
1
playback.
Select the blank Marker using
2
ϳ or ϴ. Then press ENTER at the desired scene.
Repeat this procedure to set the other 2 scenes.
Press MARKER to clear this display.
3
Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3
Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3
2700 54
Returning to the scenes (DVD/VCD/Audio CD)
Press MARKER during
1
playback or stop mode.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select the
2
Marker 1-3.
Press ENTER.
3
Playback starts from the marked scene.
To cancel the Marker
Follow the above steps 1~2, then press CANCEL.
Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3
Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3
2700 54
01
160825
02
31
27
54
00 01
16
25
02
08
31
Repeat playback/A-B Repeat playback
Repeat playback (DVD/VCD)
Press PLAY MODE during playback or stop mode.
1
Press ENTER repeatedly to
2
select “Chapter” or “Title”.
The unit automatically starts repeat playback after finishing the current title or chapter.
[Video CD]
Press ϴ to select “Repeat”. Press ENTER to select “Track” or “All”.
If you set the repeat mode during stop mode, press PLAY
(
) to start Repeat playback.
Press PLAY MODE again to clear the screen.
3
To resume normal playback
Select Repeat : “Off” in step 2.
Note:
Some discs may not work with the repeat operation.
• In case of Video CD with PBC, Repeat functions are
• prohibited during playback. Chapter/Track repeat function is cancelled whenever
SKIP (
) or SKIP ( ) is pressed.
A-B Repeat playback (DVD/VCD/Audio CD)
A-B repeat playback allows you to repeat selection between two selected points.
Press REPEAT A-B during
1
playback. The start point is selected.
Press REPEAT A-B again.
2
The end point is selected. Playback starts at the point that you selected. Playback stops at the end point and returns to Point A automatically, then starts again.
To resume normal playback
Press REPEAT A-B again.
Off
” appears on the screen.
Note:
In A-B Repeat mode, subtitles near the A or B locations may not be displayed.
You may not be able to set A-B Repeat for the scenes that include multiple angles.
A-B Repeat playback does not work when Repeat playback is activated.
You may not be able to set A-B Repeat during certain scenes of the DVD.
A-B Repeat does not work with an interactive DVD and MP3/JPEG CD.
In case of Video CD with PBC, A-B Repeat is prohibited.
Play Mode
Repeat : Off
A
AB
37
Changing angles/Title selection/DVD menu
Changing angles (DVD)
When playing back a disc recorded with multi-angle facility, you can change the angle that you are viewing the scene from.
Press ANGLE during
1
playback. The current angle will appear.
Press ANGLE repeatedly until the desired angle is
2
selected.
Note:
Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change
• the angles even if multi-angles are recorded on the DVD.
Title selection (DVD)
Two or more titles are recorded on some discs. If the title menu is recorded on the disc, you can select the desired title.
Press TOP MENU during playback.
1
Title menu appears on the screen.
Press ϳ/ϴ/ϵ/϶ to select the desired title.
2
Press ENTER or PLAY ( ).
3
The playback of the selected title will start.
Note:
Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to select the
• title. Depending on the DVD, a “title menu” may simply be called a “menu” or “title” in the instructions supplied with the disc.
DVD menu (DVD)
Some DVDs allow you to select the disc contents using the menu. When you playback these DVDs, you can select the subtitle language, soundtrack language, etc, using the menu.
Press DVD MENU during playback.
1
The DVD menu appears on the screen.
Press DVD MENU again to resume playback at the scene
• when you pressed DVD MENU.
Press ϳ/ϴ/ϵ/϶ to select the desired item.
2
Press ENTER.
3
The menu continues to another screen. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set the item completely.
Note:
Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to resume
• playback from the scene point when you press DVD
MENU.
38
Changing soundtrack language/Subtitles/Disc status
Changing Soundtrack Language (DVD/VCD)
You can select the language when you play a multilingual disc.
Press AUDIO SELECT during
1
1/2
Note:
If the desired language is not heard after pressing the button several times, the language is not recorded on the disc.
The selected soundtrack language is cancelled when you eject the disc. The initial default language or available language will be heard if the disc is played back again.
Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change subtitles, or to turn subtitles on or off.
While playing a DVD, the subtitle may change when you loaded or eject the disc.
In some cases, a selected subtitle language may not be changed immediately.
playback. The current soundtrack language will appear.
Press AUDIO SELECT repeatedly
2
until the desired language is selected.
The on screen display will
• disappear after a few seconds.
In case of Video CD playback
Audio type changes as follows each time you press AUDIO SELECT.
LR L R
Subtitles (DVD)
When playing back a disc recorded with subtitles, you can select the subtitle language or turn the subtitle off.
Press SUBTITLE repeatedly during
1
playback until the desired language is selected.
To turn off the subtitle, press
2
SUBTITLE until “Off” appears.
The on screen display will
• disappear after a few seconds.
Disc status (DVD/VCD)
With press of , the status of the disc will appear on the screen. To cancel the display, press
[DVD]
DISC OPERATION
TITLE NO.
DVD 00:15:25 01:41:39 Title 1/3 Chapter 2/24 1/1 Eng Dolby Digital 1/2 Eng 1/1
ANGLE NO.
AUDIO LANGUAGE A KIND OF AUDIO
[Video CD]
DISC OPERATION
VCD 00:08:32 00:51:03 Track 3/15
TRACK NO.
again.
ELAPSED TIME
SUBTITLE LANGUAGE
ELAPSED TIME
TOTAL TIME
TOTAL TIME
1/2 Eng Dolby Digital
2/2 Fre Dolby Digital
1/5 Eng
Off
CHAPTER NO.
39
Page 30
MP3/JPEG/DivX® and Audio CD operation
This unit can playback the MP3/JPEG/DivX®-data which has been recorded on CD-R/RW. Audio CD also can be played back. To produce the MP3/JPEG/DivX and a MP3/JPEG/DivX This unit requires discs/recordings to meet certain technical standards in order to achieve optimal playback quality. There are many different types of recordable disc formats (including CD-R containing MP3 files). Not all recordable discs will produce optimal playback quality. The technical criteria set forth in this instruction manual are meant only as a guide. Use of CD-RW for MP3 files is not recommended.
MP3/JPEG/DivX® - data information
Limitations on MP3/JPEG/DivX® playback
MP3/JPEG/DivX “.mp3”, “.jpg”, “div”, “divx”, “avi”.
MP3/JPEG/DivX
This unit can read 2000 files per disc. If one disc has more than 2000 files, it reads up to 2000 files, the remaining files will be omitted.
MP3/JPEG/DivX
It may take more than one minute for this unit to read MP3/JPEG/DivX
Music recorded by “Joliet Recording Specification” can be played back.
The music files recorded by “Hierarchical File System” (HFS) cannot be played.
Limitations on displaying of the file name.
The maximum number for display is 15 characters. Long file names will be condensed.
Available characters for display are the following: capital or small alphabets of A through Z, numbers of 0 through 9, and _ (under score).
Other characters than those above are replaced in hyphen.
To playback MP3/JPEG/DivX
1.
Use MP3/JPEG/DivX
2.
Insert two or three digit number in the head of file name. (ex. “01” “02” or “001” “002”).
3.
Refrain from making too many sub-folders.
CAUTION:
Some MP3/JPEG/DivX
The CD-R/RW that has no music data or non MP3/JPEG/DivX
Standard sampling frequency and the bit rate:
MP3
MPEG-1 Audio 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz 32kbps ~ 320kbps (constant bit rate or variable bit rate) The recommend recording setting for a high-quality sound is 44.1kHz of sampling frequency and 128kbps of constant bit rate.
®
DivX
video
®
DivX
version: DivX® 3, 4, 5, and 6 (specifically 3.1.1, 4.1.2, 5.0.2, 5.0.5, 5.1.1, 5.2.1, 6.0 at Home
Theater profile). Audio format: MPEG1 Layer2 (MP2), MPEG1 Layer3 (MP3) Sampling frequencies: 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz Bit rate: 32kbps ~ 320kbps Resolution: Max 720 x 576 (at 25fps), Max 720 x 480 (at 30fps)
®
-encoding Software (not supplied). The Apple-HFS-System cannot be played.
®
CD are standardized by ISO9660, its file name must include following extensions;
®
CD must be corresponded to the ISO standardized files.
®
CDs cannot be used for the purpose of recording on this unit.
®
CD in the recorded order.
®
software that records data alphabetically or numerically.
®
CDs cannot be played back depending on the recording conditions.
®
-data, you need a Windows-PC with CD-RW drive
®
files depending on its structure.
®
files cannot be played back.
MP3/JPEG/DivX® and Audio CD operation
Note:
MP3 file on the Kodak Picture CD is
• not recognized on this unit. During MP3/JPEG-Playback, you
• cannot use JUMP and A-B Repeat functions. You can use Repeat (Track or All),
• Random functions and Program playback for MP3/JPEG/DivX Playback (See pages 44, 45)
Loading CD
Load a MP3/JPEG/DivX® CD or an Audio CD into the disc slot.
1
A file browser screen will appear on the screen.
2
In case the current directory includes 9 files or more, press ϳ or ϴ to scroll in the file list.
To see contents in folder, select the folder and then press ENTER. To return to the parent directory, select “ Up ...” then press ENTER.
In case of a CD containing a mixture of MP3, JPEG and
®
DivX
files, the files are played back by selecting them
from the file browser.
Operation status
File list
/MP3-5.MP3
MP3-5
MP3-6 MP3-7 MP3-8 Picture-1 Picture-2 Movie-1 Movie-2
File number
1/15 00:00:00
Elapsed time
Select Files
Repeat :Off
Mode :Off
Music Playing
Preview windowCursor
Selected file name
MP3 and Audio CD playback
In the file browser, press ϳ/ϴ to select the desired file.
1
When PLAY ( displaying file browser displayed, playback begins automatically starting from the first file. In this case, if the first file is an MP3 file, only MP3 files are played back in order. If the first file is a JPEG file, the first JPEG file is played back. If the first file is a DivX played back. If there is no file at a root directory, playback does not begin automatically.
Press ENTER.
2
The selected file starts playing back.
Press to end playback.
3
The unit records the stopped point. “
screen. Press PLAY ( scene point). If you press
• the stopped point.
Select Files
The file type to make it display in the file browser can be chosen.
1.
Press ϵ or ϶ to select “Select Files” at right column in the file browser.(“Select Files” is not applicable to Audio CD.)
2.
Press ENTER, then press ϳ or ϴ to select file type from the list (Music, Picture or Movie).
3.
Press ENTER to add/remove check mark. Checked file type will be displayed in the file browser.
4.
®
Press RETURN to save the setting.
-
) is pressed after
®
file, the first DivX® file is
) to resume playback (from the
again or unload the disc, the unit will clear
Tool kit window
File type
: Indicates Music file
(Audio CD/MP3)
: Indicates Picture file
(JPEG)
: Indicates Movie file
®
(DivX
video)
/MP3-2.MP3
Folder-1 Folder-2 MP3-1
MP3-2
MP3-3 MP3-4 MP3-5 MP3-6
” appears on the
Select Files
Repeat :Off
Mode :Off
JPEG Preview
Go
40
MP3/JPEG/Divx® and Audio CD operation
JPEG playback
In the file browser, press ϳ/ϴ to select the desired JPEG
1
file. To display a thumbnail list, press DVD MENU. Press ϳ/ϴ/ϵ/϶ to select the desired file.
Note:
During JPEG playback, you cannot use Jump and A-B Repeat functions.
When an image exceeds 5760 x 3840 pixels, the entire image (preview window or thumbnail list) may not be displayed on a screen.
It may have a longer interval due to the size of data.
42
(To return to the file browser, press TOP MENU.)
When PLAY ( after displaying the file browser, playback begins automatically starting from the first file. In this case, if the first file is a JPEG file, the first JPEG file is played back.
If the first file is an MP3 file, only MP3 files are played back in order. If the first file is a DivX played back. If there is no file at a root directory, playback does not begin automatically.
Press ENTER. The selected picture appears on the screen.
2
Rotating an image
You can rotate an image by 90 degrees. Press ANGLE during playback of the image. “
Zooming an image
Zoom function also can be used in viewing JPEG files. Press ZOOM (See “Zooming” on page 35).
Press to end playback.
3
The file browser appears on the screen. If you want to watch the other file, repeat steps 1 ~ 2.
Slide show playback
The slide show enables you to view pictures (files) one after another automatically.
Preparation
Set “JPEG Interval” setting to “Off”, “5 Seconds”, “10 Seconds” or “15 Seconds” (See page 49).
Select your desired starting file for the slide show in step 1
1
above.
Press ENTER or PLAY ( ) to start slide show from the
2
selected file.
) is pressed
”, “ ”, “ ” or “ ” appears on the screen.
If you press
during the slide show, the slide show stops
temporary. “
” appears briefly on the screen.
Press PLAY ( show. If the picture appears upside down or sideways, press ANGLE repeatedly until it’s right side up. “
“ When the slide show playback finished, the file list appears. To stop the slide show, press
) or SKIP ( ) again to resume the slide
” or “ ” appears on the screen.
/Picture-01.JPG
Picture-01
Picture-02 Picture-03 Picture-04 Picture-05 Picture-06 Picture-07 Picture-08
®
file, the first DivX® file is
Select Files
Repeat :Off
Mode :Off
JPEG Preview
W: 2048 H: 1536
”, “ ”,
. The file list appears.
MP3/JPEG/Divx® and Audio CD operation
Note:
In order to play DivX on this unit, you first need to register the unit with registration code. See page 50.
Depending on the recording conditions of DivX be able to use fast reverse/forward playback or JUMP function.See pages 34, 35.
®
VOD content
®
file, you may not
DivX® playback
In the file browser, press
1
ϳ/ϴ to select the desired file.
When PLAY ( ) has been pressed after the file browser displayed, playback begins automatically starting from the first file. In this case, if the first file is a JPEG file, the first JPEG file is played back. If the first
®
file, the first DivX® file is played back. If the first
file is a DivX file is an MP3 file, only MP3 file are played back in order. If there is no file at a root directory, playback does not begin automatically.
Press ENTER or PLAY ( ). The selected DivX® movie will
2
be played back on the TV screen.
Press STOP ( ) to end playback.
3
The unit records the stopped point. “ TV screen. Press PLAY ( the scene point).
If you press STOP ( will clear the stopped point. To watch the other file, repeat steps 1 ~ 2.
Playing DivX® VOD content
DivX® VOD content is protected by DRM (Digital Rights Man­agement) system. This restricts playback of content to specific registered devices.
If the incorrect DRM file is loaded, “Authorization Error This player is not authorized to play this video.” will appear on the screen. When you attempt to play DivX VOD, the number of plays is limited and the right message will appear on the screen. If you wish to play it, select “Yes”.
If the number of plays goes over
• the limit, then “Rental Expired” will be displayed. In this case, the file will not be played.
/Movie-01.DIVX
Movie-01
Movie-02
Movie-03
Movie-04
Movie-05
Movie-06
Movie-07
Movie-08
) to resume playback (from
Select Files
Repeat :Off
Mode :Off
JPEG P review
” appears on the
) again or unload the disc, the unit
View DivX(R) VOD Rental
This rental has 5 views left.
Do you want to use one
®
of your 5 views now?
NoYes
41
43
Page 31
MP3/JPEG/DivX® and Audio CD operation
Repeat playback (Audio CD/MP3/JPEG/DivX®)
In the file browser, press ϳ/ϴ/ϵ/϶
1
to select “Repeat” during stop mode.
Press ENTER repeatedly to select
2
“Track” or “All”.
Press PLAY ( ).
3
The unit automatically starts repeat playback after finishing the current track.
To resume normal playback
Select Repeat : “Off” in step 2.
Random playback (Audio CD/MP3/JPEG/DivX®)
In the file browser, press ϳ/ϴ/ϵ/϶ to select “Mode” during
1
stop mode.
Press ENTER to select “Random”.
2
Press PLAY ( ).
3
The Random playback will start.
To resume normal playback
Select Mode : “Off” in step 2.
Note:
The repeat or random function is cancelled when you eject the disc or turn the power off.
The track repeat function is cancelled when
or is pressed.
In case of Audio CD, the function of A-B Repeat also can be used. See “A-B Repeat playback” (See page
37).
44
Folder-1 Folder-2 MP3-1
Folder-1 Folder-2 MP3-1
Folder-1 Folder-2 MP3-1
Folder-1 Folder-2 MP3-1
Select Files
Repeat :Off
Mode :Off
Select Files
Repeat :Track
Mode :Off
Select Files
Repeat :Off
Mode :Off
Select Files
Repeat :Off
Mode :Random
MP3/JPEG/DivX® and Audio CD operation
Program playback (Audio CD/MP3/JPEG/DivX®)
In the file browser, pressϳ/ϴ/ϵ/϶
1
to select “Edit Mode”, then press ENTER.
When “Edit Mode” is black color, you can mark the files which you want to add into Program list.
Press ϳ/ϴ/ϵ/϶ to select the file
2
you want to add into the program list.
Press ENTER. Selected file was marked. Repeat this procedure to select the other files.
Press ϳ/ϴ/ϵ/϶ to select “Add To
3
Program”. Then press ENTER. All marked files are added into the program list. (The maximum number of files can be added is
30.)
When you finish storing the files you want into the Program list, select “Edit Mode” again and press ENTER to release edit mode.
Press ϳ/ϴ to select “Program View”, then press ENTER.
4
Program View shows only the programed files that you have added in Step 2.
Browser View Program View
Folder-1 Folder-2 MP3-1 MP3-2
In the Program View, press PLAY ( ). The files start to
5
playback in programmed order that were added by you.
To remove file from program list in stop mode
In the Edit Mode, switch to Program View. Select the files you want to remove, then press ENTER. Select “Clear Program” and press ENTER. Marked file is removed from program list.
Note:
The program function is cancelled when you eject the disc or
• turn the power off.
Edit Mode
ProgramView
AddTo Program
Folder-1 Folder-2 MP3-1 MP3-2
Folder-1 Folder-2 MP3-1
P3-1.MP3
Folder-1 Folder-2
MP3-1
Folder-1 Folder-2 MP3-1
Repeat :Off
Mode :Off
Repeat :Off
Mode :Off
ProgramView
AddTo Program
Edit Mode
Browser View
Clear Program
Edit Mode
Edit Mode
Edit Mode
45
Program playback/Random playback
You can arrange the playback order of tracks or files on the disc. And the unit can also select tracks or files at random and playback them. These feature works for Video CD. For Audio CD and MP3/JPEG/DivX CD, please see “Random playback (Audio CD/MP3/JPEG/DivX page 44 and “Program playback (Audio CD/MP3/JPEG/DivX page 45.
Note:
In case of Video CD with PBC, you cannot set Program playback.
The program is cancelled when you eject the disc or turn the power off.
In case of Video CD with PBC, you cannot set Random function during playback.
46
®
®
Program playback (VCD)
1
®
2
)” on
)” on
3
4
Random playback (VCD)
1 2
3
Press PLAY MODE during stop mode.
Press ϳ/ϴ to select “Mode”, then press ENTER to select “Program”.
Press ϵ/϶ to select the programming position. Use Number buttons (0–9) to input the track numbers on sequentially.
If you input a wrong number, press CANCEL.
Press ϵ/϶ to return to the left column, then press ϳ/ϴ to select the “Program Playback” and press ENTER.
The programs you selected will start to playback in order.
To resume normal playback, select Mode “Off” in step 2.
To change the program
1.
Select Mode to “Program” (as step 2), press ϳ/ϴ/ϵ/϶ to select the track number you want to change, then press CANCEL.
2.
Press Number buttons (0–9) to overwrite the new track number.
To clear the program one by one
Select Mode to “Program”, press ϳ/ϴ/ϵ/϶ to select the track number. Then press CANCEL.
To clear all the programs
In the above column, press ϳ/ϴ to select “Clear Program”. Then press ENTER.
Press PLAY MODE during playback or stop mode.
Press ϳ/ϴ to select “Mode”, then press ENTER to select “Random”.
Press PLAY ( ). The Random Playback will start.
If you set “Random” during playback mode, Random
• playback will begin after the track that is currently being played has ended. To resume normal playback, select Mode “Off” in step 2.
Play Mode
Mode : Off
Repeat : Off
Program Playback
Play Mode
Mode : Program
Repeat : Off
Program Playback
Play Mode
Mode : Program
Repeat : Off
Program Playback
Play Mode
Mode : Random
Repeat : Off
Program Playback
1 – – – 2 – – – 3 – – –
1 – – – 2 – – – 3 – – –
1 9
2 – – – 3 – – –
1 – – – 2 – – – 3 – – –
Customizing The Function Settings
You can change the default settings to customize performance to your preference.
Setting procedure
Press SETUP in stop mode.
1
The following on-screen display appears.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select the desired
2
section, then press ϶ or ENTER.
First option will be highlighted.
3
Press ϳ or ϴ to select the desired option.
Then press ϶ or ENTER.
4
The selectable settings will appear.
Change the selection using ϳ or ϴ, by referring to the
5
corresponding pages 48 ~ 50. Press ENTER to save the setting.
Repeat steps 3 and 5 to change other option.
• To select another section, go back to step 2 by pressing
ϵ or RETURN repeatedly.
To clear SETUP screen, press SETUP or press RETURN
6
repeatedly.
Setting details
Section Option Details
Menu
To select the language of “Menu”,
Subtitle
“Subtitle” and “Audio” if more than one
Audio
languages are available on the disc.
OSD To select a preferred language for on
screen display.
TV
To select a picture size according to the
Screen
aspect ratio of your TV.
Display To turn On or Off the operational status
display on the screen.
Picture
To select a preferred picture mode from
Mode
“Video”, “Film” or “Auto”.
JPEG
To select a preferred setting for the slide
Interval
show playback.
Night
To select On or Off for Night Mode.
Mode Digital
To select a digital output sound
Out
format corresponding to your system connection.
Parental To select a preferred parental level for
the parental setting. Password To change the password. DivX(R)
To display your 8-character registration VOD
code.
Parental : Off
DRC : Off
E.B.L. : Off
Menu : English
Set Password
QSound : On
TV Screen : 4:3
Subtitle : English
Output : Interlace
Display : On
Audio : English
DivX(R) VOD
Picture Mode : Auto
OSD : English
JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds
Screen Saver : On
Parental : Off
DRC : Off
Menu : English
TV Screen : 16:9
Set Password
QSound : On
Subtitle : English
Display : On
Output : Interlace
Audio : English
Picture Mode : Auto
DivX(R) VOD
JPEG Interval : Off
Parental : Off
DRC : Off
Menu : English
TV Screen : 16:9
Set Password
QSound : On
Subtitle : English
Display : On
Output : Interlace
Audio : English
Picture Mode : Auto
DivX(R) VOD
JPEG Interval : Off
TV Screen 4:3
TV Screen 4:3
Display : On
Picture Mode : Aut
JPEG Interval : Off
4:3
16:9
Page
48
49
50
47
Page 32
Customizing The Function Settings
Menu, Subtitle, Audio
You can select the language of “Menu”, “Subtitle” and “Audio” if more than one language is recorded onto the disc.
English, Francais, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano:
The selected language will be heard or seen.
Parental : Off
DRC : Off
E.B.L. : Off
48
Menu : English
QSound : On
TV Screen : 4:3
Subtitle : English
Set Password
Display : On
Audio : English
Output : Interlace
Picture Mode : Auto
OSD : English
DivX(R) VOD
JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds
Screen Saver : On
Parental : Off
DRC : Off
TV Screen : 16:9
Set Password
QSound : On
Display : On
Output : Interlace
Picture Mode : Auto
DivX(R) VOD
JPEG Interval : Off
Other:
Other languages can be selected (see “Language Code List” on page 52).
Off (Subtitle):
Subtitles do not appear.
Original (Audio):
The unit will select the first priority language of each disc.
Note:
If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the first- priority
• language is selected.
OSD
The setup language can be selected.
English: To display OSD language is English Francais: To display OSD language is French Espanol: To display OSD language is Spanish Deutsch: To display OSD language is German Italiano: To display OSD language is Italian
TV Screen
You have the following screen sizes to choose from:
4:3
(Letterbox)
When playing back a wide screen-DVD disc, it displays the wide picture with black bands at the top and bottom of screen.
4:3
(Panscan)
It displays the wide picture on the whole screen with left and right edges automatically cut off.
16:9
(Wide screen)
A wide screen picture is displayed full size, although the image on the screen may be geometrically distorted in this mode because the TV screen has an aspect ratio of 4:3 not 16:9.
Note:
If the DVD disc is not formatted in the pan & scan style, it displays 4:3
• style.
Display
On screen display can be switched on or off when you press any buttons.
Off: On screen displays do not appear when you press any buttons
except SUBTITLE, PLAY MODE, MARKER,
JUMP.
On: On screen displays appear when you press the buttons (factory
setting).
, AUDIO SELECT and
Parental : Off
Menu : English
E.B.L. : Off
Night Mode : Off
Set Password
Subtitle : English
TV Screen : 4:3
Digital Out : Bitstream
Output : Interlace
Audio : English
Display : On
DivX(R)VOD
Picture Mode :Auto
JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds
Screen Saver : On
Customizing The Function Settings
Picture Mode
There are two types of source content in pictures recorded in DVD video discs: film content (pictures recorded from films at 24 frames per second) and video content (video signals recorded at 30 frames per second). Make this selection according to the type of content being viewed.
Auto: Select this selection normally. The DVD player automatically detects source content, film
or video of playback source, and converts that signal in an appropriate method.
Film: The DVD player converts film content pictures appropriately.
Suitable for playback of film content pictures.
Video: The DVD player filters video signal, and converts it appropriately. Suitable for playback of video content pictures.
Note:
Depending on the disc, pictures may be cut off or doubled. In this case,
• select “Video”.
JPEG Interval
You can continuously playback all JPEG files automatically. After the selection below, the disc will start playback on JPEG files which have been recorded.
Off: Plays back one file at a time. 5 Seconds: Plays back images in the form of a slide show at 5 second
10 Seconds: Plays back images in the form of a slide show at 10 second
15 Seconds: Plays back images in the form of a slide show in 15 second
Night Mode
Night Mode enables you to control the dynamic range so as to achieve a suitable sound for your equipment.
Off: It plays back at the recording level on the disc. On: Loud sound such as explosion is toned down slightly when played
Note:
Digital Out
You can select the digital output sound format corresponding to your system connection.
Off: There is no sound output from DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack. PCM: Change Dolby Digital to PCM for the output.
Select when connected to a 2 channel digital stereo
Bitstream: Disc audio bitstream data will be output.
Note:
intervals.
intervals.
intervals.
back. This is suitable when it is connected to a stereo.
This function works only when the disc recorded with Dolby Digital is played back. The level of Night Mode may differ depending on DVD video disc.
amplifier.
Even if you select “Bitstream”, MPEG Audio will be output in PCM format.
49
Customizing The Function Settings
Parental
Some discs are specified as not suitable for children. Such discs can be limited not to playback with the unit.
1) Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Parental”, then press ENTER. “Enter Password”
screen will appear.
2) Press “0000” using Number buttons (0–9). (Please note, this is pre-
DRC : Off
E.B.L. : Off
Menu : English
Parental : Off
QSound : On
TV Screen : 4:3
Subtitle : English
Password : Change
DivX(R) VOD : Display
Display : On
Audio : English
Picture Mode : Auto
OSD : English
JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds
Screen Saver : On
setting password of this unit). Then press ENTER. The parental level list will appear.
Level 1: DVD software for adults cannot be played back. Level 8: Virtually all DVD software can be played back. Level Off: The parental control setting does not function.
3) Press ϳ or ϴ to select from the level 1 to level 8. The limitation will be
more severe as the level number is lower. Then press ENTER.
4) Press
to activate Parental control setting.
Note:
If each setup (pages 48 ~ 50) has been completed, the unit can always
• work under the same condition (especially with DVD discs). Each setup will be retained in the memory even if you turn the power off. Depending on the discs, the unit cannot limit playback.
• Some discs may not be encoded with specific rating level information
• though its disc jacket says “adult.” For those discs, the age restriction will not work. The password is required every time when you change the parental
• level. If you input a wrong number, press CANCEL.
Password
1) Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Password”, then press ENTER. “Enter Current
Password” screen will appear.
2) Press Number buttons (0–9) to input the current password (If the
password has not been set yet after you purchase this unit, it is “0000”).
3) Then press ENTER. “Enter New Password” screen will appear. Press
Number buttons (0–9) to input the new password.
4) Press ENTER. Now your new password has been set. Be sure to
remember this number!
If you forget the password.
1) Press
to remove the disc.
2) While holding 7 down on the remote control and at the same time
press STOP (DVD) on the side panel. “Password Clear” appears on the screen. Now the password has been returned to the initial value (“0000”).
(R)
DivX
VOD
In order to play DivX® VOD (Video On Demand) content on this unit, you first need to register the unit with your DivX generating a DivX
1) Press ϳ or ϴ to select “DivX(R) VOD”. Then press ENTER.
®
VOD registration code, which you submit to your provider.
Your 8-character registration code is displayed. Make a note of the code as you will need it when you register with a DivX ENTER to select Done.
®
VOD content provider. You do this by
®
VOD provider. Then press
Temporary cancel the rating level by DVD disc
Depending on the DVD disc, the disc may try to temporarily cancel the rating level that you have set. It is up to you to decide whether to cancel the rating level or not.
Note:
This temporary cancellation of rating level will be kept until the disc is ejected. When the disc is ejected, the original rating level will be set again automatically.
Load a DVD disc.
1
If the DVD disc has been designed to temporarily cancel the
2
Rating level, the screen which follows the “Reading” screen will change, depending on which disc is played. If you select “YES” with the ENTER, password input screen will then appear.
Enter the password with
3
Number buttons (0–9). Then press ENTER.
To exit from the entry, press RETURN.
Playback will commence if the entered password was
4
correct.
Enter Password
50
51
Page 33
Language Code List
Enter the appropriate code number for the initial settings “Menu”, “Subtitle” and/or “Audio” (see pages 48).
Language Name Code Language Name Code Language Name Code Language Name Code Abkhazian 1112 Fiji 1620 Lingala 2224 Singhalese 2919 Afar 1111 Finnish 1619 Lithuanian 2230 Slovak 2921 Afrikaans 1116 French 1628 Macedonian 2321 Slovenian 2922 Albanian 2927 Frisian 1635 Malagasy 2317 Somali 2925 Amharic 1123 Galician 1722 Malay 2329 Spanish 1529 Arabic 1128 Georgian 2111 Malayalam 2322 Sundanese 2931 Armenian 1835 German 1415 Maltese 2330 Swahili 2933 Assamese 1129 Greek 1522 Maori 2319 Swedish 2932 Aymara 1135 Greenlandic 2122 Marathi 2328 Tagalog 3022 Azerbaijani 1136 Guarani 1724 Moldavian 2325 Tajik 3017 Bashkir 1211 Gujarati 1731 Mongolian 2324 Tamil 3011 Basque 1531 Hausa 1811 Nauru 2411 Tatar 3030 Bengali; Bangla 1224 Hebrew 1933 Nepali 2415 Telugu 3015 Bhutani 1436 Hindi 1819 Norwegian 2425 Thai 3018 Bihari 1218 Hungarian 1831 Oriya 2528 Tibetan 1225 Breton 1228 Icelandic 1929 Panjabi 2611 Tigrinya 3019 Bulgarian 1217 Indonesian 1924 Pashto, Pushto 2629 Tonga 3025 Burmese 2335 Interlingua 1911 Persian 1611 Turkish 3028 Byelorussian 1215 Irish 1711 Polish 2622 Turkmen 3021 Cambodian 2123 Italian 1930 Portuguese 2630 Twi 3033 Catalan 1311 Japanese 2011 Quechua 2731 Ukrainian 3121 Chinese 3618 Javanese 2033 Corsican 1325 Kannada 2124 Romanian 2825 Uzbek 3136 Croatian 1828 Kashmiri 2129 Russian 2831 Vietnamese 3219 Czech 1329 Kazakh 2121 Samoan 2923 Volapük 3225 Danish 1411 Kirghiz 2135 Sanskrit 2911 Welsh 1335 Dutch 2422 Korean 2125 Scots Gaelic 1714 Wolof 3325 English 1524 Kurdish 2131 Serbian 2928 Xhosa 3418 Esperanto 1525 Laothian 2225 Serbo-Croatian 2918 Yiddish 2019 Estonian 1530 Latin 2211 Shona 2924 Yoruba 3525 Faroese 1625 Latvian, Lettish 2232 Sindhi 2914 Zulu 3631
52
Rhaeto-Romance
2823 Urdu 3128
PC connection
As PCs are sometimes supplied with a ‘conventional’ CRT monitor, you may need to adjust the display settings of your PC’s graphics card, otherwise the pictures may not appear correctly. Switch on your PC (still with your original monitor) - select ‘1360 x 768’ for the screen resolution, and select 60 Hz for the on-screen refresh rate. Switch off your PC, then connect it to your LCD TV while both items are still switched off.
Monitor Display modes
MODE Resolution V. Frequency H. Frequency Pixel Clock Frequency
VGA 640 x 480 60.000Hz 31.500kHz 25.200MHz
SVGA 800 x 600 60.317Hz 37.879kHz 40.000MHz
XGA 1024 x 768 60.004Hz 48.363kHz 65.000MHz WXGA 1280 x 720 59.870Hz 47.776kHz 79.500MHz WXGA 1280 x 768 59.939Hz 44.955kHz 74.175MHz WXGA 1360 x 768 60.015Hz 47.712kHz 85.5000MHz
(according to Graphic card)
Select PC input
Switch on the LCD-TV. Select the PC input mode (see page 11).
Note:
If there is no video signal from the computer when the unit is in PC mode, “NO SIGNAL” will appear on the TV screen.
Digital PC connection via HDMI input is not supported. If you try to connect your PC digitally anyway, the TV-operation might freeze. TV will stop to respond properly on usercommands. Countermeasure: Switch-off your TV and disconnect from the 220~240V power-supply. Disconnect the digital PC connection. Now you may retry operating your TV.
If a digital PC connection does show a picture, proper working is not guaranteed. Digital PC connection is not granted for this TV.
Description about the each setting option:
PICTURE Menu BRIGHTNESS and CONTRAST: You can adjust
these according to your personal preferences. HOR POSITION and VER POSITION: to adjust the horizontal and vertical placing of the image. PHASE and CLOCK: eliminates the horizontal (PHASE) and vertical (CLOCK) interfering lines.
RED/GREEN/BLUE: influences the colour balance. BACKLIGHT: Press ϵ or ϶ to adjust the level you
require. WXGA INPUT: When you input an WXGA signal, set this option to “ON”. RESET: Press ENTER to reset BRIGHTNESS, CONTRAST, RED, GREEN, BLUE and BACKLIGHT to the factory preset values.
Use a PC-VGA cable (not supplied) to connect the LCD-Monitor to your PC. Make the connections carefully so as not to break or bend the contacts inside the plug.
TV (Back side view)
to PC AUDIO input
Audio cable
(not supplied)
VGA cable
Example: Adjust the contrast.
During PC mode press MENU.
1
The Menu will appear on the screen.
Select CONTRAST, then press ENTER. Press ϵ or ϶ to
2
adjust CONTRAST.
Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
3
(not supplied)
AUDIO Menu BASS/TREBLE/BALANCE: Tone setting menu. RESET: Press ENTER to reset BASS, TREBLE and
BALANCE to the factory preset values.
PC
BRIGHTNESS 25
CONTRAST 40
HOR POSITION 0
VER POSITION
PHASE 25
CLOCK
0
0
53
Connecting an HDMI or a DVI device to the HDMI input
The HDMI input receives digital audio and uncompressed video from a HDMI equipped device or uncompressed digital video from a DVI equipped device. When you connect to a DVI device with a HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable, it only transfers the video signal, so it is necessary to use separate analogue leads to transfer the audio signals. Select the HDMI input mode (see page11).
TV
(Back side view)
To PC AUDIO
Note:
This set is classed as “HD-Ready”. This means that it is capable of displaying HD (High Definition) signals when connected to a suitable HD source, such as an HD receiver or DVD player that has HD capability, via HDMI, DVI, or Component Video connections. Some devices may not operate
• properly with the TV.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High­Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
54
input
Selecting the HDMI audio input source
You must choose the appropriate HDMI audio input setting for each connection, depending on whether the source is equipped with a DVI or HDMI socket.
Select HDMI AUDIO then press
1
ENTER. Press ϵ or ϶ to select HDMI or DVI.
Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
2
Note:
Follow the user’s manual that came with the HDMI-system, which you try to connect to this TV. If there is no picture available via HDMI-connection, do connect via SCART-cable first. Use the HDMI-system’s remote-control to call the HDMI-system’s setup-menu onto the screen. Follow the HDMI-system’s manual, to set its video-output to
• HDMI. When successfully set to HDMI, select this TV’s HDMI-input,
• as described in here on page 11 (Select Video Input).
HDMI cable (type A connector)
(not supplied)
HDMI - to - DVI adapter cable
(HDMI type A connector) (not supplied)
To HDMI output
Audio cable
(not supplied)
To DVI output
HDMI device
DVI device
NICAM AUTO
BASS 25
TREBLE 25
BALANCE 0
HDMI AUDIO HDMI
RESET
HDMI
Connection to other equipment
1. Connecting other units to your TV Caution. Before connecting:
• Make sure to disconnect the appliance from the power
supply in order to avoid any potential damage from occurring.
• Make sure to establish the required connection.
• Make sure that connections are properly and correctly
attached before connecting the appliances to the power supply.
Connect with Satellite receiver as shown below. Select the TV-Program at the satellite receiver. To do this, use the remote control of the satellite receiver. You cannot store the same station once again additionally in LCD-Monitor which already stored in satellite receiver.
Antenna
or
Satellite antenna
Note:
S-Video signals can be played back through the AV2 input (see page 57).
2. Connecting a DVD player
TV (Back side view)
Satellite receiver
VCR
DEC
TV
(All illustrated SCART cables and antenna cables are not supplied)
Decoder
(SCART cable, not supplied)
Video recorder
DVD Player
TV (Back side view)
TV (Back side view)
AV1
To ensure optimum picture quality, select RGB for the DVD player’s output signal (see Owner’s manual of the DVD player). AV1 SCART is compatible with RGB signal. Select AV1 input mode to view (see page 11).
AV2
R
ANT
DVD player
55
Page 34
Connection to other equipment
3. Connecting an audio system
You can supply the TV sound to the stereo equipment with the scart socket. Use a special scart cable for
the connection which sold at the accessory shop. (please consult your hi-fi instructions for details).
Note:
The Bass/Treble/Balance adjustments (see P.18) only function with the sound from the TV speakers - it does not affect the audio output sockets.
TV (Back side view)
(Scart-RCA cable,
not supplied)
Stereo amplifier
Audio input
Connection to other equipment
5. Connecting Video camera and Video recorder
Select the “MONITOR” option in the SETUP menu (see No.7 on page 58). Select the AV2 input mode (see page 11). You can see the playback picture from video camera. This signal is output via AV1 and can be recorded by video recorder. With this arrangement, Video recorder will record exactly what is shown on the screen.
Note:
• If you have a camcorder with S-video, use an S-video cable instead of a standard video cable. Do not connect both a standard video cable and an S-video cable at the same time, or the picture performance will be unacceptable.
• When you input the PAL-M signal to AV2 input, select AV COLOUR setting to AUTO, otherwise the monochrome images will be displayed.
TV (Back side view)
R
TV (Back side view)
(SCART cable, not supplied)
(S-VIDEO cable, not supplied)
(AV cable, not supplied)
Video camera to AV2
AV output
Video recorder to AV1
Recording
Playback
4. Connection of a digital amplifier or digital A/V receivers (with DTS or Dolby Digital Decoder)
DTS and Dolby Digital are two different systems. DTS-DVDs cannot be played with a Dolby Digital
receiver. Please use in this case a decoder that matches your DVDs.
Note:
In earlier years Dolby Digital was known as AC-3. Nowadays only the name has changed. To enjoy
• Dolby Digital you may still use your “old” AC-3 decoder. Also the commercially available AC-3 DVDs can still be played with any Dolby Digital DVD player.
TV (Back side view)
Audio digital cable
(not supplied)
A/V receiver with (AC-3) Dolby Digital decoder
After connecting a Dolby Digital decoder please select in the DVD menu the Dolby Digital (DD) sound track option.
Several DVDs may be pre-recorded on both sides however only one side contains the Dolby Digital sound track. Please insert the correct DVD side.
When a DTS sound track is played the integrated loudspeakers are mute. The DTS sound can only be played digitally using the digital outlet. DTS decoder is necessary for hearing.
Digital audio output is active only when receiving DVB-T, not when receiving analogue cable TV broadcasting.
56
Connection to other equipment
7. Setting of Scart socket
1
In , select AV1 OUTPUT, then press ENTER.
This determines whether the AV1 outputs the signal from the internal
2
tuner or whatever input is shown on the screen.
Press ϵ or ϶ to select TV or MONITOR.
TV: Outputs the last channel position selected. MONITOR: The picture displayed on TV-screen
Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
3
AV colour adjustment
The AV Colour setting only applies when viewing devices connected to the AV inputs.
1
In , select AV COLOUR, then press ENTER.
Press ϵ or ϶ to select AUTO.
2
If AUTO option does not work, press ϵ or ϶ to select
3
desired colour (e.g. NTSC 3.58).
Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.
4
Note:
PAL is the colour system used in Germany. NTSC 3.58 is used in the USA, PAL 60 used in Germany handled video recorders, which play NTSC video tape recording.
If the picture shows horizontal stripes:
Set to AUTO as the description above.
AV1 OUTPUT
AV COLOUR
REC SCREEN STATUS
RESET TV SETTING
TV
AV1 OUTPUT
AV COLOUR
REC SCREEN STATUS
RESET TV SETTING
AUTO
6. Connecting to a DVD player or other AV device with Component Video outputs
If your DVD player (or other device) has Component Video output jacks, use a suitable set of leads (RCA/
Phono) to connect these to the Component Video inputs on this TV as shown - it can greatly enhance the picture quality and performance. Please remember that you will also need to connect separate leads (RCA/Phono) for the audio signals. Select the COMPONENT input mode (see page 11).
TV (Back side view)
R
To COMPONENT IN
Note:
The Component Video input of this unit are for use with equipment which outputs interlaced signals (PAL:
• 576i/1080i or NTSC: 480i/1080i) and progressive signals (PAL: 576p/720p or NTSC: 480p/720p).
Audio cable (not supplied)
Video cable (not supplied)
Component output Audio output
YPbPr
DVD player
57
Status message
Information/Status
message
Invalid entry The channel does not exist. (e.g., “000“)
TV
AUTO
OFF
TV
AUTO
OFF
No radio services Cannot change to Radio mode because there is no radio service in
No TV services Cannot change to TV mode because there is no TV service in the
No services There are no services in the received signal. No subtitles There are no subtitles in the received signal. No video No audio The signal does not contain audio or video. Audio stream not available The Multi Audio Menu cannot be displayed because there is no
Descrambling not possible The ser vices for the selected channel are not available for this card. CI card initialized CI card is initializing. CAM module has been removed CAM module has been removed. (CAM is used for inserting the CI
Database empty There are no services in the TV. No signal There are no signal inputs. Locked service The service is locked with the channel organizer. Scrambled service The service is scrambled and unavailable. Digital Service Not available. Not Running Broadcasting has been suspended. HD service This service is for HD. New service added … A new ser vice has been added. Upgrading available service
details Duplicate carrier found The same signal has already been set. Invalid Stream Contains a video format that is not supported by this TV.
the channel list.
channel list.
sound.
card.)
Service information has been changed. The channel list is updating.
Cause
58
59
Page 35
Troubleshooting table
Please check the following list before requesting service.
Symptom Possible solution Page
TV
No picture, no sound Switch on the set.
No reception Have you tuned in the TV stations?
The TV switches off with missing antenna input signal
In
menu, the TUNING
option cannot be selected. Wrong Colours Colour and Brightness errors can occur when the viewing angle /
While viewing a DVB (digital) channel, there is sound but no picture.
Blocky image or image stops intermittently.
Some digital channels cannot be viewed.
“Database empty” message appears on the screen.
DVD
The playback picture has occasional distortion.
The unit does not start playback.
appears on the screen.
The LCD panel is a very high technology product, giving you fine picture details. Occasionally, a few nonactive pixels may appear on the screen as a fixed point of blue, green or red. Please note that this does not affect the performance of your product.
* This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual
property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
* Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.
*
* Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #: 5,451,942 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending.
DTS and DTS Digital Out are registered trademarks and the DTS logos and Symbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
* Unauthorized recording of copyrighted television programs, films, video cassettes and other materials may infringe
the rights of copyright owners and be contrary to copyright laws.
* DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license.
Check that the mains power outlet is properly connected. Select appropriate input mode. Unplug unit for 1 minute, then plug it back in.
Connect the antenna. Make sure the set is ON and not in Standby mode
This is normal. 15 minutes after the antenna signal has disappeared, the set will change to standby mode.
The unit is set to AV mode. Press 1 on the remote control. 11
ambient air temperature (see technical specifications) are exceeded. Some channel offers audio content only. It is normal.
Check all antenna connections. Move the antenna away from areas of possible interference. Try using an antenna booster.
Contact the service provider to subscribe.
Check all antenna connections and try auto tuning again. 9, 20
The disc is dirty. Eject the disc and clean it. Some times a small amount of picture distortion may appear. This is not a malfunction.
No disc is inserted. Insert a disc. An unplayable disc is inserted. Insert a playable disc (Check the disc type and colour system). Place the disc in the disc slot with the label side facing forward. The disc is dirty. Clean the disc. Cancel the parental lock function or change the parental lock level.
The function is prohibited with the unit or the disc. 34
10, 11
31, 32
50, 51
Specifications
Model 19DV555DG/19DV556DG 22DV555DG TV
6 9
11
9 9
14
9
32 31
32 31
System: Analogue: PAL UK, IR, CCIR, FRENCH System, B/G, D/K, I/I, L
Digital: DVB-T (OFDM 2k/8k 16QAM/64QAM)
Video Colour System: PAL/SECAM/NTSC 3.58/NTSC 4.43/PAL 60
Preset channels: Analogue channels (99) + Digital channels (Carrier 200/Service1000)
Frequency Range: Analogue: IreE2~E4, X~Z+2, S1~S10, E5~E12, S11~S41, E21~E69
LCD: 18.95” TYPE (48.14 cm visible)
HDMI input: HDMI compliant (type A connector)
Digital: E5~E12, ItaD~H2, Fra1~6, Rus6~12, E21~E69
TFT low-glass Active Matrix Colour LCD, 1440 x 900 Pixel
HDCP compliant Suggested scan rates: PAL: 576i/576p/720p/1080i NTSC: 480i/480p/720p/1080i PC Audio: 2-channel PCM, 32/44.1/48 kHz sampling frequency 16/20/24 bits per sample
22” TYPE (55.8 cm visible) TFT low-glass Active Matrix Colour LCD, 1680 x 1050 Pixel
Audio Output Power: approx. 1.5W (MAX) x 2
DVD
Signal system: NTSC, PAL (Region 2)
Applicable disc: DVD (12cm, 8cm), CD (12cm, 8cm)
Output: Audio : (RCA) –12.0 dBm, 1 k ǣ
Pickup: CD : Wavelength: 775 - 805 nm
Digital Audio : 0.5Vp-p/75 ǣ
Maximum output power: 0.5 mW DVD : Wavelength: 640 - 660 nm Maximum output power: 1.0 mW
GENERAL
Power Source: AC 220-240V, 50Hz
Power Consumption: Operation: approx. 60W at 230V,
50Hz Standby: approx. 1W at 230V, 50Hz
Operation: approx. 65W at 230V, 50Hz Standby: approx. 1W at 230V, 50Hz
Weight: 5.2 kg 6.2 kg
Dimensions: 47.2(W)x40.1(H)x20.7(D)cm 53.7(W)x44(H)x20.7(D)cm
Surrounding temperature:
Operation: 5°C ~ 40°C/Storage: –20°C ~ 60°C
ACCESSORIES
2 batteries (AAA/R03/UM-4)/Remote control unit/Aerial cable/AC cord
Weight and Dimensions are approximate. Because we continually strive to improve our products we may change specifications and designs without prior notice.
60
61
Page 36
SERVICING NOTICES ON CHECKING
1. KEEP THE NOTICES
As for the places which need special attentions, they are indicated with the labels or seals on the cabinet, chassis and parts. Make sure to keep the indications and notices in the operation manual.
2. AVOID AN ELECTRIC SHOCK
There is a high voltage part inside. Avoid an electric shock while the electric current is flowing.
3. USE THE DESIGNATED PARTS
The parts in this equipment have the specific characters of incombustibility and withstand voltage for safety. Therefore, the part which is replaced should be used the part which has the same character. Especially as to the important parts for safety which is indicated in the circuit diagram or the table of parts as a mark, the designated parts must be used.
4. BE CAREFUL WITH THE LCD PANEL
Avoid a shock to the panel while servicing. Take enough care to deal with it.
5. PUT PARTS AND WIRES IN THE ORIGINAL POSITION AFTER ASSEMBLING OR WIRING
There are parts which use the insulation material such as a tube or tape for safety, or which are assembled in the condition that these do not contact with the printed board. The inside wiring is designed not to get closer to the pyrogenic parts and high voltage parts. Therefore, put these parts in the original positions.
PERFORM A SAFETY CHECK AFTER
6. SERVICING
Confirm that the screws, parts and wiring which were removed in order to service are put in the original positions, or whether there are the portions which are deteriorated around the serviced places serviced or not. Check the insulation between the antenna terminal or external metal and the AC cord plug blades. And be sure the safety of that.
(INSULATION CHECK PROCEDURE)
1.
Unplug the plug from the AC outlet.
2.
Remove the antenna terminal on TV and turn on the TV.
3.
Insulation resistance between the cord plug terminals and the eternal exposure metal [Note 2] should be more than 1M ohm by using the 500V insulation resistance meter [Note 1].
4.
If the insulation resistance is less than 1M ohm, the inspection repair should be required.
[Note 1]
If you have not the 500V insulation resistance meter, use a Tester.
[Note 2]
External exposure metal: Antenna terminal
Headphone jack
HOW TO ORDER PARTS
Please include the following informations when you order parts. (Particularly the VERSION LETTER.)
1. MODEL NUMBER and VERSION LETTER The MODEL NUMBER can be found on the back of each product and the VERSION LETTER can be
found at the end of the SERIAL NUMBER.
2. PART NO. and DESCRIPTION You can find it in your SERVICE MANUAL.
IMPORTANT
When you exchange IC and Transistor with a heat sink, apply silicon grease on the contact section of the heat sink. Before applying new silicon grease, remove all the old silicon grease. (Old grease may cause damage to the IC and Transistor).
A1-1
19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG
Page 37
WHEN REPLACING DVD DECK
[ When removing the DVD Deck ]
Before removing Pick Up PCB and DVD MT PCB connector, short circuit the position shown in Fig. 1 using a soldering iron. If you remove the DVD Deck with no soldering, the Laser may be damaged.
[ When installing the DVD Deck ]
Remove all the soldering on the short circuit position after the connection of Pick Up PCB and DVD MT PCB connector.
NOTE
Before your operation, please read "REPARATION OF SERVICING".
• Use the Lead Free solder.
• Manual soldering conditions
• Soldering temperature: 320 ± 20
• Soldering time: Within 3 seconds
• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu
• When Soldering/Removing of solder, use the draw in equipment over the Pick Up Unit to keep the Flux smoke away from it.
Circuit bridge points
o
C
Fig.1
Pick Up PCB
A1-2
19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG
Page 38
DISC REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY
1.
Remove the Back Cabinet and Angle Deck. (Refer to item 1 of the DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS.)
2.
Slide the Belt Loading toward the arrow direction by hand to release the lock. (Refer to Fig. 1)
3.
Take out the Disc from the DVD Deck. Be careful not to scratch on the Disc.
DVD Deck
Belt Loading
Fig. 1
PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL
4 DIGIT PASSWORD CANCELLATION
If the stored 4 digit password in the Rating Level menu needs to be cancelled, please follow the steps below.
Turn Unit ON.
1. Set the DVD to the Stop Mode.
2. Check that “No disc” is displayed on the screen.
3. Press and hold the “STOP” button on the side panel.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the “7” key on the remote control unit.
5. Hold both keys for more than 2 seconds.
6. The On Screen Display message “PASSWORD CLEAR” will appear.
7. The 4 digit password has now been cleared.
8.
TRAY LOCK
The disk cannot be taken out by setting the Tray Lock, please follow the steps below.
1.
Turn Unit ON.
2.
Set the DVD to the Stop Mode.
3.
Press it in order of “SETUP”, “SUBTITLE”, “3”, “AUDIO SELECT” and “0” key of a remote control unit.
4.
The On Screen Display message “
5.
The Tray Lock has now been set up.
will appear.
To unlock the Tray Lock, please follow the steps below.
1.
Turn Unit ON.
2.
Set the DVD to the Stop Mode.
3.
Press it in order of “SETUP”, “SUBTITLE”, “3”, “AUDIO SELECT” and “0” key of a remote control unit.
4.
The On Screen Display message “
5.
The Tray Lock has now been cleared.
will appear.
A1-3 19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG
Page 39
18
22
38
6
12
35
50
2
42
46
9
15
25
28
31
17
32
34
49
11
21
37
45
53
1
5
14
41
REMOTE CONTROL KEY CODE
NEC Format Custom Code : 40-BF H, 44-BB H, 45-BA H, 45-BC H
No. Key Name Custom Code Key Code
1 EJECT 45 BA F5
4
3
7
33
36
40
44
48
52
10
13
16 19
20
24
23
26
27
29
30
39
43
47
51
54
8
2 TV/DVD 45 BC B3 3 TV/DTV 40 BF 44 4 POWER 40 BF 12 5 1 40 BF 01 6 2 40 BF 02 7 3 40 BF 03 8 4 40 BF 04
9 5 40 BF 05 10 6 40 BF 06 11 7 40 BF 07 12 8 40 BF 08 13 9 40 BF 09 14 DISPLAY 40 BF 1C 15 0 40 BF 00 16 MUTE 40 BF 10 17 TV/RADIO 40 BF 47 18 CH/PAGE 40 BF 3E 19 VOLUME + 40 BF 1A 20 DVD MENU 40 BF 19 21 INPUT 40 BF 0F 22 CH/PAGE 40 BF 3F 23 VOLUME - 40 BF 1E 24 TOP MENU 44 BB DF 25 DIGITAL MENU 40 BF 0A 26 GUIDE (EPG) 40 BF 45 27 CH/PAGE 44 BB 80 28 LEFT 44 BB 51 29 ENTER/CHANNEL LIST 40 BF 3D 30 RIGHT 44 BB 4D 31 CH/PAGE 44 BB 81 32 MENU/SETUP 40 BF 0E 33 EXIT/CANCEL 44 BB EF 34 RETURN 44 BB 5D 35 PLAY 44 BB 15 36 STOP 44 BB 14 37 SKIP- /HOLD 45 BA 23 38 REVEAL / SEARCH- 45 BA 19 39 SUB PAGE / SEARCH+ 45 BA 13 40 F/T/B / SKIP+ 45 BA 24 41 RED / SLOW- 45 BA 0E 42 GREEN / PAUSE 45 BA 15 43 YELLOW / PLAY MODE 45 BA E0 44 BLUE / SLOW+ 45 BA 0D 45 MARKER 45 BA EC 46 ANGLE 44 BB 96 47 REPEAT A-B 44 BB 5C 48 TEXT/TV 45 BA 79 49 SUBTITLE 44 BB 87
50 AUDIO SELECT 44 BB 53
51 ZOOM/CH RTN 45 BA 40 52 JUMP 44 BB 9B 53 PICTURE SIZE 40 BF 59 54 SLEEP 40 BF 15
A1-4 19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG
Page 40
HOTEL MODE FUNCTION
To set the Hotel mode, please follow the steps below.
1.
In power on mode, set the VOLUME to minimum.
2.
Press and hold the VOLUME DOWN button on the side panel.
3.
Simultaneously press and hold the channel button (7) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.
4.
The Hotel mode setting menu will appear.
5.
Using the UP/DOWN button on the remote control, select the desired item. Then press the ENTER button.
6.
Using the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control, set the item to desired setting.
7.
The Hotel mode has now been set up.
To reset the Hotel mode, please follow the steps below.
1.
In power on mode, set the VOLUME to minimum.
2.
Press and hold the VOLUME DOWN button on the side panel.
3.
Simultaneously press and hold the channel button (7) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.
4.
The Hotel mode setting menu will appear.
5.
Using the UP/DOWN button on the remote control, select the RESET. Then press the ENTER button.
6.
The setting items has now been returned to initial value.
Adjust Setting
Maximum volume Volume fixed Volume fixe level RC button Panel button Menu button On Screen Display Input mode start Input mode fixed Reset
EXIT : END
HOTEL MODE
MA X I MU M VO L U ME 5 0
RC BUT TON
PANEL BUTTON
MENU BUT TON
INPUT MODE START
RESET
50
Off Variable 50 Variable 20 Respond Respond Respond Yes Normal Variable Yes
RESPOND
RESPOND
RESPOND
OFF
Setting item
Maximum volume
RC button
Panel button
Menu button
Input mode start
Reset
Note 1)
Even if setting it to “No Respond”, the remote control key operation in Hotel mode and service mode function are
effective. Note 2) Note 3)
Even if setting it to “No Respond”, the service mode function are effective.
If setting it to “OFF”, it start up in same input source when you turn off the power before.
Setting value
0~50
RESPOND/
NO RESPOND
1~99ch/DTV/AV1/ AV2/COMPO­NENT/HDMI/PC/
OFF
DVD/
Initial value
50
RESPOND
OFF
FUNCTION
Setting of the maximum volume value.
Effective/invalid setting of remote control key operation. (*Note 1)
Effective/invalid setting of main key operation. (*Note 2)
Effective/invalid setting of Menu key operation of set and remote control. (*Note 2)
Setting of input source at power supply On. (*Note 3)
Various settings of the Hotel mode function return initial State.
A1-5 19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG
Page 41
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G-1 TV LCD LCD Size / Visual Size 18.95 inch / 481.4mmV
System LCD Type Color TFT LCD
Color System PAL / SECAM Speaker 2 Speaker
Sound Output MAX 1.5W + 1.5W
G-2 DVD System Color System NTSC, PAL
G-3 Tuning
System Tuner and System 1Tuner (Analog+Digital)
G-4 Signal Video Signal Input Level 1 V p-p/75 ohm
G-5 Power Power Source AC 220-240V AC 50Hz
G-6 Regulation Safety CE(EN60065:2002)
G-7 Temperature Operation
G-8 Operating Humidity Less than 80% RH G-9 OSD Language (TV) English, Spanish, German, French, Italian,
NTSC3.58+4.43 /PAL60Hz Yes
Disc
Disc Diameter 120 mm , 80 mm Drive DSM-2 Search speed Fwd 4 step
Slow speed Fwd 1/7 -1/2 times
Broadcasting System Analog
Receive CH Destination UK, I.R., CCIR Hyper+France CATV CH Coverage Analog IreE2~E4, X~Z+2, S1~S10, E5~E12,S11~S41,E21~E69
Intermediate Analog
Frequency Picture(FP) 38.9 / 38.9 / 38.9 / 33.9MHz
Digital Auto Tuning Method Preset CH Analog 99
Stereo/Dual TV Sound Nicam/A2 Dual Tuner Sound Muting Yes
RGB Signal Output Level -­Audio Signal Input Level -8.0dBm/50k ohm
Power Consumption at AC 60 W at AC 230 V 50 Hz
Stand by (at AC) w/ EPG Timer 5 W at 230V 50Hz
Protector Power Fuse Yes
Number of Pixels 1440(H) x 900(V)
View Range Left/Right 80/80 degree
Bright Dot Zero Bright Dot Ratio --
Position Front Size 1.5 x 2.8 inch Impedance 8 ohm
10%(Typical) ---
Rev 4 step
Rev 1/7 -1/2 times
Digital
Digital E5~E12, ItaD~H2, Fra1~6, Rus6~12, E21~E69
Sound(FS) FP-FS
Digital Carrier 200 / Service 1000
Output Level 1 V p-p/75 ohm S/N Ratio (Weighted) 65dB Horizontal Resolution at DVD Mode 400 Lines
Output Level at DVD -12.0dBm/1k ohm (-20dBFs 0dBFs=2.0Vrms)
Digital Output Level 0.5 V p-p/75 ohm S/N Ratio at DVD (Weighted) 85dB Harmonic Distortion 0.02% (1KHz) Frequency Response : at DVD 4Hz - 22kHz
DC ---
w/o EPG Timer 1 W at 230V 50Hz Per Year -- kWh/Year
Radiation CE X-Radiation ---
Storage Space Around Unit 100 mm(4inch)
(DVD) English, Spanish, German, French, Italian
Up/Down 80/80 degree
Actual 2-45 times (DVD/Video CD)
Actual 2-45 times (DVD/Video CD)
Actual --
Actual --
at TV -8 dBm/1k ohm (0dBm=0.775Vrms)
at Video CD 4Hz - 20kHz
at SVCD --
at CD 4Hz - 20kHz
at DC --
<
n 0 (Sorted Products)
=
DVD, CD-DA, CD-
4-40 times (CD)
4-40 times (CD)
U.K., I.R., CCIR, FRENCH System B/G, D/K, I/I, L
DVB-T (OFDM 2k/8k 16QAM/64QAM)
BG / II / DK, L / L' (SECAM VL)
33.4 / 32.9 / 32.4 / 40.4MHz
5.5 / 6.0 / 6.5 / 6.5MHz
36.167MHz ALL Band (Not C.C.I.R. CH Plan)
o
+5
C ~ +40oC
o
C ~ +60oC
-20
Swedish, Dutch, Russian, Portuguese, Turkish, Greek, Finnish, Polish, Danish, Norwegian
A2-1
19DV555DB
Page 42
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G-10 Clock and Sleep Timer Max Time 120 Min
Timer Step 10 Min
On/Off Timer Program(On Timer / Off Timer) -- Program Wake Up Timer No Timer Back-up (at Power Off Mode) more than -- Min Sec
G-11 Remote Unit RC-QJ
Control Glow in Dark Remocon No
Remocon Format TOSHIBA Format TOSHIBA Custom Code 40-BF h ,44-BB h ,45-BA h ,45-BC h Power Source Voltage(D.C) 3V
UM size x pcs UM-4 x 2 pcs Total Keys 54 Keys Keys Power (Stand By) Yes
Information/(Display) Yes
Analog Menu / Setup Yes
Digital Menu Yes
Input Select Yes
ATV/DTV Yes
Guide/(EPG) Yes
Picture Size Yes
1Yes
2Yes
3Yes
4Yes
5Yes
6Yes
7Yes
8Yes
9Yes
0Yes
Sleep Yes
Mute Yes
Volume Up Yes
Volume Down Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Enter / CH List Yes Exit / Cancel Yes Freeze frame No TV/Radio Yes Subtitle Yes Play Yes Stop Yes Eject Yes TV / DVD Yes Return Yes DVD Menu Yes Top Menu Yes Marker Yes Angle Yes Repeat A-B Yes Audio Select Yes CH RTN(Quick View) / Zoom Yes Jump Yes
T'TEXT Keys TEXT / TV Yes
HOLD / Skip- Yes Reveal / Search- Yes Sub Page / Search+ Yes F.T.B / Skip+ Yes Red / Slow- Yes Green / Pause Yes Yellow / Play Mode Yes Cyan / Slow+ Yes CH Up / Page Up Yes CH Down / Page Down Yes
G-12 Features Power On Memory Yes
Auto Shut Off Yes Just Clock Function No Game Position No DNR Yes
3D
Comb Filter Yes
3D
Auto Set Up (Fast installation) Auto tuning (Analog tuner) Yes
CH sort Yes
ATS Yes Auto clock (Analog tuner) No Plug in start Yes
Picture Setting(TV) Picture Preference Yes
Brightness , Contrast , Color Yes Tint Yes
A2-2
19DV555DB
Page 43
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Sharpness Yes DNR No Color Temperature Yes Blue Back Yes Backlight Control Yes
Picture Setting(PC) BRIGHTNESS , CONTRAST Yes
Audio Nicam Yes
Tuning Auto Tuning Yes
Lock (Analog) Panel Lock No
Screen Saver
Black Side Panel No CH Label Yes T'Text Yes
Wide Mode (AUTO/4:3/FULL SCREEN/16:9/CINEMA/14:9) Yes Reset TV Setting Yes HD Zoom Picture Scroll (Vertical Position) Yes PFC(Power Factor circuit) No Freeze frame No HD-Ready Yes Plug and Play No Scart Spec Scart1 AV in Yes
Scart2 AV in No
Digital Text (VBI teletext) MHEG-5 MHP EPG (BBC type 8Days Digital tuner only) OAD (Over Air Download) Common Interface (Digital tuner only) Rec Screen Status Ch sorting based on Ch List (Digital/Germany only) Rename Carrier (Digital) Edit Event Timer Software Update via CI Slot Preference Language (Audio/Subtitle/Digital Service)(Digital) Ch Organizer (Lock, Skip, Go To, Delete, Rename, Move, Move to) Parental Lock (Digital) Time Setup DVB Subtitle (Digital)
PC Monitor Input Yes
HDMI Input Yes
Film Mode No
HOR POSITION , VER POSITION Yes PHASE , CLOCK Yes AUTO ADJUST No RED , GREEN , BLUE Yes Backlight Yes WXGA INPUT Yes WVGA INPUT No
Tone Control (Bass/Treble/Balance) Yes Surround No BBE No SRS WOW (SRS 3D/Focus/Tru Bass) No Variable Audio Out No
Manual Tuning Yes CH Allocation Yes
Channel Lock No Hotel Lock Yes Inversion No Full White No Screen Saver No Static Image No
Text type Fastext / Toptext Text Language English , French, Swedish, Hungarian
Turkish, German, Portuguese, Spanish, Italian, Greek, Slovakian, Russian, Polish, Czech, Rumanian, Estonian, Lettish, Lithuanian, Ukrainian, Croatian, Slovenian, Latvian
No
AV out Yes (A.Tuner/D.Tuner/Monitor) S-Video in No RGB in Yes
AV out No S-Video in No RGB in No
Yes Yes
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
VGA (640x480) Yes (60Hz) VGA (720x400) No WVGA (848x480) No SVGA (800x600) Yes (60Hz) XGA (1024x768) Yes (60Hz) WXGA (1280x768) Yes (60Hz) WXGA (1280x720) Yes (60Hz) WXGA (1360x768) Yes (60Hz) SXGA (1280x1024) No
VGA (640×480) Yes (60Hz)
A2-3
19DV555DB
Page 44
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
720×480i (4:3) Yes (60Hz) 720×480i (16:9) Yes (60Hz) 720×480p (4:3) Yes (60Hz) 720×480p (16:9) Yes (60Hz) 720×576i (4:3) Yes (50Hz) 720×576i (16:9) Yes (50Hz) 720×576p (4:3) Yes (50Hz) 720×576p (16:9) Yes (50Hz) 1280×720p Yes (50/60Hz) 1920×1080i Yes (50/60Hz)
Component Input Yes
720×480i (4:3) Yes (60Hz) 720×480i (16:9) Yes (60Hz) 720×480p (4:3) Yes (60Hz) 720×480p (16:9) Yes (60Hz) 720×576i (4:3) Yes (50Hz) 720×576i (16:9) Yes (50Hz) 720×576p (4:3) Yes (50Hz) 720×576p (16:9) Yes (50Hz) 1280×720p Yes (50/60Hz) 1920×1080i Yes (50/60Hz)
Wall Mount Size W x H(mm) Yes (100 x 100)
Screw Size M4 x 10
Features Tray Lock Yes (DVD) WMA No
JPEG Yes Video CD Playback Yes SVCD Playback MP3 Playback Yes Divx Playback Yes
DMF Support No
Digital Out (Dolby Digital) Yes
(MPEG) Yes (PCM) Yes (DTS) Yes
Down Mix Out (Dolby Digital) Yes
(DTS) No 3D Surround No Closed Caption No Screen Saver No Audio DAC 192kHz / 24bit
G-13 Accessories Owner's Manual Language English
w/Guarantee Card Remote Control Unit Yes Rod Antenna No
Poles -
Terminal ­Loop Antenna (W/ Antenna Change Plug) No
Terminal ­U/V Mixer No DC Car Cord (Center+) No Guarantee Card No Warning Sheet No Registration Card Yes Circuit Diagram No Antenna Change Plug No Service Facility List No Important Safeguard No Dew/AHC Caution Sheet No Quick Set-up Sheet Yes My Movie stream (Free DVD redemption voucher) No Carbon Neutral Certificate No Battery Yes
UM size x pcs UM-4 x 2 pcs
OEM Brand No AC Adapter No AC Cord (for AC Adapter) No AC Cord Yes AV Cord (2Pin-1Pin) No RF Cable Yes HDMI-DVI Cable No Helpline Sheet Yes 300 ohm to 75 ohm Antenna Adapter No
G-14 Interface Switch Side Power (Tact) Yes
System Select No
Main Power SW No
Channel Up / Play / Menu Up Yes
Channel Down / STOP / Menu Down Yes
Volume Up / Menu> Yes
Volume Down / Menu< Yes
Play No (CH+ Alternative)
Eject Yes
Skip+, Search+ No
Skip-, Search- No
A2-4
No
No
19DV555DB
Page 45
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Stop No (CH- Alternative)
Input Select / Enter Yes
Indicator Power/Stand-by/EPG Timer Yes(GREEN / RED / ORANGE)
Terminals Side CI Card Slot Yes
Rear Video Input 1
G-15 Set Size Approx. W x D x H (mm) 472 x 207 x 401
G-16 Weight Net Approx. 5.2kg (11.5 lbs)
G-17 Carton Master Carton No
Gift Box Yes
Drop Test '6 Surfaces
Container Stuffing 1088 w/Pallet Yes w/Wrapping Yes
G-18 Material Cabinet Cabinet Front PC+ABS 94V0 NON-HALOGEN
PCB Non-Halogen No
G-19 Environment Environmental standard requirement Green procurement of TOSHIBA
Pb- Free Phase3(PHASE3A)
WEEE Yes
Menu Yes
On Timer No
Audio Input 1
S- Input 1 Yes (AV2)
Video Input 2 No
Audio Input 2 No
S- Input 2 No
Video Output No
Audio Output No
Digital Audio Out (Coaxial)
Component In
Audio Input (Component In use)
Sub Woofer Output No
Diversity No
Ext Speaker No
DC Jack 12V(Center +) No
Other Terminal Headphone
VHF/UHF Antenna Input
AC Inlet
Euro Scart (21Pin)
PC Monitor Input (D-Sub)
Audio Input
HDMI Input 1
Audio Input (HDMI/DVI In use) PC Monitor Audio Input Alternative
HDMI Input 2 No
Audio Input (HDMI/DVI In use) No
w/o Stand,Handle Approx. W x D x H (mm)
Net w/o Stand,Handle Approx. 4.5kg ' (9.9 lbs)
Gross Approx. 6.9kg (15.2 lbs)
Content ---- Sets
Material -- /--
Dimensions W x D x H(mm) -- x -- x --
Description of Origin No
Material Double/Full Color
Dimensions W x D x H(mm) 558 x 565 x 181
W/Handle Yes
W/Color Photo Label No
Description of Origin Yes
Height (cm) 80
Cabinet Rear PS 94V0 NON-DECABROM
Eyelet Yes
Measures for Whisker Yes
RCA x 1 (AV2) RCA x 2(L/MONO, R) (AV2)
Yes Yes RCA x 2(L/MONO, R)
DIN Type Yes 1Scart (AV1) Yes Mini Pin Jack( 3.5), STEREO Yes
472 x 67 x 364
Sets/40' container
A2-5
19DV555DB
Page 46
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G-1 TV
System
G-2 DVD System
G-3 Tuning Broadcasting System Analog
System
G-4 Signal
G-5 Power
G-6 Regulation
G-7 Temperature
G-8 Operating Humidity G-9 OSD Language
LCD LCD Size / Visual Size 18.95 inch / 481.4mmV
Color System PAL / SECAM Speaker 2 Speaker
Sound Output MAX 1.5W + 1.5W
NTSC3.58+4.43 /PAL60Hz Yes Color System NTSC, PAL Disc
Disc Diameter 120 mm , 80 mm Drive DSM-2 Search speed Fwd 4 step
Slow speed Fwd 1/7 -1/2 times
Tuner and System 1Tuner (Analog+Digital) Receive CH Destination UK, I.R., CCIR Hyper+France CATV CH Coverage Analog IreE2~E4, X~Z+2, S1~S10, E5~E12,S11~S41,E21~E69
Intermediate Analog
Frequency Picture(FP) 38.9 / 38.9 / 38.9 / 33.9MHz
Auto Tuning Method Preset CH Analog 99
Stereo/Dual TV Sound Nicam/A2 Dual Tuner Sound Muting Yes Video Signal Input Level 1 V p-p/75 ohm
RGB Signal Output Level -­Audio Signal Input Level -8.0dBm/50k ohm
Power Source AC 220-240V AC 50Hz
Power Consumption at AC 60 W at AC 230 V 50 Hz
Protector Power Fuse Yes
Digital
Stand by (at AC) w/ EPG Timer 5 W at 230V 50Hz
LCD Type Color TFT LCD Number of Pixels 1440(H) x 900(V)
View Range Left/Right 80/80 degree
Bright Dot Zero Bright Dot Ratio --
Position Front Size 1.5 x 2.8 inch Impedance 8 ohm
10%(Typical) ---
Rev 4 step
Rev 1/7 -1/2 times
Digital
Digital E5~E12, ItaD~H2, Fra1~6, Rus6~12, E21~E69
Sound(FS) FP-FS
Digital Carrier 200 / Service 1000
Output Level 1 V p-p/75 ohm S/N Ratio (Weighted) 65dB Horizontal Resolution at DVD Mode 400 Lines
Output Level at DVD -12.0dBm/1k ohm (-20dBFs 0dBFs=2.0Vrms)
Digital Output Level 0.5 V p-p/75 ohm S/N Ratio at DVD (Weighted) 85dB Harmonic Distortion 0.02% (1KHz) Frequency Response : at DVD 4Hz - 22kHz
DC ---
w/o EPG Timer 1 W at 230V 50Hz Per Year -- kWh/Year
Safety CE(EN60065:2002) Radiation CE X-Radiation --­Operation Storage Space Around Unit 100 mm(4inch)
(TV) English, Spanish, German, French, Italian,
(DVD) English, Spanish, German, French, Italian
Up/Down 80/80 degree
Actual 2-45 times (DVD/Video CD)
Actual 2-45 times (DVD/Video CD)
Actual --
Actual --
at TV -8 dBm/1k ohm (0dBm=0.775Vrms)
at Video CD 4Hz - 20kHz
at SVCD --
at CD 4Hz - 20kHz
at DC --
<
n 0 (Sorted Products)
=
DVD, CD-DA, CD-
4-40 times (CD)
4-40 times (CD)
U.K., I.R., CCIR, FRENCH System B/G, D/K, I/I, L DVB-T (OFDM 2k/8k 16QAM/64QAM)
BG / II / DK, L / L' (SECAM VL)
33.4 / 32.9 / 32.4 / 40.4MHz
5.5 / 6.0 / 6.5 / 6.5MHz
36.167MHz ALL Band (Not C.C.I.R. CH Plan)
o
C ~ +40oC
+5
o
-20
C ~ +60oC
Less than 80% RH
Swedish, Dutch, Russian, Portuguese, Turkish, Greek, Finnish, Polish, Danish, Norwegian
A2-6 19DV555DG
Page 47
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G-10 Clock and
Timer
G-11 Remote
Control
G-12 Features
Sleep Timer Max Time 120 Min
Step 10 Min On/Off Timer Program(On Timer / Off Timer) -- Program Wake Up Timer No Timer Back-up (at Power Off Mode) more than -- Min Sec Unit RC-QJ Glow in Dark Remocon No Remocon Format TOSHIBA Format TOSHIBA Custom Code 40-BF h ,44-BB h ,45-BA h ,45-BC h Power Source Voltage(D.C) 3V
UM size x pcs UM-4 x 2 pcs Total Keys 54 Keys Keys Power (Stand By) Yes
Information/(Display) Yes
Analog Menu / Setup Yes
Digital Menu Yes
Input Select Yes
ATV/DTV Yes
Guide/(EPG) Yes
Picture Size Yes
1 Yes
2 Yes
3 Yes
4 Yes
5 Yes
6 Yes
7 Yes
8 Yes
9 Yes
0 Yes
Sleep Yes
Mute Yes
Volume Up Yes
Volume Down Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Enter / CH List Yes Exit / Cancel Yes Freeze frame No TV/Radio Yes Subtitle Yes Play Yes Stop Yes Eject Yes TV / DVD Yes Return Yes DVD Menu Yes Top Menu Yes Marker Yes Angle Yes Repeat A-B Yes Audio Select Yes CH RTN(Quick View) / Zoom Yes Jump Yes
T'TEXT Keys TEXT / TV Yes
HOLD / Skip- Yes Reveal / Search- Yes Sub Page / Search+ Yes F.T.B / Skip+ Yes Red / Slow- Yes Green / Pause Yes Yellow / Play Mode Yes Cyan / Slow+ Yes CH Up / Page Up Yes CH Down / Page Down Yes
Power On Memory Yes Auto Shut Off Yes Just Clock Function No Game Position No DNR Yes
3D
Comb Filter Yes
3D
Auto Set Up (Fast installation) Auto tuning (Analog tuner) Yes
CH sort Yes
ATS Yes Auto clock (Analog tuner) No Plug in start Yes
Picture Setting(TV) Picture Preference Yes
Brightness , Contrast , Color Yes Tint Yes Sharpness Yes DNR No Color Temperature Yes Blue Back Yes Backlight Control Yes
A2-7 19DV555DG
Page 48
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Picture Setting(PC) BRIGHTNESS , CONTRAST Yes
Audio Nicam Yes
Tuning Auto Tuning Yes
Lock (Analog) Panel Lock No
Screen Saver
Black Side Panel No CH Label Yes T'Text Yes
Wide Mode (AUTO/4:3/FULL SCREEN/16:9/CINEMA/14:9) Yes Reset TV Setting Yes HD Zoom Picture Scroll (Vertical Position) Yes PFC(Power Factor circuit) No Freeze frame No HD-Ready Yes Plug and Play No Scart Spec Scart1 AV in Yes
Scart2 AV in No
Digital Text (VBI teletext) MHEG-5 MHP EPG (BBC type 8Days Digital tuner only) OAD (Over Air Download) Common Interface (Digital tuner only) Rec Screen Status Ch sorting based on Ch List (Digital/Germany only) Rename Carrier (Digital) Edit Event Timer Software Update via CI Slot Preference Language (Audio/Subtitle/Digital Service)(Digital) Ch Organizer (Lock, Skip, Go To, Delete, Rename, Move, Move to) Parental Lock (Digital) Time Setup DVB Subtitle (Digital)
PC Monitor Input Yes
HDMI Input Yes
Film Mode No
HOR POSITION , VER POSITION Yes PHASE , CLOCK Yes AUTO ADJUST No RED , GREEN , BLUE Yes Backlight Yes WXGA INPUT Yes WVGA INPUT No
Tone Control (Bass/Treble/Balance) Yes Surround No BBE No SRS WOW (SRS 3D/Focus/Tru Bass) No Variable Audio Out No
Manual Tuning Y es CH Allocation Yes
Channel Lock No Hotel Lock Yes Inversion No Full White No Screen Saver No Static Image No
Text type Fastext / Toptext Text Language English , French, Swedish, Hungarian
Turkish, German, Portuguese, Spanish, Italian, Greek, Slovakian, Russian, Polish, Czech, Rumanian, Estonian, Lettish, Lithuanian, Ukrainian, Croatian, Slovenian, Latvian
AV out Yes (A.Tuner/D.Tuner/Monitor) S-Video in No RGB in Yes
AV out No S-Video in No RGB in No
Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
VGA (640x480) Yes (60Hz) VGA (720x400) No WVGA (848x480) No SVGA (800x600) Yes (60Hz) XGA (1024x768) Yes (60Hz) WXGA (1280x768) Yes (60Hz) WXGA (1280x720) Yes (60Hz) WXGA (1360x768) Yes (60Hz) SXGA (1280x1024) No
VGA (640×480) Yes (60Hz) 720×480i (4:3) Yes (60Hz) 720×480i (16:9) Yes (60Hz) 720×480p (4:3) Yes (60Hz) 720×480p (16:9) Yes (60Hz) 720×576i (4:3) Yes (50Hz) 720×576i (16:9) Yes (50Hz) 720×576p (4:3) Yes (50Hz) 720×576p (16:9) Yes (50Hz) 1280×720p Yes (50/60Hz) 1920×1080i Yes (50/60Hz)
A2-8 19DV555DG
No
No
Page 49
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Features (DVD)
G-13 Accessories
G-14 Interface
Component Input Yes
Wall Mount Size W x H(mm) Yes (100 x 100)
Tray Lock Yes WMA No JPEG Yes Video CD Playback Yes SVCD Playback MP3 Playback Yes Divx Playback Yes
Digital Out (Dolby Digital) Yes
Down Mix Out (Dolby Digital) Yes
3D Surround No Closed Caption No Screen Saver No Audio DAC 192kHz / 24bit Owner's Manual (Full) Language English, French, German
(Simplified) Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Danish, Norwegian, Swedish,
Remote Control Unit Yes Rod Antenna No
Loop Antenna (W/ Antenna Change Plug) No
U/V Mixer No DC Car Cord (Center+) No Guarantee Card No Warning Sheet No Circuit Diagram No Antenna Change Plug No Service Facility List No Important Safeguard No Dew/AHC Caution Sheet No Quick Set-up Sheet Yes My Movie stream (Free DVD redemption voucher) No Carbon Neutral Certificate No Battery Yes
AC Adapter AC Cord (for AC Adapter) No AC Cord Yes AV Cord (2Pin-1Pin) No RF Cable Yes HDMI-DVI Cable No Helpline Sheet No 300 ohm to 75 ohm Antenna Adapter No Switch Side Power (Tact) Yes
Indicator Power/Stand-by/EPG Timer Yes(GREEN / RED / ORANGE)
Terminals Side CI Card Slot Yes
Rear Video Input 1
720×480i (4:3) Yes (60Hz) 720×480i (16:9) Yes (60Hz) 720×480p (4:3) Yes (60Hz) 720×480p (16:9) Yes (60Hz) 720×576i (4:3) Yes (50Hz) 720×576i (16:9) Yes (50Hz) 720×576p (4:3) Yes (50Hz) 720×576p (16:9) Yes (50Hz) 1280×720p Yes (50/60Hz) 1920×1080i Yes (50/60Hz)
Screw Size M4 x 10
No
DMF Support No
(MPEG) Yes (PCM) Yes (DTS) Yes
(DTS) No
w/Guarantee Card
Poles ­Terminal -
Terminal -
UM size x pcs UM-4 x 2 pcs OEM Brand No
System Select No Main Power SW No Channel Up / Play / Menu Up Yes Channel Down / STOP / Menu Down Yes Volume Up / Menu> Yes Volume Down / Menu< Yes Play No (CH+ Alternative) Eject Yes Skip+, Search+ No Skip-, Search- No Stop No (CH- Alternative) Input Select / Enter Yes Menu Yes
On Timer No
Audio Input 1 S- Input 1 Yes (AV2) Video Input 2 No Audio Input 2 No S- Input 2 No Video Output No Audio Output No
Finnish, Czech, Greek
No
No
RCA x 1 (AV2) RCA x 2(L/MONO, R) (AV2)
A2-9 19DV555DG
Page 50
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
(
G-15 Set Size
G-16 Weight
G-17 Carton
G-18 Material
G-19 Environment
Digital Audio Out (Coaxial) Component In Audio Input (Component In use) Sub Woofer Output No Diversity No Ext Speaker No DC Jack 12V(Center +) No Other Terminal Headphone VHF/UHF Antenna Input AC Inlet Euro Scart (21Pin) PC Monitor Input (D-Sub) Audio Input HDMI Input 1 Audio Input (HDMI/DVI In use) PC Monitor Audio Input Alternative HDMI Input 2 No Audio Input (HDMI/DVI In use) No Approx. W x D x H (mm) 472 x 207 x 401
w/o Stand,Handle Approx. W x D x H (mm)
Net Approx. 5.2kg (11.5 lbs) Net w/o Stand,Handle Approx. 4.5kg ' (9.9 lbs)
Master Carton
Gift Box Yes
Drop Test '6 Surfaces
Container Stuffing 1088 w/Pallet Yes w/Wrapping Yes Cabinet Cabinet Front PC+ABS 94V0 NON-HALOGEN
PCB Non-Halogen
Environmental standard requirement Green procurement of TOSHIBA Pb- Free Phase3(PHASE3A)
WEEE
Gross Approx. 6.9kg (15.2 lbs)
Content ---- Sets Material -- /-­Dimensions W x D x H(mm) -- x -- x -­Description of Origin No
Material Double/Full Color Dimensions W x D x H(mm) 558 x 565 x 181 W/Handle Yes W/Color Photo Label No Description of Origin Yes
Height (cm) 80
Cabinet Rear PS 94V0 NON-DECABROM
Eyelet Yes
Measures for Whisker Yes
Yes Yes RCA x 2(L/MONO, R)
DIN Type Yes 1Scart (AV1) Yes Mini Pin Jack Yes
472 x 67 x 364
Yes
3.5), STEREO
No
Sets/40' container
No
A2-10 19DV555DG
Page 51
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G-1 TV LCD LCD Size / Visual Size 18.95 inch / 481.4mmV
System LCD Type Color TFT LCD
Color System PAL / SECAM Speaker 2 Speaker
Sound Output MAX 1.5W + 1.5W
NTSC3.58+4.43 /PAL60Hz Yes
G-2 DVD System Color System NTSC, PAL
Disc
Disc Diameter 120 mm , 80 mm Drive DSM-2 Search speed Fwd 4 step
Slow speed Fwd 1/7 -1/2 times
G-3 Tuning Broadcasting System Analog
System Tuner and System 1Tuner (Analog+Digital)
Receive CH Destination UK, I.R., CCIR Hyper+France CATV CH Coverage Analog IreE2~E4, X~Z+2, S1~S10, E5~E12,S11~S41,E21~E69
Intermediate Analog
Frequency Picture(FP) 38.9 / 38.9 / 38.9 / 33.9MHz
Digital Auto Tuning Method Preset CH Analog 99
Stereo/Dual TV Sound Nicam/A2 Dual Tuner Sound Muting Yes
G-4 Signal Video Signal Input Level 1 V p-p/75 ohm
RGB Signal Output Level -­Audio Signal Input Level -8.0dBm/50k ohm
G-5 Power Power Source AC 220-240V AC 50Hz
Power Consumption at AC 60 W at AC 230 V 50 Hz
Stand by (at AC) w/ EPG Timer 5 W at 230V 50Hz
Protector Power Fuse Yes
G-6 Regulation Safety CE(EN60065:2002)
G-7 Temperature Operation
G-8 Operating Humidity Less than 80% RH G-9 OSD Language (TV) English, Spanish, German, French, Italian,
Number of Pixels 1440(H) x 900(V) View Range Left/Right 80/80 degree
Bright Dot Zero Bright Dot Ratio --
Position Front Size 1.5 x 2.8 inch Impedance 8 ohm
10%(Typical) ---
Rev 4 step
Rev 1/7 -1/2 times
Digital
Digital E5~E12, ItaD~H2, Fra1~6, Rus6~12, E21~E69
Sound(FS) FP-FS
Digital Carrier 200 / Service 1000
Output Level 1 V p-p/75 ohm S/N Ratio (Weighted) 65dB Horizontal Resolution at DVD Mode 400 Lines
Output Level at DVD -12.0dBm/1k ohm (-20dBFs 0dBFs=2.0Vrms)
Digital Output Level 0.5 V p-p/75 ohm S/N Ratio at DVD (Weighted) 85dB Harmonic Distortion 0.02% (1KHz) Frequency Response : at DVD 4Hz - 22kHz
DC ---
w/o EPG Timer 1 W at 230V 50Hz Per Year -- kWh/Year
Radiation CE X-Radiation ---
Storage Space Around Unit 100 mm(4inch)
(DVD) English, Spanish, German, French, Italian
Up/Down 80/80 degree
Actual 2-45 times (DVD/Video CD)
Actual 2-45 times (DVD/Video CD)
Actual --
Actual --
at TV -8 dBm/1k ohm (0dBm=0.775Vrms)
at Video CD 4Hz - 20kHz
at SVCD --
at CD 4Hz - 20kHz
at DC --
< =
n 0 (Sorted Products)
DVD, CD-DA,
4-40 times (CD)
4-40 times (CD)
U.K., I.R., CCIR, FRENCH System B/G, D/K, I/I, L DVB-T (OFDM 2k/8k 16QAM/64QAM)
BG / II / DK, L / L' (SECAM
33.4 / 32.9 / 32.4 / 40.4MHz
5.5 / 6.0 / 6.5 / 6.5MHz
36.167MHz ALL Band (Not C.C.I.R. CH Plan)
o
+5
C ~ +40oC
o
C ~ +60oC
-20
Swedish, Dutch, Russian, Portuguese, Turkish, Greek, Finnish, Polish, Danish, Norwegian
A2-11 19DV556DB
Page 52
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G-10 Clock and Sleep Timer Max Time 120 Min
Timer Step 10 Min
G-11 Remote Unit RC-QJ
Control Glow in Dark Remocon No
G-12 Features Power On Memory Yes
On/Off Timer Program(On Timer / Off Timer) -- Program Wake Up Timer No Timer Back-up (at Power Off Mode) more than -- Min Sec
Remocon Format TOSHIBA Format TOSHIBA Custom Code 40-BF h ,44-BB h ,45-BA h ,45-BC h Power Source Voltage(D.C) 3V
UM size x pcs UM-4 x 2 pcs Total Keys 54 Keys Keys Power (Stand By) Yes
Information/(Display) Yes
Analog Menu / Setup Yes
Digital Menu Yes
Input Select Yes
ATV/DTV Yes
Guide/(EPG) Yes
Picture Size Yes
1Yes
2Yes
3Yes
4Yes
5Yes
6Yes
7Yes
8Yes
9Yes
0Yes
Sleep Yes
Mute Yes
Volume Up Yes
Volume Down Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Enter / CH List Yes Exit / Cancel Yes Freeze frame No TV/Radio Yes Subtitle Yes Play Yes Stop Yes Eject Yes TV / DVD Yes Return Yes DVD Menu Yes Top Menu Yes Marker Yes Angle Yes Repeat A-B Yes Audio Select Yes CH RTN(Quick View) / Zoom Yes Jump Yes
T'TEXT Keys TEXT / TV Yes
HOLD / Skip- Yes Reveal / Search- Yes Sub Page / Search+ Yes F.T.B / Skip+ Yes Red / Slow- Yes Green / Pause Yes Yellow / Play Mode Yes Cyan / Slow+ Yes CH Up / Page Up Yes CH Down / Page Down Yes
Auto Shut Off Yes Just Clock Function No Game Position No DNR Yes
3D
Comb Filter Yes
3D
Auto Set Up (Fast installation) Auto tuning (Analog tuner) Yes
CH sort Yes
ATS Yes Auto clock (Analog tuner) No Plug in start Yes
Picture Setting(TV) Picture Preference Yes
Brightness , Contrast , Color Yes Tint Yes
A2-12 19DV556DB
Page 53
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Sharpness Yes DNR No Color Temperature Yes Blue Back Yes Backlight Control Yes
Picture Setting(PC) BRIGHTNESS , CONTRAST Yes
Audio Nicam Yes
Tuning Auto Tuning Yes
Lock (Analog) Panel Lock No
Screen Saver
Black Side Panel No CH Label Yes T'Text Yes
Wide Mode (AUTO/4:3/FULL SCREEN/16:9/CINEMA/14:9) Yes Reset TV Setting Yes HD Zoom Picture Scroll (Vertical Position) Yes PFC(Power Factor circuit) No Freeze frame No HD-Ready Yes Plug and Play No Scart Spec Scart1 AV in Yes
Scart2 AV in No
Digital Text (VBI teletext) MHEG-5 MHP EPG (BBC type 8Days Digital tuner only) OAD (Over Air Download) Common Interface (Digital tuner only) Rec Screen Status Ch sorting based on Ch List (Digital/Germany only) Rename Carrier (Digital) Edit Event Timer Software Update via CI Slot Preference Language (Audio/Subtitle/Digital Service)(Digital) Ch Organizer (Lock, Skip, Go To, Delete, Rename, Move, Move to) Parental Lock (Digital) Time Setup DVB Subtitle (Digital)
PC Monitor Input Yes
HDMI Input Yes
Film Mode No
HOR POSITION , VER POSITION Yes PHASE , CLOCK Yes AUTO ADJUST No RED , GREEN , BLUE Yes Backlight Yes WXGA INPUT Yes WVGA INPUT No
Tone Control (Bass/Treble/Balance) Yes Surround No BBE No SRS WOW (SRS 3D/Focus/Tru Bass) No Variable Audio Out No
Manual Tuning Yes CH Allocation Yes
Channel Lock No Hotel Lock Yes Inversion No Full White No Screen Saver No Static Image No
Text type Fastext / Toptext Text Language English , French, Swedish, Hungarian
Turkish, German, Portuguese, Spanish, Italian, Greek, Slovakian, Russian, Polish, Czech, Rumanian, Estonian, Lettish, Lithuanian, Ukrainian, Croatian, Slovenian, Latvian
No
AV out Yes (A.Tuner/D.Tuner/Monitor) S-Video in No RGB in Yes
AV out No S-Video in No RGB in No
Yes Yes
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
VGA (640x480) Yes (60Hz) VGA (720x400) No WVGA (848x480) No SVGA (800x600) Yes (60Hz) XGA (1024x768) Yes (60Hz) WXGA (1280x768) Yes (60Hz) WXGA (1280x720) Yes (60Hz) WXGA (1360x768) Yes (60Hz) SXGA (1280x1024) No
VGA (640×480) Yes (60Hz)
A2-13 19DV556DB
Page 54
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
720×480i (4:3) Yes (60Hz) 720×480i (16:9) Yes (60Hz) 720×480p (4:3) Yes (60Hz) 720×480p (16:9) Yes (60Hz) 720×576i (4:3) Yes (50Hz) 720×576i (16:9) Yes (50Hz) 720×576p (4:3) Yes (50Hz) 720×576p (16:9) Yes (50Hz) 1280×720p Yes (50/60Hz) 1920×1080i Yes (50/60Hz)
Component Input Yes
720×480i (4:3) Yes (60Hz) 720×480i (16:9) Yes (60Hz) 720×480p (4:3) Yes (60Hz) 720×480p (16:9) Yes (60Hz) 720×576i (4:3) Yes (50Hz) 720×576i (16:9) Yes (50Hz) 720×576p (4:3) Yes (50Hz) 720×576p (16:9) Yes (50Hz) 1280×720p Yes (50/60Hz) 1920×1080i Yes (50/60Hz)
Wall Mount Size W x H(mm) Yes (100 x 100)
Screw Size M4 x 10
Features Tray Lock Yes (DVD) WMA No
JPEG Yes Video CD Playback Yes SVCD Playback MP3 Playback Yes Divx Playback Yes
DMF Support No
Digital Out (Dolby Digital) Yes
(MPEG) Yes (PCM) Yes (DTS) Yes
Down Mix Out (Dolby Digital) Yes
(DTS) No 3D Surround No Closed Caption No Screen Saver No Audio DAC 192kHz / 24bit
G-13 Accessories Owner's Manual Language English
w/Guarantee Card Remote Control Unit Yes Rod Antenna No
Poles -
Terminal ­Loop Antenna (W/ Antenna Change Plug) No
Terminal ­U/V Mixer No DC Car Cord (Center+) No Guarantee Card No Warning Sheet No Registration Card Yes Circuit Diagram No Antenna Change Plug No Service Facility List No Important Safeguard No Dew/AHC Caution Sheet No Quick Set-up Sheet Yes My Movie stream (Free DVD redemption voucher) No Carbon Neutral Certificate No Battery Yes
UM size x pcs UM-4 x 2 pcs
OEM Brand No AC Adapter No AC Cord (for AC Adapter) No AC Cord Yes AV Cord (2Pin-1Pin) No RF Cable Yes HDMI-DVI Cable No Helpline Sheet Yes 300 ohm to 75 ohm Antenna Adapter No
G-14 Interface Switch Side Power (Tact) Yes
System Select No
Main Power SW No
Channel Up / Play / Menu Up Yes
Channel Down / STOP / Menu Down Yes
Volume Up / Menu> Yes
Volume Down / Menu< Yes
Play No (CH+ Alternative)
Eject Yes
Skip+, Search+ No
Skip-, Search- No
A2-14 19DV556DB
No
No
Page 55
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Stop No (CH- Alternative)
Input Select / Enter Yes
Indicator Power/Stand-by/EPG Timer Yes(GREEN / RED / ORANGE)
Terminals Side CI Card Slot Yes
Rear Video Input 1
G-15 Set Size Approx. W x D x H (mm) 472 x 207 x 401
G-16 Weight Net Approx. 5.2kg (11.5 lbs)
G-17 Carton Master Carton No
Gift Box Yes
Drop Test '6 Surfaces
Container Stuffing 1088 w/Pallet Yes w/Wrapping Yes
G-18 Material Cabinet Cabinet Front PC+ABS 94V0 NON-HALOGEN
PCB Non-Halogen No
G-19 Environment Environmental standard requirement Green procurement of TOSHIBA
Pb- Free Phase3(PHASE3A)
WEEE Yes
Menu Yes
On Timer No
Audio Input 1
S- Input 1 Yes (AV2)
Video Input 2 No
Audio Input 2 No
S- Input 2 No
Video Output No
Audio Output No
Digital Audio Out (Coaxial)
Component In
Audio Input (Component In use)
Sub Woofer Output No
Diversity No
Ext Speaker No
DC Jack 12V(Center +) No
Other Terminal Headphone
VHF/UHF Antenna Input
AC Inlet
Euro Scart (21Pin)
PC Monitor Input (D-Sub)
Audio Input
HDMI Input 1
Audio Input (HDMI/DVI In use) PC Monitor Audio Input Alternative
HDMI Input 2 No
Audio Input (HDMI/DVI In use) No
w/o Stand,Handle Approx. W x D x H (mm)
Net w/o Stand,Handle Approx. 4.5kg ' (9.9 lbs)
Gross Approx. 6.9kg (15.2 lbs)
Content ---- Sets
Material -- /--
Dimensions W x D x H(mm) -- x -- x --
Description of Origin No
Material Double/Full Color
Dimensions W x D x H(mm) 558 x 565 x 181
W/Handle Yes
W/Color Photo Label No
Description of Origin Yes
Height (cm) 80
Cabinet Rear PS 94V0 NON-DECABROM
Eyelet Yes
Measures for Whisker Yes
RCA x 1 (AV2) RCA x 2(L/MONO, R) (AV2)
Yes Yes RCA x 2(L/MONO, R)
DIN Type Yes 1Scart (AV1) Yes Mini Pin Jack( 3.5), STEREO Yes
472 x 67 x 364
Sets/40' container
A2-15 19DV556DB
Page 56
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G-1 TV
System
G-2 DVD System
G-3 Tuning
System
G-4 Signal
G-5 Power
G-6 Regulation
G-7 Temperature
G-8 Operating Humidity G-9 OSD Language
G-10 Clock and
Timer
LCD LCD Size / Visual Size 18.95 inch / 481.4mmV
Color System PAL / SECAM Speaker 2 Speaker
Sound Output MAX 1.5W + 1.5W
NTSC3.58+4.43 /PAL60Hz Yes Color System NTSC, PAL Disc
Disc Diameter 120 mm , 80 mm Drive DSM-2 Search speed Fwd 4 step
Slow speed Fwd 1/7 -1/2 times
Broadcasting System Analog
Tuner and System 1Tuner (Analog+Digital) Receive CH Destination UK, I.R., CCIR Hyper+France CATV CH Coverage Analog IreE2~E4, X~Z+2, S1~S10, E5~E12,S11~S41,E21~E69
Intermediate Analog
Frequency Picture(FP) 38.9 / 38.9 / 38.9 / 33.9MHz
Auto Tuning Method Preset CH Analog 99
Stereo/Dual TV Sound Nicam/A2 Dual Tuner Sound Muting Yes Video Signal Input Level 1 V p-p/75 ohm
RGB Signal Output Level -­Audio Signal Input Level -8.0dBm/50k ohm
Power Source AC 220-240V AC 50Hz
Power Consumption at AC 60 W at AC 230 V 50 Hz
Protector Power Fuse Yes
Sleep Timer Max Time 120 Min
LCD Type Color TFT LCD Number of Pixels 1440(H) x 900(V)
View Range Left/Right 80/80 degree
Bright Dot Zero Bright Dot Ratio --
Position Front Size 1.5 x 2.8 inch Impedance 8 ohm
10%(Typical) ---
Rev 4 step
Rev 1/7 -1/2 times
Digital
Digital E5~E12, ItaD~H2, Fra1~6, Rus6~12, E21~E69
Sound(FS) FP-FS
Digital
Digital Carrier 200 / Service 1000
Output Level 1 V p-p/75 ohm S/N Ratio (Weighted) 65dB Horizontal Resolution at DVD Mode 400 Lines
Output Level at DVD -12.0dBm/1k ohm (-20dBFs 0dBFs=2.0Vrms)
Digital Output Level 0.5 V p-p/75 ohm S/N Ratio at DVD (Weighted) 85dB Harmonic Distortion 0.02% (1KHz) Frequency Response : at DVD 4Hz - 22kHz
DC ---
Stand by (at AC) w/ EPG Timer 5 W at 230V 50Hz
w/o EPG Timer 1 W at 230V 50Hz Per Year -- kWh/Year
Safety CE(EN60065:2002) Radiation CE X-Radiation --­Operation +5oC ~ +40oC Storage -20oC ~ +60oC Space Around Unit 100 mm(4inch)
(TV) English, Spanish, German, French, Italian,
(DVD) English, Spanish, German, French, Italian
Step 10 Min
Up/Down 80/80 degree
Actual 2-45 times (DVD/Video CD)
Actual 2-45 times (DVD/Video CD)
Actual --
Actual --
at TV -8 dBm/1k ohm (0dBm=0.775Vrms)
at Video CD 4Hz - 20kHz
at SVCD --
at CD 4Hz - 20kHz
at DC --
<
n 0 (Sorted Products)
=
DVD, CD-DA, CD-
4-40 times (CD)
4-40 times (CD)
U.K., I.R., CCIR, FRENCH System B/G, D/K, I/I, L DVB-T (OFDM 2k/8k 16QAM/64QAM)
BG / II / DK, L / L' (SECAM VL)
33.4 / 32.9 / 32.4 / 40.4MHz
5.5 / 6.0 / 6.5 / 6.5MHz
36.167MHz ALL Band (Not C.C.I.R. CH Plan)
Less than 80% RH
Swedish, Dutch, Russian, Portuguese, Turkish, Greek, Finnish, Polish, Danish, Norwegian
A2-16 19DV556DG
Page 57
G-11 Remote
Control
G-12 Features
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
On/Off Timer Program(On Timer / Off Timer) -- Program Wake Up Timer No Timer Back-up (at Power Off Mode) more than -- Min Sec Unit RC-QJ Glow in Dark Remocon No Remocon Format TOSHIBA Format TOSHIBA Custom Code 40-BF h ,44-BB h ,45-BA h ,45-BC h Power Source Voltage(D.C) 3V
Total Keys 54 Keys Keys Power (Stand By) Yes
T'TEXT Keys TEXT / TV Yes
Power On Memory Yes Auto Shut Off Yes Just Clock Function No Game Position No DNR Yes
Comb Filter Yes
Auto Set Up (Fast installation) Auto tuning (Analog tuner) Yes
Picture Setting(TV) Picture Preference Yes
UM size x pcs UM-4 x 2 pcs
Information/(Display) Yes Analog Menu / Setup Yes Digital Menu Yes Input Select Yes ATV/DTV Yes Guide/(EPG) Yes Picture Size Yes 1 Yes 2 Yes 3 Yes 4 Yes 5 Yes 6 Yes 7 Yes 8 Yes 9 Yes 0 Yes Sleep Yes Mute Yes Volume Up Yes Volume Down Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Enter / CH List Yes Exit / Cancel Yes Freeze frame No TV/Radio Yes Subtitle Yes Play Yes Stop Yes Eject Yes TV / DVD Yes Return Yes DVD Menu Yes Top Menu Yes Marker Yes Angle Yes Repeat A-B Yes Audio Select Yes CH RTN(Quick View) / Zoom Yes Jump Yes
HOLD / Skip- Yes Reveal / Search- Yes Sub Page / Search+ Yes F.T.B / Skip+ Yes Red / Slow- Yes Green / Pause Yes Yellow / Play Mode Yes Cyan / Slow+ Yes CH Up / Page Up Yes CH Down / Page Down Yes
3D
3D
CH sort Yes
ATS Yes Auto clock (Analog tuner) No Plug in start Yes
Brightness , Contrast , Color Yes Tint Yes Sharpness Yes DNR
A2-17 19DV556DG
No
Page 58
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Color Temperature Yes Blue Back Yes Backlight Control Yes
Picture Setting(PC) BRIGHTNESS , CONTRAST Yes
Audio Nicam Yes
Tuning Auto Tuning Yes
Lock (Analog) Panel Lock No
Screen Saver
Black Side Panel No CH Label Yes T'Text Yes
Wide Mode (AUTO/4:3/FULL SCREEN/16:9/CINEMA/14:9) Yes Reset TV Setting Yes HD Zoom Picture Scroll (Vertical Position) Yes PFC(Power Factor circuit) No Freeze frame No HD-Ready Yes Plug and Play No Scart Spec Scart1 AV in Yes
Scart2 AV in No
Digital Text (VBI teletext) MHEG-5 MHP EPG (BBC type 8Days Digital tuner only) OAD (Over Air Download) Common Interface (Digital tuner only) Rec Screen Status Ch sorting based on Ch List (Digital/Germany only) Rename Carrier (Digital) Edit Event Timer Software Update via CI Slot Preference Language (Audio/Subtitle/Digital Service)(Digital) Ch Organizer (Lock, Skip, Go To, Delete, Rename, Move, Move to) Parental Lock (Digital) Time Setup DVB Subtitle (Digital)
PC Monitor Input Yes
HDMI Input Yes
Film Mode No
HOR POSITION , VER POSITION Yes PHASE , CLOCK Yes AUTO ADJUST No RED , GREEN , BLUE Yes Backlight Yes WXGA INPUT Yes WVGA INPUT No
Tone Control (Bass/Treble/Balance) Yes Surround No BBE No SRS WOW (SRS 3D/Focus/Tru Bass) No Variable Audio Out No
Manual Tuning Yes CH Allocation Yes
Channel Lock No Hotel Lock Yes Inversion No Full White No Screen Saver No Static Image No
Text type Fastext / Toptext Text Language English , French, Swedish, Hungarian
Turkish, German, Portuguese, Spanish, Italian, Greek, Slovakian, Russian, Polish, Czech, Rumanian, Estonian, Lettish, Lithuanian, Ukrainian, Croatian, Slovenian, Latvian
AV out Yes (A.Tuner/D.Tuner/Monitor) S-Video in No RGB in Yes
AV out No S-Video in No RGB in No
Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
VGA (640x480) Yes (60Hz) VGA (720x400) No WVGA (848x480) No SVGA (800x600) Yes (60Hz) XGA (1024x768) Yes (60Hz) WXGA (1280x768) Yes (60Hz) WXGA (1280x720) Yes (60Hz) WXGA (1360x768) Yes (60Hz) SXGA (1280x1024) No
VGA (640×480) Yes (60Hz) 720×480i (4:3) Yes (60Hz) 720×480i (16:9) Yes (60Hz)
A2-18 19DV556DG
No
No
Page 59
Features (DVD)
G-13 Accessories
G-14 Interface
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
720×480p (4:3) Yes (60Hz) 720×480p (16:9) Yes (60Hz) 720×576i (4:3) Yes (50Hz) 720×576i (16:9) Yes (50Hz) 720×576p (4:3) Yes (50Hz) 720×576p (16:9) Yes (50Hz) 1280×720p Yes (50/60Hz) 1920×1080i Yes (50/60Hz)
Component Input Yes
720×480i (4:3) Yes (60Hz) 720×480i (16:9) Yes (60Hz) 720×480p (4:3) Yes (60Hz) 720×480p (16:9) Yes (60Hz) 720×576i (4:3) Yes (50Hz) 720×576i (16:9) Yes (50Hz) 720×576p (4:3) Yes (50Hz) 720×576p (16:9) Yes (50Hz) 1280×720p Yes (50/60Hz) 1920×1080i Yes (50/60Hz)
Wall Mount Size W x H(mm) Yes (100 x 100)
Screw Size M4 x 10
Tray Lock Yes WMA No JPEG Yes Video CD Playback Yes SVCD Playback MP3 Playback Yes Divx Playback Yes
DMF Support No
Digital Out (Dolby Digital) Yes
(MPEG) Yes (PCM) Yes (DTS) Yes
Down Mix Out (Dolby Digital) Yes
(DTS) No
3D Surround No Closed Caption No Screen Saver No Audio DAC 192kHz / 24bit Owner's Manual (Full) Language English, French, German
(Simplified) Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Danish, Norwegian, Swedish,
Finnish, Czech, Greek
w/Guarantee Card
Remote Control Unit Yes Rod Antenna No
Poles ­Terminal -
Loop Antenna (W/ Antenna Change Plug)
Terminal -
U/V Mixer No DC Car Cord (Center+) No Guarantee Card No Warning Sheet No Circuit Diagram No Antenna Change Plug No Service Facility List No Important Safeguard No Dew/AHC Caution Sheet No Quick Set-up Sheet Yes My Movie stream (Free DVD redemption voucher) No Carbon Neutral Certificate No Battery Yes
UM size x pcs UM-4 x 2 pcs OEM Brand No
AC Adapter AC Cord (for AC Adapter) No AC Cord Yes AV Cord (2Pin-1Pin) No RF Cable Yes HDMI-DVI Cable No Helpline Sheet No 300 ohm to 75 ohm Antenna Adapter No Switch Side Power (Tact) Yes
System Select No Main Power SW No Channel Up / Play / Menu Up Yes Channel Down / STOP / Menu Down Yes Volume Up / Menu> Yes Volume Down / Menu< Yes Play No (CH+ Alternative) Eject Yes Skip+, Search+ No Skip-, Search- No Stop No (CH- Alternative)
A2-19 19DV556DG
No
No
No
No
Page 60
G-15 Set Size
G-16 Weight
G-17 Carton
G-18 Material
G-19 Environment
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Input Select / Enter Yes
Indicator Power/Stand-by/EPG Timer Yes(GREEN / RED / ORANGE)
Terminals Side CI Card Slot Yes
Rear Video Input 1
Master Carton
Gift Box Yes
Drop Test '6 Surfaces
Container Stuffing 1088 w/Pallet Yes w/Wrapping Yes Cabinet Cabinet Front PC+ABS 94V0 NON-HALOGEN
PCB Non-Halogen
Environmental standard requirement Green procurement of TOSHIBA Pb- Free Phase3(PHASE3A)
WEEE
Menu Yes
On Timer No
Audio Input 1 S- Input 1 Yes (AV2) Video Input 2 No Audio Input 2 No S- Input 2 No Video Output No Audio Output No Digital Audio Out (Coaxial) Component In Audio Input (Component In use) Sub Woofer Output No Diversity No Ext Speaker No DC Jack 12V(Center +) No Other Terminal Headphone VHF/UHF Antenna Input AC Inlet Euro Scart (21Pin) PC Monitor Input (D-Sub) Audio Input HDMI Input 1 Audio Input (HDMI/DVI In use) PC Monitor Audio Input Alternative HDMI Input 2 No Audio Input (HDMI/DVI In use) No Approx. W x D x H (mm) 472 x 207 x 401
w/o Stand,Handle Approx. W x D x H (mm)
Net Approx. 5.2kg (11.5 lbs) Net w/o Stand,Handle Approx. 4.5kg ' (9.9 lbs) Gross Approx. 6.9kg (15.2 lbs)
Content ---- Sets Material -- /-­Dimensions W x D x H(mm) -- x -- x -­Description of Origin No
Material Double/Full Color Dimensions W x D x H(mm) 558 x 565 x 181 W/Handle Yes W/Color Photo Label No Description of Origin Yes
Height (cm) 80
Cabinet Rear PS 94V0 NON-DECABROM
Eyelet Yes
Measures for Whisker Yes
RCA x 1 (AV2) RCA x 2(L/MONO, R) (AV2)
Yes Yes RCA x 2(L/MONO, R)
DIN Type Yes 1Scart (AV1) Yes Mini Pin Jack( 3.5), STEREO Yes
472 x 67 x 364
No
Sets/40' container
No
Yes
A2-20 19DV556DG
Page 61
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
1. REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL PARTS AND P.C. BOARDS
CAUTION:
Never lift the LCD Panel more than 90
o
, the LCD Panel
or the connector will be damaged.
High voltages exist in the set (especially the back-
light) which can cause injury or death.
Please disconnect the AC power during repair to prevent serious shock or death.
1-1: STAND ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 1-1)
1.
Remove the 2 screws (1).
2.
Remove the Stand Ass'y in the direction of arrow.
3.
Remove the 6 screws (2).
(2)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
Stand Ass'y
(2)
(2)
CD7204
(LVDS Cable)
Holder cord
CD7204
(LVDS Cable)
(A)
Front Cabinet Ass'y
(1)
Support
(1)
Fig. 1-1
1-2: FRONT CABINET ASS'Y, LCD PANEL AND REMOCON PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-2)
1.
Remove the Front Cabinet Ass'y in the direction of arrow (A).
2.
Unlock the 2 supports (1).
3.
Lift the LCD Panel within to angle 45
o
, then remove the Holder
cord.
4.
Lift the LCD Panel within to angle 85o.
5.
Disconnect the following connectors: (CD7005, CD7006 and CD7204).
6.
Remove the LCD PANEL in the direction of arrow (B).
7.
Disconnect the following connector: (CP7601).
8.
Remove the Remocon PCB in the direction of arrow (C).
LCD Panel
(B)
CD7005 and CD7006
Remocon PCB
CP7601
(C)
Fig. 1-2
B1-1 19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG
Page 62
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
1-3: POWER PCB AND SPEAKER-L (Refer to Fig. 1-3)
1.
Remove the Holder PCB in the direction of arrow (A).
2.
Disconnect the following connector:
3.
(CP501 and CP8101).
4.
Remove the 7 screws (1).
5.
Remove the Nut (2).
6.
Remove the Power PCB in the direction of arrow (B).
7.
Remove the screws (3).
8.
Remove the Speaker-L in the direction of arrow (C).
Holder PCB
(A)
(1)
CP8101
CP501
(3)
Speaker - L
(C)
Power PCB
(1)
(2)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(B)
Fig. 1-3
1-4: MAIN PCB,TUNER PCB AND OPERATION PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-4)
1.
Disconnect the following connectors: (CP2201,CP5803 and CP6501).
2.
Remove the 4 screws (1).
3.
Remove the Spring Earth 1 in the direction of arrow (A).
4.
Remove the screws (2).
5.
Remove the Tuner PCB in the direction of arrow (B).
6.
Remove the 2 screws (3).
7.
Remove the Main PCB in the direction of arrow (C).
8.
Remove the 3 screws (4).
9.
Remove the Operation PCB in the direction of arrow (D).
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
Spring Earth-1
(A)
CP6501
Main PCB
(3)
(3)
(C)
(4)
(2)
(4)
Tuner PCB
CP5803
(B)
(4)
CP2201
Operation PCB
(D)
1-5: DIGITAL PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-5)
1.
Remove the screws (1).
2.
Remove the Angle PCB Ass'y in the direction of arrow (A).
3.
Remove the Digital PCB in the direction of arrow (B).
4.
Remove the
Shield Ci Card in the direction of arrow (C).
(1)
Angle PCB Ass'y
(A)
Digital PCB
(B)
Shield Ci Card
(C)
Fig. 1-5
1-6: DVD DECK (Refer to Fig. 1-6)
1.
Short circuit the position shown in Fig. 1-6 using a soldering iron. If you remove the DVD Deck with no soldering, the Laser may be damaged.
2.
Remove the 4 screws (1).
3.
Remove the DVD Deck in the direction of arrow (A).
4.
Disconnect the following connectors: (CP2301, CP2302 and CP2303).
5.
Remove the 2 screws (2).
6.
Remove the Angle Mpeg in the direction of arrow (B).
7.
Remove the 4 screws (3).
8.
Remove the DVD MT PCB in the direction of arrow (C).
(1)
(1)
Angle Mpeg
(C)
CP2303
CP2302
CP2301
DVD MT PCB
Pick Up PCB
Short circuit using a
soldering iron.
(3)
(3)
(2)
(3)
(1)
(3)
(2)
(B)
(1)
DVD Deck
(A)
(A)
Fig. 1-6
Fig. 1-4
B1-2 19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG
Page 63
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
NOTE
1.
Before your operation, please read "PREPARATION OF SERVICING"
2.
Use the Lead Free solder.
3.
Manual soldering conditions
• Soldering temperature: 320 ± 20
• Soldering time: Within 3 seconds
• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu When Soldering/Removing of solder, use the drawing
4. equipment over the Pick Up Unit to keep the Flux smoke away from it. When installing the DVD Deck, remove all the soldering
5. on the short circuit position after the connection of Pick Up PCB and DVD MT PCB connector.
o
C
B1-3 19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG
Page 64
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
2. REMOVAL OF DVD DECK PARTS
NOTE
1. Disassemble only the DVD DECK PARTS parts listed here. Minute adjustments are needed if the disassembly is done. If the repair is needed except listed parts, replace the DVD MECHA ASS'Y.
2-1: TRAVERSE ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 2-1-A)
Remove the 3 screws (1).
1. Unlock the 2 supports (2).
2. Remove the Insulator (R) from the Loader Sub Ass'y.
3. Remove the Traverse Ass'y.
4.
(2)
Loader Sub Ass'y
Traverse Ass'y
• Screw Torque: 2.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm
(1)
(1)
(2)
Insulator (R)
(1)
Fig. 2-1-A
Check Hook
Check Hook
Loader Ass'y (Top Side)
Check Hook
Fig. 2-1-D
2-2:
SWITCH PCB ASS'Y/GEAR MIDDLE/GEAR FEED/RACK FEED ASS'Y/FEED MOTOR (Refer to Fig. 2-2-A)
Remove the Insulator (F).
1. Remove the Insulator (R).
2. Unlock the support (1).
3. Remove the Gear Middle.
4. Remove the screw (2).
5. Remove the Rack Feed Ass'y.
6. Remove the screw (3).
7. Remove the Switch PCB Ass'y.
8. Remove the screw (4).
9. Remove the Gear Feed.
10. Remove the 2 screws (5).
11. Remove the Feed Motor.
12. Remove the Gear Motor.
13.
Feed Motor
NOTE
1. In case of the Traverse Ass'y installation, hook the wire on the Loader Ass'y as shown Fig. 2-1-B to Fig. 2-1-C.
Loader Ass'y (Bottom Side)
Check Lock Check Lock
Check Hook
80 ± 5mm
Loader Ass'y
Fig. 2-1-B
Check Hook
Fig. 2-1-C
Traverse Ass'y
Insulator (F)
Insulator (F)
Rack Feed Ass'y
• Screw Torque: 1.3 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 2)
• Screw Torque: 3.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 3)
• Screw Torque: 1.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 4, 5)
Gear Motor
(1)
(4)
(2)
(3)
Insulator (R)
(5)
(5)
Gear Feed
Gear Middle
Switch PCB Ass'y
Fig. 2-2-A
B2-1
19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG
Page 65
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
NOTE
1.
When installing the Rack Feed Ass'y, push both ends to align the teeth as shown Fig. 2-2-B. Then install it.
2.
In case of the Gear Motor installation, check if the value of the Fig. 2-2-C is correct.
3.
When installing the wire of the Switch PCB Ass'y, install it correctly as Fig. 2-2-D. Manual soldering conditions
• Soldering temperature: 320 ± 20
o
C
• Soldering time: Within 3 seconds
• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu After the assembly of the Traverse Ass'y, hook the wire
4. on the Traverse Ass'y as shown Fig. 2-2-E.
Rack Feed Ass'y
Push
[OK] [NG]
Push
Fig. 2-2-B
Check Hook
Loosen the wire in the direction of the arrow.
Traverse Ass'y
Check Hook
Check Hook
Check Hook
Fig. 2-2-E
2-3: FFC WIRE HANDLING
1.
When installing the FFC, fold it correctly and install it as shown from Fig. 2-3-A to Fig. 2-3-B.
NOTE
Do not make the folding lines except the specified
1. positions for the FFC.
[ 24 pin FFC ]
Fold it by 90û
To Pick Up PCB
Printing Surface
20 ± 1mm
Gear Motor
Feed Motor
Switch PCB Ass'y
~ SPINDLE MOTOR ~
Safety surface for pressing of the insert.
~ FEED MOTOR ~
Install wire from (1) to (4) in order.
YELLOW (2)
GREEN (1)
8.0 ± 0.2mm
WHITE (4)
BROWN (3)
Fig. 2-2-C
Fig. 2-2-D
[ 6 pin FFC ]
30 ± 1mm
Fig. 2-3-A
40 ± 1mm
Fold
Printing Surface
Fig. 2-3-B
B2-2
19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG
Page 66
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
3.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FLAT PACKAGE IC
REMOVAL
Put Masking Tape (cotton tape) around the Flat Package
1. IC to protect other parts from any damage.
(Refer to Fig. 3-1.)
NOTE
Masking is carried out on all the parts located within 10 mm distance from IC leads.
When IC starts moving back and forth easily after
3. desoldering completely, pickup the corner of the IC using tweezers and remove the IC by moving with the IC desoldering machine. (Refer to Fig. 3-3.)
NOTE
Some ICs on the PCB are affixed with glue, so be careful not to break or damage the foil of each IC leads or solder lands under the IC when removing it.
Blower type IC desoldering machine
Masking Tape (Cotton Tape)
Heat the IC leads using a blower type IC desoldering
2.
IC
machine. (Refer to Fig. 3-2.)
NOTE
Do not rotate or move the IC back and forth , until IC can move back and forth easily after desoldering the leads completely.
Blower type IC desoldering machine
Fig. 3-1
Tweezers
IC
Peel off the Masking Tape.4.
Absorb the solder left on the pattern using the Braided
5. Shield Wire. (Refer to Fig. 3-4.)
NOTE
Do not move the Braided Shield Wire in the vertical direction towards the IC pattern.
Fig. 3-3
Braided Shield Wire
Soldering Iron
IC
Fig. 3-2
B3-1
19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG
IC pattern
Fig. 3-4
Page 67
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
INSTALLATION
Take care of the polarity of new IC and then install the
1. new IC fitting on the printed circuit pattern. Then solder each lead on the diagonal positions of IC temporarily.
(Refer to Fig. 3-5.)
Soldering Iron
Solder temporarily
Supply the solder from the upper position of IC leads
2.
Solder temporarily
sliding to the lower position of the IC leads.
(Refer to Fig. 3-6.)
Fig. 3-5
When bridge-soldering between terminals and/or the
4. soldering amount are not enough, resolder using a Thin­tip Soldering Iron. (Refer to Fig. 3-8.)
Thin-tip Soldering Iron
IC
Fig. 3-8
Finally, confirm the soldering status on four sides of the
5. IC using a magnifying glass. Confirm that no abnormality is found on the soldering position and installation position of the parts around the IC. If some abnormality is found, correct by resoldering.
NOTE
When the IC leads are bent during soldering and/or repairing, do not repair the bending of leads. If the bending of leads are repaired, the pattern may be damaged. So, always be sure to replace the IC in this case.
Soldering IronSolder
IC
Absorb the solder left on the lead using the Braided
3.
Supply soldering from upper position to lower position
Shield Wire. (Refer to Fig. 3-7.)
NOTE
Do not absorb the solder to excess.
Soldering Iron
IC
Braided Shield Wire
Fig. 3-6
Fig. 3-7
B3-2
19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG
Page 68
SERVICE MODE LIST
This unit provided with the following SERVICE MODES so you can repair, examine and adjust easily.
To enter to the SERVICE MODE function, press and hold both buttons simultaneously on the main unit and on the remote control for more than a the standard time in the appropriate condition. (See below chart.)
Set
Condition
TV mode
TV mode
DVD mode
(No disc)
DVD mode
(No disc)
TV mode
TV mode
ALL mode
Set Key Operations
VOL. DOWN
(Minimum)
VOL. DOWN
(Minimum)
VOL. DOWN
(Minimum)
VOL. DOWN
(Minimum)
VOL. DOWN
(Minimum)
VOL. DOWN
(Minimum)
VOL. DOWN
(Minimum)
Remocon
Key
1 2 sec.
2
4 2 sec.
5 2 sec.
6
7
9 2 sec.
Standard
Time
2 sec.
2 sec.
2 sec.
Initialization of factory TV data. NOTE:
Check of the SUM DATA and MICON VERSION on the screen. Refer to the "WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC".
DVD Write mode. Refer to the "RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE".
POWER ON total hours are displayed on the screen. Can be checked of the INITIAL DATA of MEMORY IC. Refer to the "WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC".
Releasing of HOTEL MODE FUNCTION. Refer to the "HOTEL MODE FUNCTION".
Display of the Adjustment MENU on the screen. Refer to the "ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT" (On-Screen Display Adjustment).
If you set factory initialization, the memories are reset such as the channel setting, and the POWER ON total hours.
Initialization of factory DVD data.
DVD mode
(No disc)
DVD mode
(No disc)
Press the following remocon keys continuously. SETUP SUBTITLE 3 AUDIO SELECT 0
STOP 1 2 sec.
STOP 7 2 sec.
Method
Region setting.
DVD
Refer to the "RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE".
Releasing of PARENTAL LOCK. Refer to the "PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL".
The disk cannot be taken out. Refer to the "TRAY LOCK".
C-1
19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG
Page 69
SERVICING FIXTURES AND TOOLS
JG176 Up-Date Disc
Ref. No.
JG176
Part No.
APJG176145
Parts Name
Up-Date Disc
Up-Date of the Firmware
Remarks
RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE
1.
Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.
2.
Confirm that the "No Disc" will be appeared on the screen.
3.
Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (5) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.
4.
Press VOL. UP/DOWN button on the unit to check if all the keys on the unit do not function.
NOTE: To check if DVD Write mode is set.
When inserting Up-Date Disc at Non DVD Write mode, the read error will happen.
5.
Insert the Up-Date Disc. (Refer to SERVICING FIXTURE AND TOOLS)
6.
Automatic read will start and "Firmware upgrade Please Wait" will be displayed on the screen. At this time, the horizontal noise lines may appear. But no problem.
NOTE: Do not turn off the unit on the way or operate the keys on the unit and remocon. Up-Date error will happen and can not be done with the Up-Date of Up-Date Disc.
7.
After the Up-Date, Logo screen will appear.
8.
Unplug the AC cord, then plug it in.
After the write, set to the initializing of shipping.
9.
Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.
10.
Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (4) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds. The "INITIALIZE 5 ---> COMPLETE" will appear on the screen.
11.
Then unplug the AC cord, and plug it in.
CHECK FOR THE FIRMWARE VERSION
12.
Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.
13.
Press both Channel button (1) on the remote control and the STOP button on the set for more than 2 seconds. Firmware version will be displayed on the top left of the screen.
14.
Turn off the power
F/W Ver. ADLSL8811A Initialize: Complete
Laser drive time DVD LD: 0Hour CD LD : 0Hour
When the changed version displays, the Re-write will be completed.
A D L S L 8 8 1 1 A
Fixed
Release date (Example: 2008.8.11)
Released times on the same date
A = October B = November C = December
C-2
19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG
Page 70
WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC
CONFIRMATION OF CHECK SUM, POWER ON TOTAL HOURS AND MICON VERSION
Initial total of MEMORY IC, POWER ON total hours and MICON VERSIONcan be checked on the screen. Total hours are displayed in 16 system of notation.
NOTE:
1.
2.
3.
4.
NOTE:
If you set a factory initialization, the total hours is reset to "0". Please refer to "CONFIRMATION OF INITIAL DATA" when SUM DATA is not corresponding.
Turn on the POWER, and set to the TV mode. Set the VOLUME to minimum. Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (2) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds. After the confirmation of each check sum, turn off the power.
The each item value might be different according to each set.
Initial setting data check sum.
SCALER data check sum.
EEPROM version.
Main Micon check sum.
Sub Micon check sum.
INIT : 5B5C VCT-P : 3901 LCD ON : 0000 EEPROM : W51Z01AM00 ANALOG M : DB1E0_80820A ANALOG S : DB120_80225A
POWER ON total hours.
= (16 x 16 x 16 x thousands digit value) + (16 x 16 x hundreds digit value) + (16 x tens digit value) + (ones digit value)
FIG. 1
CONFIRMATION OF INITIAL DATA
If a service repair is undertaken where it has been required to change the MEMORY IC, the following steps should be taken to ensure correct data settings while making reference to INITIAL SETTING TABLE (Attached "INITIAL DATA").
Turn on the POWER, and set to the TV mode.
1. Set the VOLUME to minimum.
2. Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (6) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.
3. ADDRESS and DATA should appear as FIG 2.
NOTE:
No need to set data other position than 0D00~0E3F and 1000~7FFF
ADDRESS
INIT 0000 00 LCD ON 0000 ANALOG M : DB1E0_80820A ANALOG S : DB120_80225A
DATA
FIG. 2
ADDRESS is now selected and should "blink". Using the UP/DOWN buton on the remote, step through the ADDRESS until
4. required ADDRESS to be changed is reached. Press LEFT/RIGHT button to select DATA. When DATA is selected, it will "blink".
5. Again, step through the DATA using UP/DOWN button until required DATA value has been selected.
6. Pressing LEFT/RIGHT button will take you back to ADDRESS for further selection if necessary.
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 until all data has been checked.
8. When satisfied correct DATA has been entered, turn POWER off (return to STANDBY MODE) to finish DATA input.
9.
After the data input, set to the initializing of shipping.
Turn on the POWER.
10. Set the VOLUME to minimum.
11. Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (1) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.
12. After the finishing of the initializing of shipping, the unit will turn off automatically.
13.
The unit will now have the correct DATA for the new MEMORY IC.
C-3
19DV555DB/19DV556DB
Page 71
WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC
CONFIRMATION OF CHECK SUM, POWER ON TOTAL HOURS AND MICON VERSION
Initial total of MEMORY IC, POWER ON total hours and MICON VERSIONcan be checked on the screen. Total hours are displayed in 16 system of notation.
NOTE:
1.
2.
3.
4.
NOTE:
If you set a factory initialization, the total hours is reset to "0". Please refer to "CONFIRMATION OF INITIAL DATA" when SUM DATA is not corresponding.
Turn on the POWER, and set to the TV mode. Set the VOLUME to minimum. Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (2) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds. After the confirmation of each check sum, turn off the power.
The each item value might be different according to each set.
Initial setting data check sum.
SCALER data check sum.
EEPROM version.
Main Micon check sum.
Sub Micon check sum.
INIT : 5B5E VCT-P : 3901 LCD ON : 0000 EEPROM : W51Z02AM00 ANALOG M : DB1E0_80820A ANALOG S : DB120_80225A
POWER ON total hours.
= (16 x 16 x 16 x thousands digit value) + (16 x 16 x hundreds digit value) + (16 x tens digit value) + (ones digit value)
FIG. 3
CONFIRMATION OF INITIAL DATA
If a service repair is undertaken where it has been required to change the MEMORY IC, the following steps should be taken to ensure correct data settings while making reference to INITIAL SETTING TABLE (Attached "INITIAL DATA").
Turn on the POWER, and set to the TV mode.
1. Set the VOLUME to minimum.
2. Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (6) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.
3. ADDRESS and DATA should appear as FIG 2.
NOTE:
No need to set data other position than 0D00~0E3F and 1000~7FFF
ADDRESS
INIT 0000 00 LCD ON 0000 ANALOG M : DB1E0_80820A ANALOG S : DB120_80225A
DATA
FIG. 4
ADDRESS is now selected and should "blink". Using the UP/DOWN buton on the remote, step through the ADDRESS
4. until required ADDRESS to be changed is reached. Press LEFT/RIGHT button to select DATA. When DATA is selected, it will "blink".
5. Again, step through the DATA using UP/DOWN button until required DATA value has been selected.
6. Pressing LEFT/RIGHT button will take you back to ADDRESS for further selection if necessary.
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 until all data has been checked.
8. When satisfied correct DATA has been entered, turn POWER off (return to STANDBY MODE) to finish DATA input.
9.
After the data input, set to the initializing of shipping.
Turn on the POWER.
10. Set the VOLUME to minimum.
11. Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (1) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.
12. After the finishing of the initializing of shipping, the unit will turn off automatically.
13.
The unit will now have the correct DATA for the new MEMORY IC.
C-4
19DV555DG/19DV556DG
Page 72
ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS
1. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
Read and perform these adjustments when repairing the circuits or replacing electrical parts or PCB assemblies.
CAUTION
Use an isolation transformer when performing any service on this chassis.
When removing a PCB or related component, after unfastening or changing a wire, be sure to put the wire back in its original position.
When you exchange IC and Transistor with a heat sink, apply silicon grease on the contact section of the heat sink. Before applying new silicon grease, remove all the old silicon grease. (Old grease may cause damage to the IC and Transistor).
Prepare the following measurement tools for electrical adjustments.
1. Pattern Generator
On-Screen Display Adjustment
1.2.Set the VOLUME to minimum.
Press the VOL. DOWN button on the set and the channel button (9) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds to display adjustment mode on the screen as shown in Fig. 1-1.
PA L
H POSI
01 OSD
Function
3.
Use the UP/DOWN button or Channel button (0-9) on the remote control to select the options shown in Fig. 1-2.
4.
Press the MENU SETUP button on the remote control to end the adjustments.
5.
To display the adjustment screen for TUNER, AV, COMPONENT, HDMI PC and DVD mode, press the INPUT button on the remote control.
6.
Receive the DIGITAL broadcasting.
7.
To display the adjustment screen for DTV mode, select the digital channel.
8.
Press the VOL.DOWN button on the set and the channel (9) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.
TUNER
16:9
12
Step No.
Fig. 1-1
FUNCTION
NO.
FUNCTION
01
OSD H POSI
02
OSD V POSI
03
R DRIVE(N)
04
R CUTOFF(N)
05
G DRIVE(N)
06
G CUTOFF(N)
07
B DRIVE(N)
08
B CUTOFF(N)
09
R DRIVE(C)
10
R CUTOFF(C)
11
G DRIVE(C)
12
G CUTOFF(C)
13
B DRIVE(C)
14
B CUTOFF(C)
15
R DRIVE(W)
16
R CUTOFF(W)
17
G DRIVE(W)
18
G CUTOFF(W)
19
B DRIVE(W) B CUTOFF(W)
20
H POSI
21
H POSI MAX
22
H POSI MIN
23
NO.
V POSI
24
V POSI MAX
25
V POSI MIN
26
BACKLIGHT CENTER
27
BACKLIGHT MAX
28
BACKLIGHT MIN
29
BRIGHT CENTER
30
BRIGHT MAX
31
BRIGHT MIN
32
TINT CENTER
33
CONTRAST CENTER
34
CONTRAST MAX
35
CONTRAST MIN
36
CONTRAST 50
37
COLOR CENTER
38 39
COLOR MAX
40
COLOR MIN
41
TEXT H POSI
42
TEXT V POSI
2. BASIC ADJUSTMENTS
2-1: WHITE BALANCE
1.
Place the set in Aging Test for more than 15 minutes.
2.
Receive the gray scale pattern from the Pattern Generator.
3.
Press the INPUT button on the remote control to set to the AV mode.
4.
Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.
5.
Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (03) on the remote control to select "R DRIVE(N)".
6.
Press the PAGE UP/DOWN button on the remote control to select the "R DRIVE(N)", "R CUTOFF(N)", "B DRIVE(N)", "B CUTOFF(N)", "R DRIVE(C)", "R CUTOFF(C)", "B DRIVE(C)", "B CUTOFF(C)", "R DRIVE(W)", "R CUTOFF(W)", "B DRIVE(W)" or "B CUTOFF(W)".
7.
Adjust the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control to whiten the R DRIVE(N), R CUTOFF(N), B DRIVE(N), B CUTOFF(N), R DRIVE(C), R CUTOFF(C), B DRIVE(C), B CUTOFF(C), R DRIVE(W), R CUTOFF(W), B DRIVE(W) and B CUTOFF(W) at each step tone sections equally.
8.
Perform the above adjustments 6 and 7 until the white achieved.
Fig. 1-2
D-1
19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG
Page 73
ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS
2-2: CONTRAST MAX
1.
Receive an 70dB the color bar pattern.
2.
Place the set in Aging Test for more than 15 minutes.
3.
Receive the color bar pattern. (RF Input)
4.
Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.
5.
Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (35) on the remote control to select "CONTRAST MAX".
6.
Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until the contrast step No. becomes "53".
7.
Check if the picture is normal.
8.
Receive the color bar pattern. (VIDEO Input)
9.
Press the INPUT button on the remote control to set to the AV(CVBS) mode.
10.
Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (35) on the remote control to
11.
select "CONTRAST MAX". Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until the contrast step No. becomes "51".
12.
Check if the picture is normal.
13.
Receive the color bar pattern. (AV RGB Input)
14.
Press the INPUT button on the remote control to set to the AV(RGB) mode.Then perform the above adjustments 10~12.
15.
Receive the color bar pattern. (S-VIDEO Input)
16.
Press the INPUT button on the remote control to set to the AV(Y/C) mode. Then perform the above adjustments 10~12.
17.
Receive the color bar pattern. (COMPONENT Input)
18.
Press the INPUT button on the remote control to set to the COMPONENT mode.
19.
Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.
20.
Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (35) on the remote control to select "CONTRAST MAX". Press the VOL.UP/DOWN button on the remote
21. control until the contrast step No. becomes "50". Check if the picture is normal.
22. Receive the color bar pattern. (HDMI Input)
23. Press the INPUT button on the remote control to set to
24. the HDMI mode. Using the remote control, set the brightness and
25. contrast to normal position. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
26. press the channel button (35) on the remote control to select "CONTRAST MAX". Press the VOL.UP/DOWN button on the remote
27. control until the contrast step No. becomes "51". Check if the picture is normal.
28.
19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG
D-2
Page 74
2-3: Confirmation of Fixed Value (Step No.
)
)
Please check if the fixed values of each of the adjustment item is set correctly referring below. (TUNER/AV/COMPONENT/HDMI/PC/DVD//DTV
NO. FUNCTION ATU DTVDVD
OSD H POSI 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34
1
OSD V POSI 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31
2
R DRIVE(N) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
3
R CUT OFF(N) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
4
G DRIVE(N) 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768
5
G CUT OFF(N) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
6
B DRIVE(N) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
7
B CUTOFF(N) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
8
R DRIVE(C) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
9
R CUT OFF(C) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
10
G DRIVE(C) 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 x x x x x x 768 768
11
G CUT OFF(C) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x 0 0
12
B DRIVE(C) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
13
B CUTOFF(C) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
14
R DRIVE(W) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
15
R CUT OFF(W) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
16
G DRIVE(W) 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 x x x x x x 768 768
17
G CUT OFF(W) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x 0 0
18
B DRIVE(W) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
19
B CUTOFF(W) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
20
H POSI 50Hz 634 634 634 640 x x x x 624 288 x x x x x x x 178 6 x x x x x x x x 645 590
21
H POSI 50Hz 4:3 657 657 657 640 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
H POSI 50Hz 16:9 710 710 710 718 x x x x 692 322 337 298 x x x x x 281 46 166 75 x x x x x x 720 660
H POSI 50Hz 16:9 737 737 737 716 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
H POSI 50Hz CINEMA 768 768 768 769 x x x x 750 350 x x x x x x x 337 74 x x x x x x x x 778 722
H POSI 50Hz CINEMA 796 796 796 778 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
H POSI 60Hz 570 570 570 570 556 270 x x x x x x 150 10 8 x x x x x x x x x x x x 570 x
H POSI 60Hz 16:9 648 648 648 650 626 306 337 299 x x x x 230 46 42 118 76 x x x x x x x x x x 646 x
H POSI 60Hz CINEMA 706 706 706 706 684 334 xxxxxx2867466xxxxxxxxxxxx705x
H POSI PC 4:3 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 129 189 278 x x x x x
H POSI PC 16:9 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 129 189 278 150 301 340 x x
22 H POSI MAX (PC) x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 179 264 378 250 401 440 x x
23 H POSI MIN (PC) x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 79 114 178 50 201 240 x x
V POSI 50Hz 4:3/16:9 26 26 26 24 xxxx2654xxxxxxx104098xxxxxx2626
24
V POSI 50Hz FULL 26 26 26 24 x x x x 26 54 x x x x x x x 10 40 x x x x x x x x 26 26
V POSI 50Hz Cinema 60 60 60 58 xxxx61124xxxxxxx47110xxxxxxxx6060
V POSI 50Hz 14:9 43 43 43 38 xxxx4491xxxxxxx3279xxxxxxxx4345
V POSI 60Hz 4:3/16:9 18 18 18 16 18 42 9 8 xxxx8263098xxxxxxxxxx20X
V POSI 60Hz FULL 18 18 18 16 18 42 x x x x x x 8 26 30 x x x x x x x x x x x x 20 x
V POSI 60Hz Cinema 49 49 49 48 48 100 xxxxxx378488xxxxxxxxxxxx50x
V POSI 60Hz 14:9 34 34 34 32 34 73 xxxxxx245861xxxxxxxxxxxx35x
V POSI PC xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx292527172522xx
25
V POSI MAX 50Hz - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
V POSI MAX 60Hz - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
V POSI MAX PC xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx545052465044xx
26
V POSI MIN 50Hz xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
V POSI MIN 60Hz xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
V POSI MIN PC xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx402000xx
27 BACKLIGHT CENTER 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120
28 BACKLIGHT MAX 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162
29 BACKLIGHT MIN 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90
30 BRIGHT CENTER
31 BRIGHT MAX
32 BRIGHT MIN
33 TINT CENTER
34 CONTRAST CENTER
35 CONTRAST MAX
36 CONTRAST MIN
37 CONTRAST 50
38 COLOR CENTER
39 COLOR MAX
40 COLOR MIN
41 TEXT H POSI 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
42 TEXT V POSI 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
CVBS Y/C RGB 480i 480p 720p 1080i 576i 576p 720p 1080i 480i 480p VGA 720p 1080i 576i 576p 720p 1080i 640x480 800x600 1024x768 1280x720 1280x768 1360x768
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
NOTE: For the step no. with * mark, please adjust it according to the situation of the set.
NOTE: For the step no. with + mark, please adjust it according to the 2-4.
COMPONENT ( NTSC ) COMPONENT ( PAL ) HDMI ( NTSC ) HDMI ( PAL )
-6 -6 -6 -6 -6 -6 -6 -6 -6 -6 -6 -6 -6 -6 -6 -6 -6 8 8 8 8 8 8 -5 -2
70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
-64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -64
-5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -6
*************************
*************************
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 22 22 22 22 22 22 18 18
*************************
52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 42
63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63
0000000000000000000000000
ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS
PCAV
D-3 19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG D-4
Page 75
2-4: Confirmation of Fixed Value (Step No.
)
ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS
Please check if the fixed values of each of the adjustment item is set correctly referring below. (TUNER/AV)
TUNER
NO. FUNCTION
30
BRIGHT CENTER
31
BRIGHT MAX
32
BRIGHT MIN
33
TINT CENTER
34
CONTRAST CENTER
35
CONTRAST MAX
36
CONTRAST MIN
37
CONTRAST 50
38
COLOR CENTER
39
COLOR MAX COLOR MIN
40
NOTE: For the step no. with * mark, please adjust it according to the situation of the set.
576i 576i
PAL50 PAL60 SECAM PAL50 PAL60 SECAM NTSC3.58 NTSC4.43 PAL50 PAL60 SECAM NTSC3.58 NTSC4.43 PAL50 PAL60 SECAM NTSC3.58 NTSC4.43 PAL50 PAL60 SECAM NTSC3.58 NTSC4.43
-7 0 -7 -5 0 0 -5 0 -2 0 0 -2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
-80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80
0000 0 0 0 0 -40 0 -4 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0
**** * * * * ** * * * * * * * * ** * * *
**** * * * * ** * * * * * * * * ** * * *
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
**** * * * * ** * * * * * * * * ** * * *
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 44 40 40 44 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63
0000 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0
AV1 AV2(RCA)
CVBS CVBS
480i
STEP No.
AV2(RCA) AV1(RCA)
S(Y/C)
576i480i 576i
480i 576i 480i
RGB
D-5 19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG D-6
Page 76
ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS
LCD PANEL
CD7005
POWER PCB
CD7006
DVD MT PCB
CP8501
CP2301
CP2302
CP8502
CP2303
CD2001
CD6501
DVD DECK
CD2301
CD7204
DIGITAL PCB
CP3001
CP6401
J501
J301
SPEAKER
CD301
J8101
J8104
J8102
J8103
OPERATION PCB
CP501
CP8101
D-7
CP2201
CP6501
CP3801
CP4300
J4206
MAIN PCB
J4208
CP7200
CD4301
CD4302
CP5801
CP5802
CP5803
TU5801
TUNER PCB
CP7601
OS7601
REMOCON PCB
19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG
Page 77
(LCD SECTION)
POWER DOES NOT TURN ON
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Is F501 broken?
No
Is there voltage at pin 6 of IC501 21V?
Yes
Is R510 broken?
No
Change MAIN PCB.
Yes
No
Yes
Change F501.
Check IC501 and peripheral circuit.
Change R510.
E-1
19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG
Page 78
THE PICTURE APPEARS, BUT THE AUDIO DOES NOT APPEARS. (AT RF MODE)
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Is CD301 connected?
Yes
Is there signal at pins 1 and 4 of CD301?
No
Is there signal at pins 2 and 4 of IC301?
No
Is there signal at pin14 of TU5801?
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Connect CD301.
Change SP301 and SP302.
Check IC301 and peripheral circuit.
Check IC803 and peripheral circuit.
No
Change TU5801.
E-2
19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG
Page 79
THE PICTURE DOES NOT APPEAR
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Does backlight shine?
Yes
Is CD7204 connected?
No No
No
Is CD7005,CD7006 connected ?
Yes
Is the signal pin 16 and18 of IC7001 ?
Yes
Is the voltage at pin 20 of IC7001 12V ?
Yes
Connected CD7204.
No
No
Connected CD7005,CD7006
Check IC7001 and peripheral circuit.
Check F7001.
Yes
Is there voltage at pins 1,2 and 16 of CP7200 5V?
Yes
Is there signal at pins 5,6, 7,8,10,11,12,13,14,15,19, 20,21,23, 24,25,28,29,30 of CP7200
No
Change MAIN PCB.
No
Check IC803 and peripheral circuit.
Yes
Change V7201(PANEL).
E-3
19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG
Page 80
THE COLOR DOES NOT APPEAR
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Is setting of color normal?
Yes
Is the color signal received?
Yes
Change MAIN PCB.
No
Adjust the color.
No
Receive the color signal.
E-4
19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG
Page 81
(DVD SECTION)
DOES NOT DISPLAY DVD PICTURE
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Does this display logo picture?
No
Is there signal at pins 149 and 151 of IC4001?
No
Does IC4001 gets P.CON+3.3V and P.CON+1.8V?
No
Check P.CON+3.3V and P.CON+1.8V line.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Check the disc.
Check pins 8 and 10 of CP8501 and peripheral circuit.
Change IC4001.
E-5
19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG
Page 82
DISC DOES NOT EJECT
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Does OSD appear on the screen?
Yes
Does this eject disc at change DVD DECK?
Yes
Change DVD DECK.
No
No
Is remote key set effectively?
Is there signal at pins 4 and 5 of CP2302?
Yes
Is there signal at pins 1 and 2 of CP2302?
Yes
Change IC4001.
Yes
No
No
Check pins 138 and 139 of IC4001 and peripheral circuit.
Check IC4001 and peripheral circuit.
Change IC2301.
E-6
19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG
Page 83
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
DOES NOT PLAY DVD
Does this display "INCORRECT DISC"?
No
Does this display reading mark?
Yes
Yes
No
Does CD2001 connect with CP2301 correctly?
No
Connect CD2301.
Change IC4001.
Yes
Change DVD DECK.
No
Is the voltage between JG017 and JG018 less than 0.6V?
Yes
Does disc rotate?
Yes
Change IC4001.
No
Change DVD DECK.
E-7
19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG
Page 84
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
DOES NOT PLAY CD
Does this display "INCORRECT DISC"?
No
Does this display reading mark?
Yes
Yes
No
Does CD2001 connect with CP2301 correctly?
No
Connect CD2301.
Change IC4001.
Yes
Change DVD DECK.
No
Is the voltage between JG019 and JG018 less than 0.6V?
Yes
Does disc rotate?
Yes
Change IC4001.
No
Change DVD DECK.
E-8
19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG
Page 85
NO SOUND DVD/CD ANALOG AUDIO
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Is there signal at pins 113, 114, 115 and 116 of IC4001?
Yes
Is there signal at pins 1 and 7 of IC8501?
Yes
Does CD8501 connected?
Yes
Change MAIN PCB.
No
No
No
Change IC4001.
Check pins 1 and 7 of IC8501 and peripheral circuit.
Connected CD8501.
NO SOUND DVD/CD DIGITAL AUDIO
Is there signal at pin1 of CP8501?
No
Is there signal at pin122 of IC4001?
No
Change IC4001.
Yes
Yes
Change MAIN PCB.
Check line circuit IC4001 to CP8501.
E-9
19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG
Page 86
MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW
201
116
201
206
121
201
117
206
103A
201
203
103
103B
103D
PCBDA0 (REMOCON PCB ASS'Y)
203
203
122
110
209
PCB270
103C
(OPERATION PCB ASS'Y)
PCB130 (DVD MT PCB ASS'Y)
PCBF40 (MAIN PCB ASS'Y)
201
201
112
201
201
111
211
201
201
106
105
211
115
201
211
102B
102J
107
210
102C
102E
102I
102F
102G
PCBDH0 (DIGITAL PCB ASS'Y)
PCB290 (TUNER PCB ASS'Y)
120
211
201
211
102H
102H
201
207
102D
102A
108
102I
201
215
207
102H
214
213
108
211
212
102
201
109
PCB240 (POWER PCB ASS'Y)
201
201
201
119
201
113
114
201
201
101G
104B
101F
101F
118
101C
101D
101G
208
104A
101H
202
104D
101E
204
104D
104D
101A
101F
204
101H
104C
104E
202
104
203
101
204
104D
104E
202
104F
203
104D
205
204
J1-1
101B
19DV555DB/19DV555DG J1-2
Page 87
MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW
201
116
201
206
121
201
117
206
103A
201
203
103
103B
103D
PCBDA0 (REMOCON PCB ASS'Y)
203
203
122
110
201
PCB270
103C
(OPERATION PCB ASS'Y)
PCB130 (DVD MT PCB ASS'Y)
PCBF40 (MAIN PCB ASS'Y)
201
201
112
201
201
111
211
201
201
106
105
211
115
201
211
102B
102J
107
210
102C
102E
102I
102F
102G
PCBDH0 (DIGITAL PCB ASS'Y)
PCB290 (TUNER PCB ASS'Y)
120
211
201
211
102H
102H
201
207
102D
102A
108
102I
201
209
207
102H
214
213
108
211
212
102
201
109
PCB240 (POWER PCB ASS'Y)
201
201
201
119
201
113
114
201
201
101G
104B
101F
101F
118
101C
101D
101G
208
104A
101H
202
104D
101E
204
104D
104D
101A
101F
204
101H
104C
104E
202
104
203
101
204
104D
104E
202
104F
203
104D
205
204
J1-3
101B
19DV556DB J1-4
Page 88
MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW
201
116
201
206
121
201
117
206
103A
201
203
103
103B
103D
PCBDA0 (REMOCON PCB ASS'Y)
203
203
122
110
201
PCB270
103C
(OPERATION PCB ASS'Y)
PCB130 (DVD MT PCB ASS'Y)
PCBF40 (MAIN PCB ASS'Y)
201
201
112
201
201
111
211
201
201
106
105
211
115
201
211
102B
102J
107
210
102C
102E
102I
102F
102G
PCBDH0 (DIGITAL PCB ASS'Y)
PCB290 (TUNER PCB ASS'Y)
120
211
201
211
102H
102H
201
207
102D
102A
108
102I
201
209
207
102H
214
213
108
211
212
102
201
109
PCB240 (POWER PCB ASS'Y)
201
201
201
119
201
113
114
201
201
135
101G
104B
101F
101F
118
101C
101D
101G
208
104A
101H
202
104D
101E
204
104D
104D
101A
101F
204
101H
104C
104E
202
104
203
101
204
104D
104E
202
104F
203
104D
205
204
J1-5
101B
19DV556DG J1-6
Page 89
MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW
(PACKING DIAGRAM)
CD504, CD3805
123, 129, 130, 131,132
TM101
124
133
127
126
126
125
125
J1-7
125
125
128
128
19DV555DB/19DV556DB
Page 90
MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW
(PACKING DIAGRAM)
123,129,130,131,132,134
CD504, CD3805
TM101
124
133
127
126
125
128
125
J1-8
19DV555DG
Page 91
MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW
(PACKING DIAGRAM)
129, 130, 131,132,133,123
CD504, CD3805
TM101
124
134
127
126
125
125
J1-9
128
19DV556DG
Page 92
600
DVD DECK EXPLODED VIEW
601
608
CD2001
M2602
605
703
605
703
602
SW2
705
603
AA
701
704
PCB640 (SW PCB ASS'Y)
CD2301
702
607
702
604
606
703
Do not replace the parts. Because, minute adjustments are needed if this condition is disassembled further more. If the repair is needed, replace the DVD MECHA ASS'Y.
CLASS
GREASE G-555G
PART NO.
Y315061000
PART NAME
MARK
AA
J2-1
NOTE:
Applying positions AA for the grease are displayed for this section. Check if the correct grease is applied for each position.
19DV555DB/19DV555DG/19DV556DB/19DV556DG
Page 93
MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Location No.TSB P/N Reference No. Description
101 AE016563 7A708A037A FRONT CABI ASS'Y 101A AE016564 708WPDA028 CABINET FRONT 101B AE009570 702WNAA005 SHEET SPEAKER 101C AE009571 713WPAA280 GLASS LED 101D AE007694 7235490068 BADGE BRAND 101E AE016565 761WPA0542 COVER STAND 101F AE003760 800WQ0A046 FELT SHEET 101G AE009671 800WQ0A073 FELT SHEET 101H AE009679 800WQ0A119 FELT SHEET
102 AE016566 7A702A701A BACK CABI ASS'Y 102A AE016567 702WPAB336 CABINET BACK 102B AE009591 706WPA0031 COVER CONNECTOR 102C AE016568 722549A742 SHEET RATING 102D AE016531 723000E028 SHEET JACK-1 102E AE016532 723000E046 SHEET JACK-2 102F AE009577 761WSAA102 ANGLE HINGE 102G AE009578 761WSA0634 ANGLE BACK 102H AE003026 800WQ0A079 FELT SHEET 102I AE007708 800WQ00095 FELT SHEET 102J 75008108 800WQ00120 FELT SHEET
103 AE016569 7A711A096A PANEL SIDE ASS'Y 103A AE016570 711WPDA806 PANEL SIDE 103B AE009581 711WPEA001 SLOT DVD 103C AE009582 735WPAB101 BUTTON FRAME 103D AE008459 800WQ00105 FELT SHEET
104 AE016571 7A704A128A STAND ASS'Y 104A AE009585 704WPAA066 STAND 104B AE009586 761WPAA181 COVER HINGE 104C AE009587 761WSBA014 ANGLE STAND 104D AE009624 800SRA0002 CUSHION LEG VEB1349-A 104E AE008947 899NAGCL14 CABLE CLAMP 104F AE007710 89900FB118 BAND
105 AE016572 7G7520054A ANGLE PCB ASS'Y 106 AE016573 752WSA0713 SHIELD CI CARD 107 AE009763 744WUA0035 SPRING EARTH TUNER 108 AE009784 744WUA0038 SPRING EARTH-3 109 AE009786 752WSA0716 SHIELD JACK
110 AE009841 752WSA0723 SPRING,EARTH 111 AE009787 753WUA0102 SPRING EARTH-1 112 AE009600 761WPAA180 HOLDER REMOCON 113 AE009601 761WPAA184 HOLDER SPEAKER-L 114 AE009602 761WPAA187 HOLDER SPEAKER-R 115 AE016574 761WPAA207 HOLDER PANEL 116 75003896 8965TS064A CUSHION W10/H6/L40 117 AE009627 899RFPC25V HOLDER CORD 118 AE009590 706KSAA001 HINGE ASS'Y 119 AE009629 761WPA0515 HOLDER PCB
120 AE009796 800WQ00134 FELT SHEET 40*60*T0.5 121 AE008287 726000A139 SHEET CAUTION 122 AE009790 761WSA0679 ANGLE MPEG 123 AE016584 J51Z0101A INSTRUCTION BOOK(E) 124 AE016576 792PHAA023 PACKAGE TOP 125 AE016577 792PHAA024 PACKAGE BOTTOM 126 AE016578 793PCDA098 GIFT BOX 127 AE009842 791WHAA240 LAMIFILM BAG 128 AE016579 794PHAA001 HANDLE 129 AE016580 J51Z0107A QUICK SET-UP SHEET(E)
130 AE016581 J51Z0117A REGISTRATION CARD 131 AE016582 J51Z0141A HELPLINE SHEET 132 AE016583 JB5PD000 POLYBAG,INSTRUCTION(RED CAUTION) 133 AE016575 7A795A003A PAD PACKAGE ASS'Y
201 AE004849 8109230A0U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*10 CH 202 AE005140 810A14080U SCREW WASHER(A) M4*8 CH 203 AE005675 810923060U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*6 CH 204 AE009612 8110K3080U SCREW TAP TITE(P) LAMI HEAD 3*8 CH 205 AE007747 814623080U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*5.7+4*2.3 CH 206 AE003526 810923080U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*8 CH 207 AE003524 8109I30A0U SCREW TAP TITE(B) WH7 3*10 CH 208 AE003528 8110630A0U SCREW TAP TITE(P) BRAZIER 3*10 CH 209 AE009613 8109230A0S SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*10 BK
210 AE004851 810223080U SCREW BIND M3*8 CH 211 AE009614 8109230A4S SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*14 BK 212 AE016206 8117540A6S SCREW TAPPING(B0) TRUSS 4*16 BK 213 AE016537 810A13080U SCREW WASHER(A) M3*8 CH 214 AE005473 8109D30A0U SCREW TAP TITE(B) WH8 3*10 CH 215 AE016239 830023000U NUT M3
K1-1 19DV555DB
Page 94
MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
ocation No.TSB P/N Reference No. Description
101 AE016563 7A708A037A FRONT CABI ASS'Y 101A AE016564 708WPDA028 CABINET FRONT 101B AE009570 702WNAA005 SHEET SPEAKER 101C AE009571 713WPAA280 GLASS LED 101D AE007694 7235490068 BADGE BRAND 101E AE016565 761WPA0542 COVER STAND 101F AE003760 800WQ0A046 FELT SHEET 101G AE009671 800WQ0A073 FELT SHEET 101H AE009679 800WQ0A119 FELT SHEET
102 AE016628 7A702A702A BACK CABI ASS'Y 102A AE016567 702WPAB336 CABINET BACK 102B AE009591 706WPA0031 COVER CONNECTOR 102C AE016629 722549A745 SHEET RATING 102D AE016531 723000E028 SHEET JACK-1 102E AE016532 723000E046 SHEET JACK-2 102F AE009577 761WSAA102 ANGLE HINGE 102G AE009578 761WSA0634 ANGLE BACK 102H AE003026 800WQ0A079 FELT SHEET 102I AE007708 800WQ00095 FELT SHEET 102J 75008108 800WQ00120 FELT SHEET
103 AE016569 7A711A096A PANEL SIDE ASS'Y 103A AE016570 711WPDA806 PANEL SIDE 103B AE009581 711WPEA001 SLOT DVD 103C AE009582 735WPAB101 BOTTOM FRAME 103D AE008459 800WQ00105 FELT SHEET
104 AE016571 7A704A128A STAND ASS'Y 104A AE009585 704WPAA066 STAND 104B AE009586 761WPAA181 COVER HINGE 104C AE009587 761WSBA014 ANGLE STAND 104D AE009624 800SRA0002 CUSHION LEG VEB1349-A 104E AE008947 899NAGCL14 CABLE CLAMP 104F AE007710 89900FB118 BAND
105 AE016572 7G7520054A ANGLE PCB ASS'Y 106 AE016573 752WSA0713 SHIELD CI CARD 107 AE009763 744WUA0035 SPRING EARTH TUNER 108 AE009784 744WUA0038 SPRING EARTH-3 109 AE009786 752WSA0716 SHIELD JACK
110 AE009841 752WSA0723 SPRING,EARTH 111 AE009787 753WUA0102 SPRING EARTH-1 112 AE009600 761WPAA180 HOLDER REMOCON 113 AE009601 761WPAA184 HOLDER SPEAKER-L 114 AE009602 761WPAA187 HOLDER SPEAKER-R 115 AE016574 761WPAA207 HOLDER PANEL 116 75003896 8965TS064A CUSHION W10/H6/L40 117 AE009627 899RFPC25V HOLDER CORD 118 AE009590 706KSAA001 HINGE ASS'Y 119 AE009629 761WPA0515 HOLDER PCB
120 AE009796 800WQ00134 FELT SHEET 40*60*T0.5 121 AE008287 726000A139 SHEET CAUTION 122 AE009790 761WSA0679 ANGLE MPEG 123 AE016630 J51Z0210A SIMPLE INSTRUCTION BOOK(9 LANG.) 124 AE016576 792PHAA023 PACKAGE TOP 125 AE016577 792PHAA024 PACKAGE BOTTOM 126 AE016631 793PCDA104 GIFT BOX 127 AE009842 791WHAA240 LAMIFILM BAG 128 AE016579 794PHAA001 HANDLE 129 AE016632 J51Z0207A QUICK SET-UP SHEET(E)
130 AE016633 J51Z0231A INSTRUCTION BOOK(E) 131 AE016634 J51Z0232A INSTRUCTION BOOK(G) 132 AE016583 JB5PD000 POLYBAG,INSTRUCTION(RED CAUTION) 133 AE016575 7A795A003A PAD PACKAGE ASS'Y 134 AE016635 J51Z0233A INSTRUCTION BOOK(F)
201 AE004849 8109230A0U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*10 CH 202 AE005140 810A14080U SCREW WASHER(A) M4*8 CH 203 AE005675 810923060U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*6 CH 204 AE009612 8110K3080U SCREW TAP TITE(P) LAMI HEAD 3*8 CH 205 AE007747 814623080U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*5.7+4*2.3 CH 206 AE003526 810923080U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*8 CH 207 AE003524 8109I30A0U SCREW TAP TITE(B) WH7 3*10 CH 208 AE003528 8110630A0U SCREW TAP TITE(P) BRAZIER 3*10 CH 209 AE009613 8109230A0S SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*10 BK
210 AE004851 810223080U SCREW BIND M3*8 CH 211 AE009614 8109230A4S SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*14 BK 212 AE016206 8117540A6S SCREW TAPPING(B0) TRUSS 4*16 BK 213 AE016537 810A13080U SCREW WASHER(A) M3*8 CH 214 AE005473 8109D30A0U SCREW TAP TITE(B) WH8 3*10 CH 215 AE016239 830023000U NUT M3
K1-2 19DV555DG
Page 95
MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Location No.TSB P/N Reference No. Description
101 AE016638 7A708A042A FRONT CABI ASS'Y 101A AE016639 708WPDA033 CABINET FRONT 101B AE009640 702WNBA011 SHEET SPEAKER 101C AE009571 713WPAA280 GLASS LED 101D AE007694 7235490068 BADGE BRAND 101E AE009950 761WPAA208 COVER STAND 101F AE003760 800WQ0A046 FELT SHEET 101G AE009671 800WQ0A073 FELT SHEET 101H AE009679 800WQ0A119 FELT SHEET
102 AE016640 7A702A652A BACK CABI ASS'Y 102A AE016641 702WPAB313 CABINET BACK 102B AE009650 706WPA0034 COVER CONNECTOR 102C AE016642 722549A746 SHEET RATING 102D AE016607 723000E044 SHEET JACK-1 102E AE016608 723000E045 SHEET JACK-2 102F AE009577 761WSAA102 ANGLE HINGE 102G AE009578 761WSA0634 ANGLE BACK 102H AE003026 800WQ0A079 FELT SHEET 102I AE007708 800WQ00095 FELT SHEET 102J 75008108 800WQ00120 FELT SHEET
103 AE016643 7A711A099A PANEL SIDE ASS'Y 103A AE016644 711WPDA807 PANEL SIDE 103B AE009581 711WPEA001 SLOT DVD 103C AE009645 735WPAB117 BUTTON FRAME 103D AE008459 800WQ00105 FELT SHEET
104 AE016645 7A704A133A STAND ASS'Y 104A AE009647 704WPAA068 STAND 104B AE009648 761WPAA189 COVER HINGE 104C AE009587 761WSBA014 ANGLE STAND 104D AE009624 800SRA0002 CUSHION LEG VEB1349-A 104E AE008947 899NAGCL14 CABLE CLAMP 104F AE007710 89900FB118 BAND
105 AE016572 7G7520054A ANGLE PCB ASS'Y 106 AE016573 752WSA0713 SHIELD CI CARD 107 AE009763 744WUA0035 SPRING EARTH TUNER 108 AE009784 744WUA0038 SPRING EARTH-3 109 AE009786 752WSA0716 SHIELD JACK
110 AE009841 752WSA0723 SPRING,EARTH 111 AE009787 753WUA0102 SPRING EARTH-1 112 AE009600 761WPAA180 HOLDER REMOCON 113 AE009601 761WPAA184 HOLDER SPEAKER-L 114 AE009602 761WPAA187 HOLDER SPEAKER-R 115 AE016574 761WPAA207 HOLDER PANEL 116 75003896 8965TS064A CUSHION W10/H6/L40 117 AE009627 899RFPC25V HOLDER CORD 118 AE009590 706KSAA001 HINGE ASS'Y 119 AE009629 761WPA0515 HOLDER PCB
120 AE009796 800WQ00134 FELT SHEET 40*60*T0.5 121 AE008287 726000A139 SHEET CAUTION 122 AE009790 761WSA0679 ANGLE MPEG 123 AE016584 J51Z0101A INSTRUCTION BOOK(E) 124 AE016576 792PHAA023 PACKAGE TOP 125 AE016577 792PHAA024 PACKAGE BOTTOM 126 AE016646 793PCDA106 GIFT BOX 127 AE009842 791WHAA240 LAMIFILM BAG 128 AE016647 794PHAA002 HANDLE 129 AE016580 J51Z0107A QUICK SET-UP SHEET(E)
130 AE016581 J51Z0117A REGISTRATION CARD 131 AE016582 J51Z0141A HELPLINE SHEET 132 AE016583 JB5PD000 POLYBAG,INSTRUCTION(RED CAUTION) 133 AE016575 7A795A003A PAD PACKAGE ASS'Y
201 AE004849 8109230A0U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*10 CH 202 AE005140 810A14080U SCREW WASHER(A) M4*8 CH 203 AE005675 810923060U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*6 CH 204 AE009612 8110K3080U SCREW TAP TITE(P) LAMI HEAD 3*8 CH 205 AE007747 814623080U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*5.7+4*2.3 CH 206 AE003526 810923080U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*8 CH 207 AE003524 8109I30A0U SCREW TAP TITE(B) WH7 3*10 CH 208 AE003528 8110630A0U SCREW TAP TITE(P) BRAZIER 3*10 CH 209 AE016239 830023000U NUT M3
210 AE004851 810223080U SCREW BIND M3*8 CH 211 AE009655 8109230A4U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*14 CH 212 AE004847 8117540A6U SCREW TAPPING(B0) TRUSS 4*16 CH 213 AE016537 810A13080U SCREW WASHER(A) M3*8 CH 214 AE005473 8109D30A0U SCREW TAP TITE(B) WH8 3*10 CH
K1-3 19DV556DB
Page 96
MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Location No.TSB P/N Reference No. Description
101 AE016638 7A708A042A FRONT CABI ASS'Y 101A AE016639 708WPDA033 CABINET FRONT 101B AE009640 702WNBA011 SHEET SPEAKER 101C AE009571 713WPAA280 GLASS LED 101D AE007694 7235490068 BADGE BRAND 101E AE009950 761WPAA208 COVER STAND 101F AE003760 800WQ0A046 FELT SHEET 101G AE009671 800WQ0A073 FELT SHEET 101H AE009679 800WQ0A119 FELT SHEET
102 AE016649 7A702A650A BACK CABI ASS'Y 102A AE016641 702WPAB313 CABINET BACK 102B AE009650 706WPA0034 COVER CONNECTOR 102C AE016650 722549A744 SHEET RATING 102D AE016607 723000E044 SHEET JACK-1 102E AE016608 723000E045 SHEET JACK-2 102F AE009577 761WSAA102 ANGLE HINGE 102G AE009578 761WSA0634 ANGLE BACK 102H AE003026 800WQ0A079 FELT SHEET 102I AE007708 800WQ00095 FELT SHEET 102J 75008108 800WQ00120 FELT SHEET
103 AE016643 7A711A099A PANEL SIDE ASS'Y 103A AE016644 711WPDA807 PANEL SIDE 103B AE009581 711WPEA001 SLOT DVD 103C AE009645 735WPAB117 BUTTON FRAME 103D AE008459 800WQ00105 FELT SHEET
104 AE016645 7A704A133A STAND ASS'Y 104A AE009647 704WPAA068 STAND 104B AE009648 761WPAA189 COVER HINGE 104C AE009587 761WSBA014 ANGLE STAND 104D AE009624 800SRA0002 CUSHION LEG VEB1349-A 104E AE008947 899NAGCL14 CABLE CLAMP 104F AE007710 89900FB118 BAND
105 AE016572 7G7520054A ANGLE PCB ASS'Y 106 AE016573 752WSA0713 SHIELD CI CARD 107 AE009763 744WUA0035 SPRING EARTH TUNER 108 AE009784 744WUA0038 SPRING EARTH-3 109 AE009786 752WSA0716 SHIELD JACK
110 AE009841 752WSA0723 SPRING,EARTH 111 AE009787 753WUA0102 SPRING EARTH-1 112 AE009600 761WPAA180 HOLDER REMOCON 113 AE009601 761WPAA184 HOLDER SPEAKER-L 114 AE009602 761WPAA187 HOLDER SPEAKER-R 115 AE016574 761WPAA207 HOLDER PANEL 116 75003896 8965TS064A CUSHION W10/H6/L40 117 AE009627 899RFPC25V HOLDER CORD 118 AE009590 706KSAA001 HINGE ASS'Y 119 AE009629 761WPA0515 HOLDER PCB
120 AE009796 800WQ00134 FELT SHEET 40*60*T0.5 121 AE008287 726000A139 SHEET CAUTION 122 AE009790 761WSA0679 ANGLE MPEG 123 AE016630 J51Z0210A SIMPLE INSTRUCTION BOOK(9 LANG.) 124 AE016576 792PHAA023 PACKAGE TOP 125 AE016577 792PHAA024 PACKAGE BOTTOM 126 AE016651 793PCDA105 GIFT BOX 127 AE009842 791WHAA240 LAMIFILM BAG 128 AE016647 794PHAA002 HANDLE 129 AE016632 J51Z0207A QUICK SET-UP SHEET(E)
130 AE016633 J51Z0231A INSTRUCTION BOOK(E) 131 AE016634 J51Z0232A INSTRUCTION BOOK(G) 132 AE016583 JB5PD000 POLYBAG,INSTRUCTION(RED CAUTION) 133 AE016635 J51Z0233A INSTRUCTION BOOK(F) 134 AE016575 7A795A003A PAD PACKAGE ASS'Y 135 AE016652 723549A094 POP LABEL
201 AE004849 8109230A0U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*10 CH 202 AE005140 810A14080U SCREW WASHER(A) M4*8 CH 203 AE005675 810923060U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*6 CH 204 AE009612 8110K3080U SCREW TAP TITE(P) LAMI HEAD 3*8 CH 205 AE007747 814623080U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*5.7+4*2.3 CH 206 AE003526 810923080U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*8 CH 207 AE003524 8109I30A0U SCREW TAP TITE(B) WH7 3*10 CH 208 AE003528 8110630A0U SCREW TAP TITE(P) BRAZIER 3*10 CH 209 AE016239 830023000U NUT M3
210 AE004851 810223080U SCREW BIND M3*8 CH 211 AE009655 8109230A4U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*14 CH 212 AE004847 8117540A6U SCREW TAPPING(B0) TRUSS 4*16 CH 213 AE016537 810A13080U SCREW WASHER(A) M3*8 CH 214 AE005473 8109D30A0U SCREW TAP TITE(B) WH8 3*10 CH
K1-4 19DV556DG
Page 97
DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description
! 600 AE009615 A50N01P650 DVD MECHA ASS'Y A50N01P650 601 AE008499 92SBB0033A LOADER SUB ASS'Y DLM1D29-31 602 AE005815 92AAA0017A FEED RACK ASS'Y 603 AE003551 92P100088A GEAR,MOTOR 604 AE005805 92P100117A GEAR,MIDDLE 605 AE008500 92P200017A INSULATOR, F 606 AE008501 92P200018A INSULATOR, R 607 AE005816 92P100116A GEAR,FEED 608 AE016078 800WFAA008 CUSHION C
701 AE005817 92P700007A SCREW,GEAR FEED 702 AE003554 814011723U SCREW ,PAN M1.7*2.3 P3 CH 703 AE003555 816112080U SEMS.TAP TITE(P) PAN W10 2*8 CH 704 AE005006 813381750U SCREW ,T-TITE(B)CAMERA PAN M1.7*5.0 P3 CH 705 AE003557 811022080U SCREW ,TAP TITE(P) BIND 2*8 CH
CD2001 AE009434 12C14O1602 CORD JUMPER FFC05241600408T1-A04 CD2301 AE003558 122H062102 CORD JUMPER 2H062102 M2602 AE009616 1515T98006 MOTOR WRF-300CA-10460A PCB640 AE008503 A5X002C640 SW PCB ASS'Y A50N01P650 SW2 AE001158 0500101036 PUSH SW ITCH ESE22MH22
K2-1 19DV555DB
Page 98
DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Location No.
! 600 AE009615 A50N01P650 DVD MECHA ASS'Y A50N01P650
601 AE008499 92SBB0033A LOADER SUB ASS'Y DLM1D29-31 602 AE005815 92AAA0017A FEED RACK ASS'Y 603 AE003551 92P100088A GEAR,MOTOR 604 AE005805 92P100117A GEAR,MIDDLE 605 AE008500 92P200017A INSULATOR, F 606 AE008501 92P200018A INSULATOR, R 607 AE005816 92P100116A GEAR,FEED 608 AE016078 800WFAA008 CUSHION C
701 AE005817 92P700007A SCREW ,GEAR FEED 702 AE003554 814011723U SCREW,PAN M1.7*2.3 P3 CH 703 AE003555 816112080U SEMS.TAP TITE(P) PAN W10 2*8 CH 704 AE005006 813381750U SCREW,T-TITE(B)CAMERA PAN M1.7*5.0 P3 CH 705 AE003557 811022080U SCREW,TAP TITE(P) BIND 2*8 CH
CD2001 AE009434 12C14O1602 CORD JUMPER FFC05241600408T1-A04 CD2301 AE003558 122H062102 CORD JUMPER 2H062102 M2602 AE009616 1515T98006 MOTOR W RF-300CA-10460A PCB640 AE008503 A5X002C640 SW PCB ASS'Y DED020A SW2 AE001158 0500101036 PUSH SWITCH ESE22MH22
TSB P/N Reference No. Description
K2-2 19DV555DG
Page 99
DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Y
(B)
(P)
Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description
! 600 AE009615 A50N01P650 DVD MECHA ASS'Y A50N01P650
601 AE005816 92P100116A GEAR,FEED 601 AE008499 92SBB0033A LOADER SUB ASS'Y DLM1D29-31 602 AE005815 92AAA0017A FEED RACK ASS' 603 AE003551 92P100088A GEAR,MOTOR 604 AE005805 92P100117A GEAR,MIDDLE 605 AE008500 92P200017A INSULATOR, F 606 AE008501 92P200018A INSULATOR, R 608 AE016078 800WFAA008 CUSHION C
701 AE005817 92P700007A SCREW,GEAR FEED 702 AE003554 814011723U SCREW ,PAN M1.7*2.3 P3 CH 703 AE003555 816112080U SEMS.TAP TITE(P) PAN W10 2*8 CH 704 AE005006 813381750U SCREW,T-TITE 705 AE003557 811022080U SCREW,TAP TITE
CD2001 AE009434 12C14O1602 CORD JUMPER FFC05241600408T1-A04 CD2301 AE003558 122H062102 CORD JUMPER 2H062102 M2602 AE009616 1515T98006 MOTOR WRF-300CA-10460A PCB640 AE008503 A5X002C640 SW PCB ASS'Y DED020A SW2 AE001158 0500101036 PUSH SWITCH ESE22MH22
CAMERA PAN M1.7*5.0 P3 CH
BIND 2*8 CH
K2-3 19DV556DB
Page 100
DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Y
(P)
(B)
(P)
Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description
! 600 AE009615 A50N01P650 DVD MECHA ASS'Y A50N01P650 601 AE008499 92SBB0033A LOADER SUB ASS'Y DLM1D29-31 602 AE005815 92AAA0017A FEED RACK ASS' 603 AE003551 92P100088A GEAR,MOTOR 604 AE005805 92P100117A GEAR,MIDDLE 605 AE008500 92P200017A INSULATOR, F 606 AE008501 92P200018A INSULATOR, R 607 AE005816 92P100116A GEAR,FEED 608 AE016078 800WFAA008 CUSHION C
701 AE005817 92P700007A SCREW,GEAR FEED 702 AE003554 814011723U SCREW,PAN M1.7*2.3 P3 CH
703 AE003555 816112080U SEMS.TAP TITE 704 AE005006 813381750U SCREW ,T-TITE 705 AE003557 811022080U SCREW ,TAP TITE
CD2001 AE009434 12C14O1602 CORD JUMPER FFC05241600408T1-A04 CD2301 AE003558 122H062102 CORD JUMPER 2H062102 SW2 AE001158 0500101036 PUSH SWITCH ESE22MH22 PCB640 AE008503 A5X002C640 SW PCB ASS'Y DED020A M2602 AE009616 1515T98006 MOTOR WRF-300CA-10460A
PAN W10 2*8 CH
CAMERA PAN M1.7*5.0 P3 CH
BIND 2*8 CH
K2-4 19DV556DG
Loading...